VH6 series frequency converter

User manual

Wuxi XINJE Electric Co., Ltd.

Data No. INV C 04 20240301 1.3

Basic description
 Thank you for purchasing Xinje VH6 series frequency converter. Please read this product manual carefully
before carrying out relevant operation.
 The manual mainly provides users with relevant guidance and instructions for the correct use and
maintenance of the frequency converter. The manual involves the functions of the frequency converter
capability, usage, installation and maintenance, etc.
 The contents in the manual are only applicable to the inverter products of Xinje company.

Notice to users
This manual is applicable to the following personnel:
 The installation personnel of frequency converter
 Engineering and technical personnel (electrical engineer, electrical operator, etc.)
 The designer
Before the above personnel operate or debug the inverter, please carefully read the chapter of safety precautions
in this manual.

Statement of responsibility
 Although the contents of the manual have been carefully checked, errors are inevitable, and we can not
guarantee the complete consistency.
 We will check the contents of the manual frequently and make corrections in subsequent versions. We
welcome your valuable comments.
 The contents described in the manual are subject to change without prior notice.

Contact us
If you have any questions about the use of this product, please contact the agent that purchased the product, or
you can contact Xinje company directly.
 Tel: 400-885-0136
 Fax: 0510-85111290
 Address: 816 Jianzhu West Road, Binhu District, Wuxi City, Jiangsu Province, China
 Post code: 214072
 Website: www.xinje.com
 Catalog
1. PRODUCT INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................................................6

1-1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW ...................................................................................................................................................... 6

1-1-1. Naming rule .......................................................................................................................................................6
1-2. SPECIFICATION ...............................................................................................................................................................7
1-2-1. Technical specification ....................................................................................................................................... 7
1-2-2. General specification ......................................................................................................................................... 7
1-3. PART DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................................................................... 10

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING ....................................................................................................................................17

2-1. INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT ......................................................................................................................................... 17

2-1-1. Environment requirements ..............................................................................................................................17
2-1-2. Installation space and direction ...................................................................................................................... 17
2-1-3. Single installation ............................................................................................................................................ 17
2-1-4. Multiple installation ........................................................................................................................................ 18
2-1-5. Vertical installation ..........................................................................................................................................19
2-1-6. Panel installation ............................................................................................................................................. 19
2-2. WIRING NOTICE ...........................................................................................................................................................19
2-3. MAIN CIRCUIT WIRING ..................................................................................................................................................20
2-3-1. Wiring diagram ............................................................................................................................................... 20
2-3-2. Arrangement and description of main circuit terminals ................................................................................. 21
2-3-3. Wiring process of main circuit .........................................................................................................................23
2-4. CONFIGURATION AND WIRING OF THE CONTROL CIRCUIT .....................................................................................................24
2-4-1. Control circuit terminals .................................................................................................................................. 24
2-4-2. Digital I/O wiring ............................................................................................................................................. 26
2-4-3. Analog I/O wiring ............................................................................................................................................ 28
2-4-4. Communication terminal wiring ......................................................................................................................30

3. OPERATION AND APPLICATION ............................................................................................................................... 32

3-1. OPERATION PANEL ........................................................................................................................................................32

3-1-1. Appearance ..................................................................................................................................................... 32
3-1-2. Keyboard ..........................................................................................................................................................32
3-1-3. LED lights ......................................................................................................................................................... 33
3-1-4. Operation method ........................................................................................................................................... 33
3-1-5. Multi-function buttons .................................................................................................................................... 36
3-1-6. Quick reference of parameters ........................................................................................................................36
3-2. POWER ON ................................................................................................................................................................. 38
3-2-1. Inspection after power on ............................................................................................................................... 38
3-2-2. Initial power on operation ...............................................................................................................................38
3-2-3. Start to debug ..................................................................................................................................................39
3-2-4. Debugging process .......................................................................................................................................... 40
3-3. START STOP OF THE VFD ...............................................................................................................................................41
3-3-1. Start stop signal ...............................................................................................................................................41
3-3-2. Start mode ....................................................................................................................................................... 42
3-3-3. Stop mode ........................................................................................................................................................43

iii
 3-4. VFD OPERATION FREQUENCY ......................................................................................................................................... 45
3-5. SWING FREQUENCY FUNCTION ....................................................................................................................................... 45
3-6. FIXED LENGTH CONTROL ................................................................................................................................................46
3-7. VFD COUNTING FUNCTION ............................................................................................................................................47
3-8. MOTOR PARAMETERS AND TUNING ................................................................................................................................. 48
3-8-1. Motor parameter setting .................................................................................................................................48
3-8-2. Motor tuning ................................................................................................................................................... 49
3-9. USING METHOD OF TERMINAL X .....................................................................................................................................50
3-10. USING METHOD OF TERMINAL Y ...................................................................................................................................51
3-11. USING METHOD OF TERMINAL AI ................................................................................................................................. 51
3-12. USING METHOD OF TERMINAL AO ................................................................................................................................51

4. FUNCTION PARAMETERS ......................................................................................................................................... 52

4-1. FUNCTION CODE LIST ....................................................................................................................................................52

Group P0: Basic operation parameters ......................................................................................................................52
Group P1: First motor parameters .............................................................................................................................54
Group P2: Input terminal function parameters ......................................................................................................... 55
Group P3: Output terminal function parameters ...................................................................................................... 59
Group P4: Start stop mode ........................................................................................................................................ 61
Group P5: VF parameters ...........................................................................................................................................62
Group P6: Vector control parameters ........................................................................................................................64
Group P7: Fault parameters ...................................................................................................................................... 65
Group P8: Keyboard and display ................................................................................................................................69
Group P9: Communication parameters ..................................................................................................................... 72
Group PA: Process control closed-loop parameters .................................................................................................. 73
Group PB: Multi-speed and simple PLC operation parameters ................................................................................. 74
Group PC: Auxiliary operation parameters ................................................................................................................76
Group PE: User optional parameters .........................................................................................................................80
Group PF: Torque control(Firmware versions below 3720) ....................................................................................... 81
Group PF: Torque control(Firmware versions 3720 and above) ................................................................................81
Group A0: Textile ....................................................................................................................................................... 82
Group A1: Virtual IO ...................................................................................................................................................82
Group A2: Second motor parameters ........................................................................................................................ 84
Group A4: Password countdown lock (supported by 3720 and above versions) .......................................................86
Group A9: Communication address mapping (supported by 3720 and above versions) .......................................... 86
Group AD: AIAO correction ........................................................................................................................................ 87
Group U0: Monitor parameters ................................................................................................................................. 88
Group U4: Communication monitoring parameters(supported by 3720 versions and above) ................................. 92
4-2. PARAMETER EXPLANATION .............................................................................................................................................93
4-2-1. Group P0 Basic operation parameter ..............................................................................................................93
4-2-2. Group P1 First motor parameters ................................................................................................................... 99
4-2-3. Group P2 Input terminal multi-function parameters .................................................................................... 101
4-2-4. Group P3 Output terminal multi-function parameters ................................................................................. 111
4-2-5. Group P4 Startup brake parameters ............................................................................................................. 115
4-2-6. Group P5 VF parameters ............................................................................................................................... 118
4-2-7. Group P6 Vector parameters .........................................................................................................................125
4-2-8. Group P7 Fault and protection ...................................................................................................................... 127

iv
 4-2-9. Group P8 Keyboard and display .................................................................................................................... 133
4-2-10. Group P9 Communication protocol .............................................................................................................138
4-2-11. Group PA PID parameters of process control ..............................................................................................140
4-2-12. Group PB Multi-speed and simple PLC ........................................................................................................ 145
4-2-13. Group PC Auxiliary function ........................................................................................................................ 147
4-2-14. Group PE User optional parameters ........................................................................................................... 157
4-2-15. Group PF Torque control(Firmware versions below 3720) ..........................................................................158
4-2-16. Group PF Torque control(Firmware versions 3720 and above) .................................................................. 159
4-2-17. Group A0 Textile .......................................................................................................................................... 161
4-2-18. Group A1 Virtual IO ..................................................................................................................................... 163
4-2-19. Group A2 Second motor parameters ...........................................................................................................165
4-2-20. Group A4 Password countdown lock (supported by 3720 and above versions) ......................................... 167
4-2-21. Group A9 Communication address mapping (supported by 3720 and above versions) .............................168
4-2-22. Group AD AIAO correction parameters ....................................................................................................... 169
4-2-23. Group U0 Monitor parameters ................................................................................................................... 170
4-2-24. Group U4 Communication monitoring parameters ....................................................................................177

5. EMC ....................................................................................................................................................................... 181

5-1. EMC COMPLIANT INSTALLATION GUIDELINES .................................................................................................................. 181

5-1-1. Noise suppression ..........................................................................................................................................181
5-1-2. Field wiring and grounding ........................................................................................................................... 182

6. MODEL AND DIMENSION .......................................................................................................................................183

6-1. VH6 SERIES VFD ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION .................................................................................................................. 183

6-2. VH6 SERIES VFD DIMENSION ...................................................................................................................................... 184
6-3. ACCESSORIES SELECTION GUIDE .................................................................................................................................... 189
6-3-1. Accessories functions .....................................................................................................................................189
6-3-2. Cable selection ...............................................................................................................................................190
6-3-3. Selection guidance of circuit breaker, contactor and fuse ............................................................................ 193
6-3-4. Reactor selection guide ................................................................................................................................. 193
6-3-5. Brake resistor selection ................................................................................................................................. 194

7. FAULT AND SOLUTION ...........................................................................................................................................198

7-1. FAULT ALARM AND SOLUTION .......................................................................................................................................198

7-2. FAULT RECORD QUERY .................................................................................................................................................201
7-3. FAULT RESET ............................................................................................................................................................. 201
7-4. VFD COMMON FAULT ANALYSIS OF FREQUENCY CONVERTER .............................................................................................. 202
7-4-1. Motor not rotate ........................................................................................................................................... 202
7-4-2. Motor vibration ............................................................................................................................................. 203
7-4-3. Over voltage .................................................................................................................................................. 203
7-4-4. Motor overheat ............................................................................................................................................. 204
7-4-5. Over current ...................................................................................................................................................205
7-4-6. VFD overheat ................................................................................................................................................. 206
7-4-7. The motor stalls during acceleration and deceleration ................................................................................ 207
7-4-8. Under voltage ................................................................................................................................................207

8. MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................................................................................... 208

v
 8-1 MAINTENANCE ...........................................................................................................................................................208
8-1-1. Routine maintenance .................................................................................................................................... 208
8-2. REGULAR MAINTENANCE .............................................................................................................................................208
8-2-1. Regular maintenance .................................................................................................................................... 208
8-2-2. Regular maintenance .................................................................................................................................... 208
8-3. WARRANTY OF FREQUENCY CONVERTER .........................................................................................................................209

APPENDIX .................................................................................................................................................................. 210

APPENDIX A. EXTENSION CARD ........................................................................................................................................... 210

Appendix A-1. Extension card functions .................................................................................................................. 210
Appendix A-2. Extension card installation ............................................................................................................... 211
Appendix A-3. IO extension card ..............................................................................................................................211
Appendix A-4. Communication extension card ........................................................................................................214
Appendix A-5. Encoder extension card .................................................................................................................... 215

APPENDIX B. COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL ............................................................................................................. 222

Appendix B-1. Communication protocol overview .................................................................................................. 222

Appendix B-2. Communication protocol explanation .............................................................................................. 222
Appendix B-3. Modbus-RTU protocol ...................................................................................................................... 222

vi
Attention
Safety precautions
(1) Definition of safety information

Notice Steps taken to ensure proper operation.

If you Don't comply with the relevant requirements, it will cause serious personal
Danger
injury, or even death.

Failure to comply with the requirements may result in personal injury or equipment
Warning
damage.

(2) Safety notice

 Unpacking check

Notice
1. Before unpacking, please check whether the outer package of the product is in good condition, and whether
there is damage, moisture, deformation, etc.
2. Before unpacking, please check whether the external model identification of the packing box is consistent with
that of the ordered model.
3. When unpacking, please check the surface of products and accessories for damage, corrosion, bruise, etc.
4. After unpacking, please check whether the product name plate label is consistent with the external model label.
5. After unpacking, check whether the internal accessories are complete, including operation panel and expansion
card.
Note: If any of the above five points appear during unpacking, please contact the local Xinje office or Xinje dealer
in time, and we will solve the problem for you as soon as possible.

 Installation

Notice
1. When carrying, please hold the bottom of the machine.
If you only hold the panel, there is a risk that the main body will fall and hurt your feet.
2. Please install it on the plate of metal and other non combustible materials.
If it is installed on flammable materials, there is a risk of fire.
3. When more than two inverters are installed in the same control cabinet, please set the cooling fan and keep the
air temperature at the air inlet below 40 ℃.
Due to overheating, it can cause fire and other accidents.

1
 Wiring

Notice
1. Please confirm whether the rated voltage of AC main circuit power supply is consistent with that of frequency
converter.
Danger of injury and fire.
2. Don't do voltage withstand test on the inverter.
Will cause damage to semiconductor components, etc.
3. Please connect the brake resistor or brake unit according to the wiring diagram.
There is a risk of fire.
4. Please use the screw driver with specified torque to fasten the terminal.
There is a risk of fire.
5. Don't connect the input power line to the output U, V and W terminals.
If the voltage is applied to the output terminal, the inverter will be damaged internally.
6. Don't connect the phase-shifting capacitor and LC / RC noise filter to the output circuit.
It will cause internal damage to the inverter.
7. Don't connect the electromagnetic switch and contactor to the output circuit.
When the frequency converter is running with load, the surge current generated by the action of electromagnetic
switch and electromagnetic contactor will cause the over-current protection circuit of the frequency converter to
act.
8. Don't remove the front panel cover.
May cause internal damage to the inverter.

Danger
1. Before wiring, please make sure that the input power has been cut off.
Danger of electric shock and fire.
2. Ask electrical engineering professionals to do wiring operation.
Danger of electric shock and fire.
3. The grounding terminal must be reliably grounded.
Danger of electric shock and fire.
4. After the emergency stop terminal is connected, be sure to check whether its action is effective.
There is a risk of injury. (the responsibility for wiring shall be borne by the user)
5. Don't touch the output terminal directly, don't connect the output terminal of the inverter with the cover, and
don't short circuit between the output terminals. There is danger of electric shock and short circuit.
6. After cutting off the AC power supply, before the indicator light of the AC motor driver goes out, it means that
there is still high voltage inside the AC motor driver, which is very dangerous. Please don't touch the internal
circuit and components.

2
 Maintenance and inspection

Notice
1. The keyboard, control circuit board and driver circuit board are equipped with CMOS integrated circuits.
Please pay special attention when using.
If you touch the circuit board directly with your fingers, static induction may damage the integrated chip on the
circuit board.
2. Don't change the wiring or remove the terminal wiring during power on. Don't check the signal during
operation. It will damage the equipment.

Danger
1. Don't touch the terminal of the inverter, there is high voltage on the terminal.
Danger of electric shock.
2. Before power on, be sure to install the terminal cover. When removing the cover, be sure to disconnect the
power supply.
Danger of electric shock.
3. Non professional technicians are not allowed to carry out maintenance and inspection.
Danger of electric shock.

3
Precautions for use
 Constant torque and low speed operation
When the inverter with ordinary motor runs at low speed for a long time, the motor life will be affected due to
the poor heat dissipation effect. If low speed constant torque long-term operation is needed, special frequency
conversion motor must be selected.
 Confirmation of motor insulation
When using VH6 series frequency converter, please confirm the insulation of the motor before connecting the
motor, so as to avoid damaging the equipment. In addition, when the motor is in a bad environment, please
check the insulation of the motor regularly to ensure the safe operation of the system.
 Negative torque load
For such occasions as lifting the load, there will often be negative torque, and the frequency converter will trip
due to over-current or over-voltage fault. At this time, the selection of braking resistance should be considered.
 Mechanical resonance point of load device
In a certain output frequency range, the inverter may encounter the mechanical resonance point of the load
device, which must be avoided by setting the jump frequency.
 Capacitors or varistors to improve power factor
As the output voltage of the frequency converter is pulse wave type, if the output side is installed with
capacitors to improve the power factor or varistors for lightning protection, it will cause the frequency converter
fault trip or device damage. Please remove it. In addition, it is recommended not to add air switch and contactor
and other switching devices on the output side.
 The use of derating when setting the fundamental frequency
When the fundamental frequency is lower than the rated frequency, please pay attention to the derating of the
motor to avoid overheating and burning.
 Operate at frequency above 50 Hz
If the frequency exceeds 50 Hz, in addition to considering the vibration and noise increase of the motor, it is
also necessary to ensure the speed range of the motor bearing and mechanical device, and make sure to check in
advance.
 Electronic thermal protection value of motor

When selecting the suitable motor, the inverter can implement thermal protection for the motor. If the rated
capacity of motor and frequency converter doesn't match, the protection value must be adjusted or other
protection measures must be taken to ensure the safe operation of motor.

 Altitude and derating

In the area with altitude more than 1000 meters, the heat dissipation effect of frequency converter becomes
worse due to the thin air, so it is necessary to reduce the rating.

 About the protection level

The protection grade IP20 of VH6 series frequency converter is achieved when the status display unit or
keyboard is selected.

 Notes on scrapping
When scrapping the inverter, please pay attention to:
When the electrolytic capacitors in the main circuit and printed circuit board are burned, they may explode.
Toxic gases are produced when plastic parts are burned. Please treat as industrial waste.

4
 Content and location of warning signs
The frequency converter is pasted with warning signs for use at the following positions. Please be sure to
observe the contents of the warning signs when using.
1. Please read the operation manual before installation and operation, otherwise there will be a risk of electric
shock!
2. Don't remove the cover plate when the power is on and within 15 minutes after the power is cut off.
3. When carrying out maintenance, inspection and wiring, please wait 15 minutes after cutting off the power
supply at the input side and output side, and start working after the power indicator is completely off.

5
1. Product introduction
1-1. Product overview

VH6 series is a full function closed-loop vector inverter developed

by XINJE company. The product adopts vector control technology,
which realizes the open-loop vector control and closed-loop vector
control of asynchronous and synchronous motor, and also
MENU/E
SC strengthens the reliability and environmental adaptability of the
JOG/REV

product.
ENT/D
ATA

RUN
STOP
REST

The VH6 series frequency converter provides a wide range of

expansion cards for customers to choose from, meeting their diverse
needs.

1.安装
、运行
2.在通 前请务
电状态 必阅读
3.进行 下和切 使用说
15 min 维护、 断电源 明书,否则会
待电源 检查及 15分钟 有电击
指示灯 接线时 以内， 危险！
彻底熄 ，请在 请勿拆
灭后开 切断输 下盖板
始作业 入侧和 ！
。 输出侧
电源后
，等待
15分钟
，

1-1-1. Naming rule

Field tag Detailed explanation of fields

① Product identification VH: General inverter
6: Full functional closed-loop vector inverter (asynchronous
motor)
② Product series
6S: Full functional closed-loop vector inverter (synchronous
motor)
③ Input voltage level 4: AC 380V
5P5：5.5kW
④ Power level 011：11kW
The decimal point is represented by P
B: Built-in brake unit
⑤ Brake unit
Blank: none

6
1-2. Specification

1-2-1. Technical specification

Model VH6-4_ _ _-B 3P7 5P5 7P5 011 015 018 022 030 037 045 055 075 090 110
Adaptive motor (KW) 3.7 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 30.0 37 45 55 75 90 110
Input rated current (A) 11 14.6 20.5 26.0 35.0 38.5 46.5 62.0 69 89 106 139 164 196
Power supply capacity (KVA) 5.9 8.9 11.0 17.0 21.0 24.0 30.0 40.0 63 81 97 127 150 179
Output rated current (A) 9 13.0 17.0 25.0 32.0 37.0 45.0 60.0 75 90 110 152 176 210

Model VH6-4_ _ _ 132 160 185 200 220 250 280 315 355 400 450
Adaptive motor (KW) 132 160 185 200 220 250 280 315 355 400 450
Input rated current (A) 240 287 343 365 410 441 495 565 617 687 782
Power supply capacity (KVA) 220 263 293 334 375 404 453 517 565 629 716
Output rated current (A) 253 304 360 377 426 465 520 585 650 725 820

1-2-2. General specification

Item Specification
Rated voltage,
Three phase 380V: Three phase 380V, 50Hz/60Hz
frequency
Input
Allowable voltage
-15%~+15%, voltage unbalance rate: <3%
fluctuation range
Voltage 0~input voltage
Output
Frequency 0~600Hz
Asynchronous motor, permanent magnet synchronous motor, variable
Control motor type
frequency motor
Control Vector control with Vector control without V/F control
performance speed sensor (FVC) speed sensor (SVC) (VVF)
Speed accuracy ±0.2% ±0.5% ±1%
Speed fluctuation ±0.2% ±0.3% ±0.5%
Speed range 1: 2000 1: 100 1: 50
Startup torque 0Hz: 180% 0.5Hz: 150% 1.0Hz: 150%
Control Torque accuracy ±5% of rated torque ±10% of rated torque //
Torque response ≤10ms ≤20ms //
Overload ability 150% rated current for 60 seconds. 180% rated current for 3 seconds.
Frequency Low frequency operation mode: 0.01Hz.
accuracy High frequency operation mode: 0.1Hz
Low frequency operation mode: digital setting--0.01Hz,
Frequency Analog setting –max frequency×0.1%
resolution High frequency operation mode: digital setting--0.1Hz,
Analog setting-- max frequency ×0.1%
Control Supports up to 7 switch inputs X,
Digital input
terminal The A card comes standard with 4 channels (X1-X4), while the B card can
channel
input be extended with 3 channels (X5-X7).

7
 Item Specification
The X4 terminal can support up to 50kHz high-speed pulse input.
Supports up to 3 analog input AI channels,
The A card comes standard with 2 channels (AI1, AI2), while the B card
Analog input
can be extended with 1 channel (AI3).
channel
AI1 and AI2 support 0-10V or 0-20mA inputs
AI3 supports -10V~10V input and can be used as PT100 input.
Up to 4 channels of digital output Y.
Card A is equipped with 1 channel (Y1) + 1 channel (TA1TB1TC1) as
Digital output
standard.
channel
Control Card B can expand 1 channel (Y2) + 1 channel (TA2TB2TC2).
terminal Y2 terminal can support the maximum 50 kHz high-speed pulse output.
output Up to 2 channels of analog output AO are supported.
Analog output Card A is equipped with 1 channel (AO1) .
channel Card B can expand 1 channel(AO2) .
AO1 and AO2 support 0 ~ 10V or 0 ~ 20mA.
Startup command Communication setting (Modbus, CANopen, EtherCAT), operate panel
setting setting, terminal setting
Communication setting (Modbus, CANopen, EtherCAT), operate panel
Frequency setting
setting, terminal setting, analog AI setting, multi-speed setting, simple
mode
PLC setting, PID setting, main and auxiliary setting
Frequency main and auxiliary operation, reverse inhibition, torque boost,
nine kinds of V/F curve settings, five segments of AI curve settings,
acceleration and deceleration curve settings, terminal delay and filtering,
terminal multi-function input and output, DC braking, energy
Typical function
consumption braking, inching operation, 16 segments of speed, built-in
two channels of PID, speed tracking restart, carrier modulation, fault
recording, fault self reset, pre-excitation start, 30 groups of user defined
parameters
Carrier modulation, torque control, motor auto-tuning, current limiting
control, over-voltage control, under voltage control, speed tracking, droop
Function
Important function control, vibration suppression, over-voltage and over-current stall control,
automatic voltage regulation (AVR), automatic energy-saving operation,
etc
Power on motor short-circuit detection, input and output phase loss
protection, over-current protection, over-voltage protection, under voltage
Protection function protection, overheat protection, overload protection, under load
protection, over-current and voltage stall protection, relay closing
protection, terminal protection, instantaneous power failure non stop, etc
380V voltage level driver: Braking unit operating voltage: 650-750V.
Energy
The 3.7kW to 110kW power level comes standard with a built-in braking
consumption
unit, which only requires indirect braking resistors in P+and PB.
braking
132~450KW power level requires an external braking unit
DC reactor 18.5KW and above are built-in DC reactors
When the frequency converter decelerates, it shares the regenerative
Common DC bus
energy, improves the braking ability, achieves the purpose of energy

8
 Item Specification
saving and saves the additional space and cost required by the resistance.
Except that 75~110KW models need external pre charging circuit,
other power models can directly realize common DC bus.
Multi-bus Main unit Modbus, extensible EtherCAT and CANopen
Multi-encoder Differential input encoder, OC input encoder and resolver transformer
LCD display, parameter setting, status monitoring, parameter copy, fault
LCD panel
analysis and location, program download, mass storage of parameters
Non stop when In case of instantaneous power failure, the load feedback energy
instantaneous compensates for the decrease of voltage and keeps the inverter running for
power failure a short time
Timing control Timing control function: the time range is 0.1Min~6500.0Min
Multi-motor Two sets of motor parameters can realize the switching control of two
Special switching motors
functions Motor overheat
AI3 supports PT100 sensor function
protection
Flexible and Multi function terminal X has 51 types, Y has 42 types, AO has 19 kinds
diversified terminal of logic function selection, meet the general inverter control function
functions requirements
Communication
It is convenient for users to read and write the inverter parameters
customization
continuously
parameters
Rich background monitoring function, convenient for field data collection
Software
and debugging
It can display the set frequency, output frequency, output voltage, output
Keyboard display
current, input and output status and other parameters
Button locking Realize the partial or total locking of keys to prevent false triggering
Display and
Standard LED single display numeric keyboard, optional LCD English
keyboard Parameter copy
display keyboard (parameter download)
Optional LCD keyboard, mainstream protocol communication card (EtherCAT,
accessories CANopen), encoder PG card (incremental pulse, resolver)
Indoor, free from direct sunlight, dust, corrosive gas, combustible gas, oil
Using place
mist, water vapor, dripping or salt, etc
Below 1000 meters. (Derating is required when the height is higher than
Altitude 1000m, and the output current will be reduced by about 10% of the rated
current when the height is increased every 1000m.)
Ambient -10℃~+40℃ (When the ambient temperature is between 40℃ and 50℃,
Environment temperature please reduce the rating or enhance the heat dissipation)
Ambient humidity Less than 95%RH, no condensation
Vibration Less than 5.9 m/s² (0.6G)
Storage
-40℃~+70℃
temperature
Protection level IP20
Cooling mode Forced air cooling
Installation mode Wall mounted and embedded

9
1-3. Part description
 VH6-43P7-B/VH6-45P5-B/VH6-47P5-B

10
 VH6-4011-B/VH6-4015-B

11
 VH6-4018-B/VH6-4022-B/VH6-4030-B

12
 VH6-4037-B/VH6-4045-B/VH6-4055-B

13
 VH6-4075-B/VH6-4090-B/VH6-4110-B

14
 VH6-4075-B/VH6-4090-B/VH6-4110-B

15
 VH6-4132/VH6-4160

 VH6-4185/VH6-4200/VH6-4220/VH6-4250/VH6-4280/VH6-4315/VH6-4355/VH6-4400/VH6-4450

16
2. Installation and wiring
2-1. Installation environment

2-1-1. Environment requirements

 It should be installed in a well ventilated indoor place, and the ambient temperature should be within the
range of -10°C ~ 40°C. If the temperature exceeds 40°C, it needs external forced cooling or derating.
 Avoid installation in places with direct sunlight, dusty, floating fiber and metal powder.
 It is strictly forbidden to install in places with corrosive and explosive gas.
 The humidity should be lower than 95% RH without condensation.
 It is installed in the place where the fixed vibration is less than 5.9m/s² (0.6G).
 Be far away from EMI sources and other electronic equipment sensitive to EMI.

2-1-2. Installation space and direction

 Generally, it should be installed vertically.

 Minimum requirements for installation spacing and distance.
 When multiple frequency converters are installed up and down, the middle part shall be equipped with
guide plate.

2-1-3. Single installation

A
C

B B

C
A

Note: According to different power levels of the frequency converter, corresponding installation space needs to
be reserved.

17
 Power level Installation spacing
0.7kW~15kW A≥50mm B≥10mm C≥100mm
18.5kW~22kW A≥50mm B≥10mm C≥200mm
22kW~37kW A≥50mm B≥10mm C≥200mm
37kW~110kW A≥50mm B≥10mm C≥300mm
132KW~160kW A≥50mm B≥50mm C≥300mm
185KW~220kW A≥100mm B≥100mm C≥300mm
250KW~280kW A≥100mm B≥100mm C≥300mm
315KW~450kW A≥100mm B≥100mm C≥300mm

2-1-4. Multiple installation

A
C

B D B

C
A

Note: The installation dimensions at the positions of installing multiple frequency converters A, B and C are the
same as that of installing multiple single frequency converters. The installation spacing D between multiple
frequency converters is shown in the table below:

Power level Installation spacing

3.7kW~15kW D≥10mm
18.5kW~22kW D≥10mm
22kW~37kW D≥50mm
37kW~110kW D≥50mm
132KW~160kW D≥50mm

The X7~X9 models only support single unit installation inside the cabinet and don't support
parallel installation or top and bottom row installation.

18
2-1-5. Vertical installation

Note: when installing vertically, the wind shield must be added, otherwise it will cause mutual influence
between multiple inverters, resulting in poor heat dissipation.

2-1-6. Panel installation

Model of panel bracket and accessories: VH6-DPANEL, please refer to Chapter 6-2 for panel mounting bracket
dimensions.
Panel extensible cable model: JC-RD-20 (2m) and JC-RD-30 (3m), only available in 2 m or 3 m lengths. If
other length extension cables are needed, regular network cables can be used instead.

2-2. Wiring notice

Notice
 Ensure that the power supply has been completely cut off for more than 15 minutes before wiring,
otherwise there is a risk of electric shock.
 It is strictly forbidden to connect the power cable with the output terminal U, V and W of the frequency
converter.
 There is leakage current in the inverter itself. In order to ensure safety, the inverter and motor must be
grounded safely. Generally, the diameter of grounding wire is more than 3.5mm² copper wire, and the
grounding resistance is less than 10Ω.
 The inverter has passed the withstand voltage test before leaving the factory, and the user cannot carry out
the withstand voltage test on the inverter.
 The electromagnetic contactor, absorption capacitor or other resistance capacitance absorption device shall
not be installed between the frequency converter and the motor.
 In order to provide the convenience of input side over-current protection and power failure maintenance,
the frequency converter shall be connected with the power supply through the circuit breaker.

19
 The input and output circuits of control terminals shall be connected with twisted wires or shielded wires
of more than 0.75mm². One end of the shielding layer shall be suspended, and the other end shall be
connected with the grounding terminal PE of frequency converter, and the wiring length shall be less than
50m.

Danger
 Ensure that the power supply of the inverter has been completely cut off, all LED indicators of the
operation keyboard are off, and wait for more than 15 minutes before wiring operation.
 The internal wiring can be started only after the DC voltage between P+ and P- of the internal electrolytic
capacitor of the frequency converter is reduced to less than DC36V.
 The wiring operation can only be carried out by trained and authorized qualified professionals.
 Before power on, pay attention to check whether the voltage level of the frequency converter is consistent
with the supply voltage, otherwise it may cause casualties and equipment damage.

2-3. Main circuit wiring

2-3-1. Wiring diagram

Note: circuit breaker, contactor, AC reactor, fuse, brake resistor and output reactor are optional parts. Please
refer to chapter 6 for details.

20
2-3-2. Arrangement and description of main circuit terminals

 VH6-43P7-B/VH6-45P5-B/VH6-47P5-B main circuit terminals

 VH6-4011-B/VH6-4015-B/VH6-4018-B/VH6-4022-B/VH6-4030-B main circuit terminals

 VH6-4037-B/VH6-4045-B/VH6-4055-B main circuit terminals

 VH6-4075-B/VH6-4090-B/VH6-4110-B main circuit terminals

21
 VH6-4132/VH6-4160/ main circuit terminals

 VH6-4185/VH6-4200/VH6-4220/VH6-4250/VH6-4280/VH6-4315/VH6-4355/VH6-4400/VH6-4450
main circuit terminals

P- P+

 Main circuit terminal description

Terminal Name Description
R, S, T Three phase power supply input AC three phase power supply input
U, V, W VFD output terminal Connect to the three phase motor
PE Grounding terminal Connect to the ground
P+, PB Brake resistor terminal Connect to the brake resistor
P+, P- DC bus +/- Common DC bus input
(1) Input power supply R, S, T
 There is no phase sequence requirement for input side wiring of frequency converter.
 Circuit breaker, contactor, AC reactor, fuse, brake resistor and output reactor are optional parts. Please refer
to chapter 6 for details.
(2) P+, P-
 After the power failure, there is residual voltage between P + and P -, all the LED indicator lights of the
operation keyboard go out, and wait for more than 15 minutes before wiring operation.
 Don't connect the brake resistor directly to the bus, otherwise the inverter will be damaged or even fire.
(3) P+, PB
 Refer to the recommended value for brake resistance selection, and the wiring distance is less than 5m,
otherwise the inverter may be damaged.
(4) Output U, V, W
 Please refer to chapter 6 for output cable.
 No capacitor or surge absorber can be connected to the output side of the inverter, otherwise the inverter
will be damaged.
 When the length of motor cable is more than 100m, it is easy to produce electrical resonance due to the
influence of distributed capacitance, so it is necessary to install AC output reactor near the frequency
converter.
(5) Grounding terminal PE
 The terminal must be reliably grounded, and the grounding resistance must be less than 10Ω. Otherwise, the
equipment will work abnormally or even be damaged.
 It is not allowed to share the grounding terminal PE and the power zero cable N terminal.
 The impedance of protective grounding conductor must meet the requirement of withstanding large short-circuit
current in case of fault.

22
 The size of protective grounding conductor shall be selected according to the table below.
Sectional area of single phase cable (S) Minimum sectional area of protective conductor (Sp)
S≤16mm 2
S
16mm ＜S≤35mm
2 2
16mm2
35mm2＜S S/2

 Yellow and green cable must be used for protective grounding.

2-3-3. Wiring process of main circuit

23
2-4. Configuration and wiring of the control circuit

2-4-1. Control circuit terminals

(1) Wiring mode slot A extension card

Note: VH6 series frequency converter has four card slots ABCD. Slot A I/O expansion card is standard installed
when out of factory, slot B,C,D expansion card need to be selected by customers.

24
(2) Terminal description of control circuit

Type Terminal Name Description

485+ Standard RS485 communication interface, using twisted pair or
Communication RS485 terminal
485- shielded wire.
External + 10V power supply, maximum output current: 20mA.
10V-GND +10V power supply
Generally used for external potentiometer speed regulation.
Provide+24V power to the terminal and Don't connect external
loads.
DC 24V power
24V-0V Generally used as a power supply for digital input and output
supply
terminals.
External loads are not allowed.
When using an internal power source to drive the X terminal:
Power supply COM and 24V are short circuited to form NPN input.
COM is short circuited to 0V to form PNP input.

Power input When using an external power source to drive the X terminal:
COM
terminal NPN type input connection, COM connected to 24V+power
supply, and disconnected from the 24V terminal of the inverter
body.
PNP type input connection, COM connected to power supply 0V,
and disconnected from the 0V terminal of the inverter body.
AI1-GND AI1 Select voltage /current input by DIP switch
Analog input Input voltage range: 0~10V (Input impedance: 22kΩ)
AI2-GND AI2 Input current range: 0~20mA (Input impedance: 500Ω)
Select voltage/current output by DIP switch
Analog output AO1-GND AO1 Voltage output range: 0~10V. External load: 2kΩ-1MΩ
Current output range: 0~20mA. External load less than 500Ω
X1 Input terminal 1 Optocoupler isolation input
Input impedance: R = 3.3KΩ
X2 Input terminal 2
The input voltage range is 9 ~ 30V
Digital input X3 Input terminal 3 Compatible with bipolar input
In addition to the characteristics of X1-X3, it can also be used
X4 Input terminal 4 as a high-speed pulse input channel. The highest frequency is 50
kHz
Collector open circuit output
Digital output
Digital output Y1 Output voltage range: 0 ~ 24V
terminal 1
Output current range: 0 ~ 50mA
Programmable is defined as a variety of electrical output terminals
TA-TB: normally open
TA-TC: normally closed
Relay output TA1 TB1 TC1 Output relay 1 Contactor capacity:
AC250V/2A (COSΦ=1)
AC250V/1A (COSΦ=0.4)
DC30V/1A

25
 Before putting the frequency converter into use, it is necessary to correctly wire the terminals
and set all jumper switches on the control board.

2-4-2. Digital I/O wiring

(1) Digital input terminal

Generally, shielded cables are required, and the wiring distance should be as short as possible, not more than
20m. When active driving mode is selected, necessary filtering measures should be taken for the crosstalk of
power supply. The contact control mode is recommended, and the specific wiring diagram is as follows:

 Single inverter leakage wiring mode

Single VFD uses internal 24V leakage wiring Single VFD uses external 24V leakage wiring

The most common wiring method is to use the internal 24V power supply of the inverter.
Short circuit the COM and 24V of the inverter, connect the 0V of the frequency converter with the 0V of the
external controller, connect the X terminal with the signal terminal of the external controller, and control the
inverter through the ON-OFF of the loop.

If external 24V is used, the COM terminal of the inverter shall be connected to the external 24V, and the
external power supply 0V shall be connected to the corresponding X terminal through the control contact of the
external controller.

 Multi-inverter leakage wiring mode

26
 Multi-inverter uses internal 24V leakage wiring Multi-inverter uses external 24V leakage wiring

Note: Under this connection mode, X terminals of different inverters cannot be connected in parallel, otherwise
it may cause X malfunction: if the X terminal needs to be connected in parallel (between different frequency
converters), the diode (anode connected to X) shall be connected in series at the X terminal, and the diode shall
meet the following requirements: IF>40mA, VR>40V.

 Single inverter source wiring mode

Single VFD uses internal 24V source wiring Single VFD uses external 24V source wiring

If the internal 24V power supply of the inverter is used, the 0V and COM of the inverter shall be short
connected, and the 24V of the inverter shall be connected with the common end of the external controller.

If external 24V is used, the COM end of the inverter shall be connected with external 0V, and the external
power supply 24V shall be connected to the corresponding X terminal through the control contact of the
external controller.

 Multi-inverter source wiring mode

27
 Multi-inverter uses internal 24V source wiring Multi-inverter uses external 24V source wiring

Note: Under this connection mode,X terminals of different frequency converters cannot be connected in parallel,
otherwise it may cause X malfunction: if the X terminal needs to be connected in parallel (between different
frequency converters), the diode (anode connected to X) shall be connected in series at the X terminal, and the
diode shall meet the following requirements: IF>40mA, VR>40V.

TA
220VAC
TB

TC

TA
24VDC
TB

TC

2-4-3. Analog I/O wiring

(1) Analog input terminal AI wiring

AI1/AI2 terminal receives analog signal input, and AI1/AI2 dial switch can select input voltage (0 ~ 10V) or
current (0 ~ 20mA). The specific wiring is shown in the figure below:

28
(2) Analog output terminal AO wiring

AO1 external analog meter can indicate a variety of physical quantities, AO1 dial switch can select output
voltage (0 ~ 10V, external load 2KΩ – 1MΩ) or current (0 ~ 20mA, external load less than 500Ω). The terminal
wiring mode is shown in the figure below.

 When using analog input, install filtering capacitors or common mode inductors between
AI and GND.
 The resistance range of the potentiometer connected between the control terminal 10V
and GND is 5-10K.
 Analog input and output signals are susceptible to external interference, so shielded
cables must be used for wiring and well grounded. The wiring length should be as short
as possible, not exceeding 20m.
Instructions for dip switch:
Taking VH6-A100 as an example, the A-slot expansion card has three dip code status
bits that determine the type of analog input/output signal.
 S1：AI1 OFF = 0 - 10V, ON = 0 - 20mA, Default OFF
 S2：AI2 OFF = 0 - 10V, ON = 0 - 20mA, Default OFF
 S3：AO1 OFF = 0 - 10V, ON = 0 - 20mA, Default OFF
 The dip switch is located behind the expansion card. The frequency converter needs to
be completely powered off before unplugging the expansion card for adjustment. Hot
swapping of the expansion card is prohibited.

(3) Digital output terminal

When the digital output terminal needs to drive the relay, freewheeling diodes should be installed on both sides
of the relay coil. Otherwise, it is easy to damage the DC24V power supply. The driving capacity is no more than
50mA.
Note: the polarity of freewheeling diode must be correctly installed. As shown in the figure below. Otherwise,
when the digital output terminal has output, the DC24V power supply will be burnt out immediately. Selection
standard of freewheeling diode: the reverse withstand voltage is greater than 5 ~ 10 times of the load voltage,
and the current is greater than the load current.

29
(4) Relay output terminal

Inductive loads (relays, motors, indicator lights) can cause voltage spikes when the current is cut off. The relay
contacts are protected by varistors, and the inductive load is equipped with absorption circuits, such as varistors,
RC absorption circuits, diodes, etc., to ensure the minimum interference current when turning off.

2-4-4. Communication terminal wiring

The communication interface provided by frequency converter is standard RS485 communication.

The following wiring methods can form a single master single slave or single master multi slave control system.
Using the software of upper computer (PC or PLC controller) can realize the real-time monitoring of the
inverter in the industrial control system, and realize the complex operation control functions such as remote and
high automation.
(1) The connection between VFD RS485 port and upper computer

(2) Multiple inverters can be connected together through RS485 and controlled by PLC (or upper
computer), as shown in the figure. With the increase of the number of connections, the communication
system is easy to interference. It is suggested that the following wiring methods be adopted:

30
31
 3. Operation and application
3-1. Operation panel

3-1-1. Appearance

The operation panel and control terminals of the frequency converter can control the starting, speed regulation,
stopping, braking, operating parameter setting, and peripheral equipment of the motor. The appearance of the
operation panel is shown in the following figure (size unit: mm):

89
MENU/ESC
JOG/REV

ENT/DATA

STOP
RUN REST

79.6
3-1-2. Keyboard
89

There are 8 keys on the frequency converter operation panel, and the functions are defined as follows:
89
89

Button Name Function

MENU/ESC
Programming/
JOG/REV

MENU/ESC Enter or exit the programming status

89

MENU/ESC
Exit
JOG/REV
JOG/REV

MENU/ESC ENT/DATA
ENT/DATA Save/Switch Save the parameter or enter next menu in programming status
JOG/REV

ENT/DATA
Press this button to run forward in operation panel running command
Forward run
STOP
RUN
89

ENT/DATA STOP
RUN REST
STOP
REST mode
RUN REST
STOP
RUN REST Stop/Reset Stop/reset the fault
MENU/ESC
79.6
JOG/REV

79.6
89

Multi-function Set through P8-00

79.6
ENT/DATA
ESC Increase Increase the value or pause frequency in operation
JOG/REV

STOP
RUN REST

ATA
32
STOP
REST
 8
ESC
JOG/REV
Button Name Function

89
ATA Decrease Decrease the value or pause frequency in operation

In the editing state, you can choose to set the modification bit of the
JOG/REV

STOP
REST Shift/Monitor data. In other states, you can switch the display state and monitor
parameters

3-1-3. LED lights

79.6
STOP
REST

There are 5-digit 7-segment LED digital tubes and 4 status indicators on the inverter operation panel.
The four status indicators are located above the LED tube, from left to right: RUN, FWD/REV,
LOCAL/REMOT, TUNE. The following table describes the indicator lights.

9.6 Indicator lights Meaning

ON: running
Function

RUN Operation indicator

OFF: stop
ON: reverse operation
Forward/Reverse
FWD/REV OFF: forward operation
operation indicator
Flashing: status switching
OFF: panel start/stop
Command source
LOCAL/REMOT ON: terminal start/stop
indicator
Flashing: communication start/stop
Flash slowly: tuning status
TUNE Tuning indicator Flash quickly: fault status
ON: torque status

3-1-4. Operation method

Through the operation panel, the inverter can be operated in various ways, for example:

(1) Parameter display and switch

Method 1:
Press button, switch LED display parameter, set running display parameter P8-07 and P8-08, set stop display
parameter P8-09.
When checking status monitoring parameters, you can press ENT/DATA key to switch back to the default
display status of monitoring parameters. The default monitoring parameter of shutdown state is the setting
frequency, and the default monitoring parameter of operation state is output frequency.
Method 2:
Check group U0 parameters, for example, U0-02.

33
(2) Set the parameter

①For example, the parameter PC-00 (jog frequency) is changed from 5.00Hz to 8.05Hz.

In the three-level menu, if the parameter has no flashing bit, it means that the parameter cannot be modified.
The possible reasons are as follows:
(1) The parameters are not modifiable, such as the actual detection state parameters, operation record
parameters, etc.
(2) This parameter can not be modified in the running state, and can be modified only after shutdown.

② Under the second level menu, you can modify the first level menu and modify the function code group
number.
For example, suppose you want to set the value of PC-00 while panel displays P4-00 , press the left key to move
the cursor to the "4" position for adjustment. The specific operations are as follows:

34
(3) Jog operation
Suppose that the current operation command channel is the operation panel, in the shutdown state, press the
JOG/REV function key to select jog forward (P8-00 = 2), and the jog frequency is 5Hz.

(4) Set user password

Suppose that user password P8-03 has been set to 02345. The numbers in bold in the figure below indicate the
flash position.

(5) Check fault status and parameters

The method of fault status query is the same as group U0 monitoring parameters.
Note:
 User pressed in fault status to check group P7 parameters.
 When the user checks the fault parameters, he can directly switch back to the fault code display state by
pressing the MENU/ESC button.

(6) Set frequency through buttons

35
Assuming the VFD is in shutdown parameter display status, P0-03 = 0, the operation mode is as follows:
 Frequency setting through digital setting
 Keep press to increase ones bit, tens bit, hundreds bit….If release , and press , it will
increase from ones bit again.
 Keep press to decrease ones bit, tens bit, hundreds bit…If release and press , it will
decrease from ones bit again.

3-1-5. Multi-function buttons

The function of JOG/REV button can be defined by P8-00, which is used to switch the menu, the rotation
direction of frequency converter or jog. Please refer to the explanation of P8-00 function code for specific
setting method.

3-1-6. Quick reference of parameters

There are many function codes in VH6 series. In order to facilitate users to quickly find the function codes, the
frequency converter provides two methods to quickly find the function codes.
(1) Users can select and customize the commonly used function codes, up to 32 of which can be customized to
form a user-defined function code group. Users can determine the function parameters to be displayed
through PE group.
(2) The function codes which are different from the factory values are arranged automatically by the frequency
converter for users to select quickly. Three ways to check the function codes:
Parameter display mode Display
Function parameters --A--
User defined parameters --U--
User modified parameters --C--

The three kinds of display mode are switched through the multi-function keys on the panel. After entering the
function codes of each group, the search or modification method is the same as the previous keyboard
operation.

36
P8-05 is used to control the display of user defined group and user modified group parameters.
Default value: 00
Set value Tens bit Ones bit
P8-05
Function Group --C-- display Group --U-- display
Range 0: no display 1: display 0: no display 1: display
Basic function codes
The basic function code group is the whole function code of the inverter. After entering, it is the level I menu.
Please check them according to the operation mode described above.
User defined function codes
The user defined menu is easy to check the general parameters. The display form of parameters in the
user-defined menu is like "uP0.01", which represents the function parameter P0.01. The effect of modifying
parameters in the user-defined menu is the same as that in the normal programming state.
The function parameters of user-defined menu come from group PE. If the function parameters are selected by
group PE, and set to P0.00 means that they are not selected, and a total of 32 can be set. If "null" is displayed
when entering the menu, it means that the user-defined menu is empty.
Users can customize and edit according to their specific needs.
User modified function codes
In the group of function codes that have been changed by the user, only the current set value is listed. This is a
list generated automatically by the frequency converter, which makes it easy for users to quickly access the
modified function code.

37
3-2. Power on

3-2-1. Inspection after power on

Please wiring according to the operation requirements provided in "EMC" of this manual.

3-2-2. Initial power on operation

After checking the wiring and power supply, close the AC power switch on the input side of the frequency
converter and power on the frequency converter. The LED on the operation panel of the frequency converter
displays the dynamic picture of starting up, and the contactor pulls in normally. When the display character
changes to the set frequency, it indicates that the frequency converter has been initialized. The initial power on
operation process is shown in the figure below:

38
3-2-3. Start to debug

39
3-2-4. Debugging process

40
3-3. Start stop of the VFD

3-3-1. Start stop signal

There are three kinds of start stop signal sources of frequency converter, which are panel start stop, terminal
start stop and communication start stop. They are selected by function parameter P0-02.

3-3-1-1. Panel start stop

The key on the panel is used for command control, and the RUN key on the keyboard is pressed to start the
operation of the frequency converter. While the frequency converter is running, the STOP key on the keyboard
is pressed to stop the operation of the frequency converter.
Parameter Name Setting value Note
Operation command channel
P0-02 0 Operation panel
selection

3-3-1-2. Terminal start stop

VH6 inverter provides a variety of terminal control modes. The switch signal mode is determined by function
code P2-10, and the input port of start stop control signal is determined by function code P2-00 ~ P2-09.
Example 1: Two-wire control, forward signal connected to X1, reverse signal connected to X2.
Parameter Name Setting value Note
P0-02 Operation command channel 1 Terminal operation
P2-10 XI terminal command mode 0 Two-wire mode 1
P2-00 X1 function selection 1 Forward run
P2-01 X2 function selection 2 Reverse run

Example 2: Three-wire control, forward signal connected to X1, reverse signal connected to X2, stop signal
connected to X3.
Parameter Name Setting value Note
P0-02 Operation command channel 1 Terminal operation
P2-10 XI terminal command mode 2 3-wire mode 1
P2-00 X1 function selection 1 Forward run
P2-01 X2 function selection 2 Reverse run
P2-02 X3 function selection 3 3-wire mode run

3-3-1-3. Communication start stop

VH6 supports Modbus RTU / Modbus ASCII mode for communication with the upper computer. The
communication port of the frequency converter is equipped with Modbus RTU / Modbus ASCII slave protocol,
and the upper computer must use Modbus RTU / Modbus ASCII master protocol to communicate with it. Please
refer to the mailing address provided Appendix B-3-3. Communication protocol parameter address and 4-1.
Function code list .
Example of communication parameter setting:
Parameter Name Setting value Note
P0-02 Operation command channel 2 Communication
Communication protocol
P9-00 0 Modbus-RTU
selection

41
 P9-01 Local address 1 Station number 1
P9-02 Baud rate 6 19200 BPS
P9-03 Data format 1 8-E-1

3-3-2. Start mode

There are three starting modes of frequency converter, which are direct starting, speed tracking restart and
asynchronous machine pre-excitation starting. They are selected by function parameter P4-00.

3-3-2-1. Direct start

Parameter Name Setting value Note
Direct start mode is applicable to most small inertia loads. The frequency
curve of start-up process is shown in the following figure. The "DC
P4-00 Start mode 0 braking" function before startup is applicable to the driving of elevator
and heavy load. the starting frequency is applicable to the equipment
which needs to impact start, such as cement mixer equipment.

3-3-2-2. Speed tracking restart

Parameter Name Setting value Note

Speed tracking restart mode is applicable to the large inertia
mechanical load. The frequency curve of starting process is shown
P4-00 Start mode 1 in the following figure. If the load motor is still running on inertia
when the frequency converter is started, the speed tracking and
restart can avoid the over-current.

42
3-3-2-3. Pre-excitation start
Setting
Parameter Name Note
value
Pre-excitation starting mode is only suitable for asynchronous motor load.
Pre-excitation before starting can improve the fast response characteristics
P4-00 Start mode 2
of induction motor and meet the application requirements of short
acceleration time.

3-3-3. Stop mode

There are two stop modes of inverter, namely deceleration stop and free stop, which are selected by function
code P4-22.
Setting
Parameter Name Note
value
0 The frequency converter stops according to the deceleration time
P4-22 Stop mode
1 Free stop, inverter stop output immediately, motor stop freely by inertia

43
Under the VF control mode, if the actual acceleration time of the motor is much longer than the set acceleration
time, the following measures can be taken:
Frequency setting Measures
Increase the overcurrent stall action current of P5-19, adjust it by
Target frequency is less than 2 times rated 10% each time. If the P5-19 set value exceeds 170%, it can easily
frequency cause the frequency converter to alarm ERR10 (frequency converter
overload fault)
During rapid acceleration, there is a high possibility of motor stall.
The target frequency is 3 times or more
This can be adjusted by setting the P5-22 overcurrent stall action
than 4 times the rated frequency
current compensation coefficient to 100%

Under the VF control mode, if it is found that the actual deceleration time of the motor is much longer than the
set deceleration time, the following measures can be taken:
Braking resistor / Energy feedback unit Measures
The set value of P5-16 overexcitation gain can be increased by ±
20 each time. If increasing the overexcitation gain causes motor
None
oscillation overvoltage fault, please reduce the set value of P5-26
voltage gain for stall suppression
Adjust the starting voltage setting of P7-53 brake to 690V, and set
P5-16 (overexcitation gain) to 0
Yes (input voltage of frequency converter Use shutdown DC braking, recommended settings: P4-23 shutdown
is 323~437V) DC braking starting frequency of 0.5Hz, P4-25 shutdown DC
braking current percentage of 50%, P4-24 shutdown DC braking
time of 1 second

Note: When using braking resistor: P5-16 (Overexcitation gain) is set to 0, otherwise it is easy to cause
excessive current during operation. P5-24 (Overvoltage stall enable) is set to 0, otherwise the deceleration time
may be too long.

44
3-4. VFD operation frequency
The frequency converter is equipped with two frequency setting channels, named as main frequency source A
and auxiliary frequency source B, which can work in a single channel or switch at any time, or even set
calculation method for combination, so as to meet the different control requirements of the application site.
Set through function code P0-05.
Parameter Range Note
0: main frequency source A
1: main frequency source operation result
Ones bit (0~2)
2: switch between main frequency source A and auxiliary frequency
source B
P0-05
0: A+B
1: A-B
Tens bit (0~3)
2: larger one of A and B
3: smaller one of A and B

3-5. Swing frequency function

The swing frequency function refers to the frequency output of the frequency converter, which swings up and
down with the set frequency as the center. In the textile and chemical fiber processing equipment, the frequency
swing function can improve the evenness of the spindle winding. The relevant parameters are as follows:
Parameter Name Range
0: relative to center frequency
A0-05 Swing frequency setting mode
1: relative to the max frequency
A0-06 Swing frequency amplitude 0.0%～100.0%
A0-07 Jump frequency amplitude 0.0%～50.0%
A0-08 Swing frequency period 0.1s～3600.0s
A0-09 Triangular rise time of swing frequency 0.1%～100.0%
The reference value of swing amplitude is determined by parameter A0-05.
0: relative to the center frequency (P0-05 frequency source), variable swing system. The swing varies with the
center frequency (set frequency).
1: relative to the maximum frequency (P0-13) is a fixed swing amplitude system.
When the swing frequency is relative to the center frequency (A0-05 = 0), the trajectory on the time axis is
shown as follows:

45
A0-06 swing amplitude AW:
When swing amplitude is relative to the center frequency (A0-05=0), AW ＝ frequency source P0-05×A0-06.
When swing amplitude is relative to the max frequency (A0-05=1), AW＝max frequency P0-13 × A0-06.
A0-08 swing frequency period: time value of a complete frequency swing period.
A0-07 Jump frequency amplitude:
The jump frequency amplitude is the percentage of the jump frequency relative to the swing amplitude when the
swing frequency is running, that is, the jump frequency = swing amplitude AW × jump frequency amplitude
A0-07.
If the swing is relative to the center frequency (A0-05=0), the jump frequency is the variable value. If the swing
is relative to the maximum frequency (A0-05=1), the jump frequency is a fixed value. The swing operating
frequency is constrained by the upper and lower limit frequencies.
A0-09 triangle wave rise time coefficient: it is the time percentage of triangle wave rise time relative to
frequency swing period A0-08.
triangle wave rise time (s) ＝swing frequency period A0-08× A0-09.
triangle wave fall time (s) ＝swing frequency period A0-08× (1- A0-09).

3-6. Fixed length control

Parameter Name Range
A0-00 Setting length 0m～65535m
A0-01 Actual length (Increment value) 0m～65535m
A0-02 Pulse per meter 0.1～6553.5

The above parameters are used for fixed length control.

46
In the application, it is necessary to set the corresponding input terminal function as "length counting input"
(function 22). When the pulse frequency is high, the X4 port must be used. The actual length A0-01 can be
calculated by dividing the number of pulses sampled by terminals and A0-02 pulse number per meter. When the
actual length is greater than the set length A0-00, the multi-function digital output "length reached" on signal. In
the process of fixed length control, the length reset operation can be performed through the multi-function X
terminal (function 23). The function sequence diagram is shown in the following figure:

3-7. VFD counting function

Parameter Name Range
A0-03 Setting counting value 1～65535
A0-04 Specified counting value 1～65535

In the application, the corresponding input terminal function needs to be set as "counter input" (function 20).
When the pulse frequency is high, the X4 port must be used.
When the count value reaches the specified count value A0-04, the multi-function digital Y outputs the
"specified count value reaches" on signal. At this time, the counter continues to count. When the count value
reaches the set count value A0-03, the multi-function digital Y outputs the "set count value reaches" on signal.
The count value can be reset through the multi-function X terminal (function 21). The function sequence
diagram is as follows:

47
3-8. Motor parameters and tuning

3-8-1. Motor parameter setting

When the frequency converter operates in vector control (P0-01=1 or 2) mode, it is required to set the correct
motor parameters, which is different from VF (P0-01=0) mode. The motor parameters that must be set (default
motor parameter 1) are:
Motor parameters 1 Description Note
Motor rated power / voltage / current / frequency / Model parameters, manual
P1-01~P1-05
speed input
Equivalent stator resistance, inductance and rotor Tuning parameters, tuning
P1-06~P1-10
inductance of the motor obtained
Encoder parameters, closed loop vector mode
P1-25~P1-33 Encoder parameter
setting

Motor parameters 2 for multi-motor system

Motor parameters 1 Description Note
Motor rated power / voltage / current / frequency /
A2-01~A2-05 Model parameters, manual input
speed
Equivalent stator resistance, inductance and rotor Tuning parameters, tuning
A2-06~A2-10
inductance of the motor obtained
Encoder parameters, closed loop vector mode
A2-25~A2-33 Encoder parameter
setting

48
3-8-2. Motor tuning

The methods to get the internal electrical parameters of the controlled motor are: dynamic tuning, static tuning,
manual input of motor parameters and so on.
Tuning mode Suitable condition Effect
No load dynamic It is suitable for asynchronous motor. The situation where the motor and
Best
tuning application system are easy to separate.
With load dynamic It is suitable for asynchronous motor. The situation where the motor and
General
tuning application system are not easy to separate
It is only suitable for asynchronous motor, where motor and load are difficult
Static tuning 1 to separate and dynamic tuning operation is not allowed, P1-09 and P1-10 General
are not tuned.
It is only suitable for asynchronous motor, where motor and load are difficult
to separate and dynamic tuning operation is not allowed. Compared with
Static tuning 2 Better
static tuning 1, the tuning time is relatively long and the tuning effect is
good. This mode is recommended for static tuning.
When it is difficult to separate the motor from the application system, copy
the motor parameters of the same model that have been successfully tuned
Manual input by the frequency converter to the corresponding function codes.
General
parameters Asynchronous motor: input P1-00 ~ P1-10 corresponding parameters
Synchronous motor: input P1-00 ~ P1-05 and P1-15 ~ P1-20 corresponding
parameters
The automatic tuning procedure of motor parameters is as follows:
The following is an example of parameter tuning method of default motor 1. The tuning method of motor 2 is
the same as that, but the function code number should be changed accordingly.
Step 1: if the motor can be completely disconnected from the load, in case of power failure, the motor is
separated from the load part mechanically, so that the motor can rotate freely without load.
Step 2: after power on, select the first motor control mode (P0-01) as open-loop vector, and then select the
command source of inverter (P0-02) as the operation panel.
Step 3: input the nameplate parameters of the motor accurately (for example P1-00 ~ P1-05), please input the
following parameters according to the actual parameters of the motor (select according to the current motor):
Motor selection Parameter
P1-00: motor type P1-01: motor rated power
Motor 1 P1-02: motor rated voltage P1-03: motor rated current
P1-04: motor rated frequency P1-05: motor rated speed
Motor 2 A2-00～A2-05: same to above definitions
Step 4:
Parameter Name Note
Ones bit:
0: No operation
1: Static tuning 1 (partial parameters)
Self learning of motor 2: Dynamic tuning
P1-35
parameters 3: Static tuning 2
Tens bit:
0: Asynchronous motor
1: Synchronous motor
(a) If it is an asynchronous motor
P1-35 (tuning selection, motor 2 corresponds to A2-35) please select 2 (motor rotation self-learning), press

49
ENT/DATA to confirm, at this time, the keyboard displays TUNE.
Then press the RUN key on the keyboard panel, the frequency converter will drive the motor to accelerate and
decelerate, forward and reverse operation, the operation indicator will light up, and the tuning operation lasts for
about 2 minutes. When the above display information disappears, it will return to the normal parameter display
state, indicating that the tuning is completed.
After the dynamic tuning, the inverter will automatically calculate the following parameters of the motor:
Motor selection Parameter
P1-06: Asynchronous motor stator resistance
P1-07: Asynchronous motor rotor resistance
Motor 1 P1-08: Asynchronous motor leakage inductance
P1-09: Asynchronous motor interaction inductive reactance
P1-10: Asynchronous motor no load current
Motor 2 A2-06~A2-10: same to above definition
If the motor cannot be completely disconnected from the load, select 1 (static tuning of the asynchronous
machine) in P1-35 (motor 2 is PA-35), and then press RUN key on the keyboard panel to start the tuning
operation of motor parameters.
(b) If it is a synchronous motor
P1-35 (motor 2 is A2-35) please select 12 (synchronous motor dynamic tuning), press ENT/DATA to confirm,
and the keyboard will display TUNE.
Then press the "RUN" key on the panel, the frequency converter will drive the motor to accelerate and
decelerate, forward and reverse operation, the operation indicator will be on, and the tuning duration is about 2
minutes. When the above display information disappears, the normal parameter state is displayed, indicating
that the tuning is completed.
After this dynamic tuning, the frequency converter will automatically calculate the following parameters of the
motor:
Motor selection Parameter
P1-15: synchronous motor rotor resistance
P1-16: synchronous motor axis D inductance
Motor 1
P1-17: synchronous motor axis Q inductance
P1-19: back EMF coefficient
Motor 2 A2-15～A2-20: same to above definition
If the motor cannot be completely disconnected from the load, select 11 (synchronous motor static tuning) for
P1-35 (motor 2 is A2-35), and then press the RUN key on the keyboard panel to start the tuning operation of
motor parameters.
Note: For the closed-loop vector mode tuning, please set the correct encoder parameters and the motor control
mode (P0-01) to 2.

3-9. Using method of terminal X

The standard I / O expansion card can use up to 4 X terminals. Refer to chapter 2-4-3 for I / O wiring method.
When out of factory, P2-16 = 0000, P2-17 = 0000. When X is short circuited, the signal is valid (logic 1). When
X terminal is suspended, the signal is invalid (logic 0).
The user can also change the effective mode of the X terminal, that is, when the X terminal is short circuited, it
is an invalid (logic 0) signal. When the X terminal is suspended, it is an effective (logic 1) signal. At this time,
the corresponding bits of P2-16 and P2-17 need to be changed to 1.
The inverter also has software filtering time (P2-12) for the input signal X, which can improve the
anti-interference level.

50
For the X1-X3 input, the port signal delay function is specially provided to facilitate some applications
requiring delay processing.
The functions of the above four X terminals can be defined in P2-00 ~ P2-03, and each X can be selected from
51 functions as required. Refer to the detailed description of P2-00 ~ P2-03 for details.
As the design of hardware features, only X4 can accept high-frequency pulse signal, for the need for high-speed
pulse counting applications, please arrange in X4.

3-10. Using method of terminal Y

Standard I / O expansion card has 2 channels of output, which are Y1 and TA1/TB1/TC1, wherein Y1 is
transistor output, which can drive 24VDC low-voltage signal circuit, TA1/TB1/TC1 is relay output, and can
drive 220VAC control circuit.
By setting the value of P3-01 to P3-05, output function of each channel can be defined. It can be used to
indicate various working states and alarms of the inverter. There are about 40 function settings in total, so that
the user can realize specific automatic control requirements. Please refer to the detailed description of group P3
parameters.

3-11. Using method of terminal AI

Standard I/O card supports 2 channels of AI terminal.
Terminal Input signal
Voltage 0～10V
AI1-GND
Current 0～20mA
Voltage 0～10V
AI2-GND
Current 0～20mA

AI can be used when using external voltage and current signal to set frequency, torque, voltage of VF separated,
PID or feedback. The voltage or current value corresponding to the actual given or feedback physical quantity
relationship is set through P2-18 ~ P2-45.
The sampling value of AI can be read in U group function code. the converted calculation value is used for
internal subsequent calculation, and users cannot read it directly.

3-12. Using method of terminal AO

Analog extension card supports 1 channel AO output.
Terminal Output signal
Voltage 0～10V
AO1-GND
Current 0～20mA
AO1 can be used to indicate the internal operation parameters in analog mode. The indicated parameter
attributes can be modified through P3-13 and P3-14 before output. The modified characteristic curve Y = kX +
b, where X is the operation parameter to be output, and the k and b of AO1 can be set by function codes P3-15
and P3-16.

51
 4. Function parameters
4-1. Function code list
‘○’: Parameters can be modified during operation.
‘×’: Parameters cannot be modified during operation.
‘—‘: Read only, user cannot change.

Group P0: Basic operation parameters

Group P0: Basic operation parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
0: VF control mode
0 (VH6)
P0-01 First motor control mode 1: No speed sensor vector control (SVC) × 0001H
1 (VH6S)
2: Vector control with speed sensor ( FVC)
0: Operation panel
Operation command channel
P0-02 1: Terminal operation 0 ○ 0002H
selection
2: Communication
0: Digital setting (Power-off no memory)
1: Digital setting (Power-off memory)
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: AI3
5: Terminal pulse X4 setting
Main frequency source A 6: Communication setting
P0-03 0 × 0003H
channel selection 7: Multi-segment command setting
8: PID setting
9: Simple PLC operation
10:Specific mode for wire drawing and winding
(Supported by 3720 and above versions)
11:Panel knob setting (Supported by LED panel
with knob, 3730 and above versions)
0: Digital setting (Power-off no memory)
1: Digital setting (Power-off memory)
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: AI3
5: Terminal pulse X4 setting
Auxiliary frequency source B 6: Communication setting
P0-04 0 × 0004H
channel selection 7: Multi-segment command setting
8: PID setting
9: Simple PLC operation
10:Specific mode for wire drawing and winding
(Supported by 3740 and above versions)
11:Panel knob setting (Supported by LED panel
with knob, 3740 and above versions)

52
 Group P0: Basic operation parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
Ones bit: Frequency source selection
0: Main frequency source A
1: Calculation results of main and auxiliary
frequency sources
2: Switching between main frequency source A
Frequency source and auxiliary frequency source B
P0-05 00 ○ 0005H
superposition selection Tens bit: the operation relationship of main and
auxiliary frequency sources
0: A+B
1: A-B
2: max (A, B)
3: min (A, B)
Auxiliary frequency source B 0: Relative to the maximum frequency
P0-06 0 ○ 0006H
range selection 1: Relative to the main frequency source A
Auxiliary frequency source B
P0-07 0%~150% 100% ○ 0007H
range
Digital setting of auxiliary
P0-09 frequency source bias during 0.00Hz~max frequency P0-13 0.00Hz ○ 0009H
superposition
P0-10 Preset frequency 0.00Hz~max frequency P0-13 50Hz ○ 000AH
Frequency instruction decimal 1: One decimal place
P0-11 2 ○ 000BH
point 2: Two decimal places
Frequency shutdown memory 0: No memory
P0-12 1 ○ 000CH
selection for digital setting 1: Memory
P0-13 Maximum output frequency 50.00Hz~600.00Hz 50.00Hz × 000DH
0: Set by P0-15
1: AI1 setting
2: AI2 setting
P0-14 Upper limit frequency source 0 × 000EH
3: AI3 setting
4: Pulse setting
5: Communication setting
Lower limit frequency P0-17~Max output
P0-15 Upper limit frequency 50.00Hz ○ 000FH
frequency P0-13
P0-16 Upper limit frequency offset 0.00Hz~ Max output frequency (P0-13) 0.00Hz ○ 0010H
P0-17 Lower limit frequency 0.00Hz~ Upper limit frequency P0-15 0.00Hz ○ 0011H
0~65000s (PC-09=0)
Model
P0-18 Acceleration time 1 0.0~6500.0s (PC-09=1) ○ 0012H
setting
0.00~650.00s (PC-09=2)
0~65000s (PC-09=0)
Model
P0-19 Deceleration time 1 0.0~6500.0s (PC-09=1) ○ 0013H
setting
0.00~650.00s (PC-09=2)
Ones bit: Running direction
P0-20 Operation direction 00 ○ 0014H
0: Run in the default direction

53
 Group P0: Basic operation parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
1: Run in the opposite direction to the default
direction
Tens bit: One click prohibition of reversal
0: Invalid
1: Prohibit all operations in the opposite
direction
Reverse frequency Prohibition
0: Invalid
P0-21 (Supported by 3720 and above 0 ○ 0015H
1: Valid
versions)
Dead time of forward and
P0-22 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○ 0016H
reverse rotation
Run time frequency command 0: Operating frequency
P0-23 0 × 0017H
UP/DOWN reference 1: Set frequency
Motor parameter group 0: Motor parameter group 1
P0-25 0 × 0019H
selection 1: Motor parameter group 2

Group P1: First motor parameters

Group P1: First motor parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
0: Common asynchronous motor 0 (VH6)
P1-00 Motor type selection × 0100H
1: Synchronous motor 1(VH6S)
Model
P1-01 Motor rated power 0.1KW~650.0KW × 0101H
setting
Model
P1-02 Motor rated voltage 1V~1200V × 0102H
setting
0.01A~655.35A (VFD power ≤55kW) Model
P1-03 Motor rated current × 0103H
0.1A~6553.5A (VFD power >55kW) setting
Model
P1-04 Motor rated frequency 0.01Hz~ max output frequency × 0104H
setting
Model
P1-05 Motor rated speed 1rpm~65535rpm × 0105H
setting
Asynchronous motor 0.001Ω～65.535Ω (VFD power ≤55kW) Tuning
P1-06 × 0106H
stator resistance 0.0001Ω～6.5535Ω (VFD power >55kW) parameter
Asynchronous motor 0.001Ω～65.535Ω (VFD power ≤55kW) Tuning
P1-07 × 0107H
rotor resistance 0.0001Ω～6.5535Ω (VFD power >55kW) parameter
Leakage inductance of 0.01mH～655.35mH (VFD power ≤55kW) Tuning
P1-08 × 0108H
induction motor 0.001mH～65.535mH (VFD power >55kW) parameter
Mutual inductance of 0.01mH～655.35mH (VFD power ≤55kW) Tuning
P1-09 × 0109H
induction motor 0.001mH～65.535mH (VFD power >55kW) parameter
No load current of 0.01A～P1-03 (VFD power ≤55kW) Tuning
P1-10 × 010AH
asynchronous motor 0.1A～P1-03 (VFD power >55kW) parameter
P1-15 Synchronous motor stator 0.001Ω～65.535Ω (VFD power ≤55kW) Tuning × 010FH

54
 Group P1: First motor parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
resistance 0.0001Ω～6.5535Ω (VFD power >55kW) parameter
Synchronous motor 0.01mH～655.35mH (VFD power ≤55kW) Tuning
P1-16 × 0110H
D-axis inductance 0.001mH～65.535mH (VFD power >55kW) parameter
Synchronous motor 0.01mH～655.35mH (VFD power ≤55kW) Tuning
P1-17 × 0111H
Q-axis inductance 0.001mH～65.535mH (VFD power >55kW) parameter
Synchronous motor back Tuning
P1-19 0~6000.0 × 0113H
EMF coefficient parameter
0: ABZ incremental encoder
P1-25 Encoder type 0 × 0119H
1: Resolver encoder
P1-26 Encoder pulse ppr 1~65535 1024 × 011AH
P1-27 Encoder mounting angle 0.0~359.9° 0.0 × 011BH
Encoder phase sequence /
0: Forward
P1-28 main direction. Only ABZ 0 × 011CH
1: Reverse
incremental encoder
Polar logarithm of
P1-32 1~65535 1 × 0120H
rotation
Speed feedback PG 0.0~10.0 (0.0: speed feedback disconnection
P1-33 0.0 × 0121H
broken line detection time detection invalid)
Ones bit:
0: No operation
1: Static self learning 1(part of parameters)
Self learning of motor 2: Motor rotation self-learning
P1-35 00 × 0123H
parameters 3: Static self learning 2 (part of parameters)
Tens bit:
0: Asynchronous motor
1: Synchronous motor

Group P2: Input terminal function parameters

Group P2: Input terminal function parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
Input terminal X1 function 0: No function
P2-00 01 × 0200H
selection 1: FWD or run command
Input terminal X2 function 2: REV or FWD/REV direction
P2-01 (Note: when it is set to 1 or 2, it should be 02 × 0201H
selection
used with P2-10. See the parameter for
Input terminal X3 function
P2-02 details) 10 × 0202H
selection 3: Three wire mode operation
Input terminal X4 function 4: Forward jog (FJOG)
P2-03 00 × 0203H
selection 5: Reverse jog (RJOG)
Input terminal X5 function 6: Terminal UP
P2-04 7: Terminal DOWN 00 × 0204H
selection
P2-05 Input terminal X6 function 8: UP/DOWN setting clear 00 × 0205H

55
 Group P2: Input terminal function parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
selection 9: Free stop
10: Fault reset
11: Frequency source switching
12: Multi-segment command terminal 1
13: Multi-segment command terminal 2
14: Multi-segment command terminal 3
15: Multi-segment command terminal 4
16: Acc/Dec time terminal 1
17: Acc/Dec time terminal 2
18: Acc/Dec prohibited
19: Pulse input
20: Counter input
21: Counter reset
22: Length counter input
23: Length counter reset
24: Swing frequency pause
25: Operation pause
26: PLC status reset
27: Run command switch to keyboard
28: Run command switch to
communication
29: Torque control prohibited
30: Switch between speed control and
torque control
Input terminal X7 function
P2-06 32: PID pause 0206H
selection
33: PID reverse direction of action
34: PID integral pause
35: PID parameter switching
36: External fault normally open input
37: External fault normally close input
38: User-defined fault 1
39: User-defined fault 2
40: Motor parameter selection
41: Switch between main frequency X and
preset frequency
42: Switch between auxiliary frequency Y
and preset frequency
43: Frequency setting effective terminal
44: DC braking
45: Deceleration DC braking
46: Emergency stop
47: External stop terminal (only valid for
panel control)
48: External terminal stop (according to
deceleration time 4)
49: Reverse run prohibited
50: The running time is cleared
51: Two wire / three wire switching

56
 Group P2: Input terminal function parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
52: Clear encoder count
0: Two wire mode 1
1: Two wire mode 2
P2-10 XI terminal command mode 0 × 020AH
2: Three wire mode 1
3: Three wire mode 2
XI terminal UP/DOWN changing 1.00Hz
P2-11 0.001Hz/s~50.000Hz/s ○ 020BH
rate /s
P2-12 XI terminal filtering time 0.000s~1.000s 0.010s ○ 020CH
P2-13 X1 delay time 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s × 020DH
P2-14 X2 delay time 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s × 020EH
P2-15 X3 delay time 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s × 020FH
0: Low level valid
1: High level valid
Ones bit: X1
XI terminal effective state
P2-16 Tens bit: X2 00000 × 0210H
selection 1
Hundreds bit: X3
Thousands bit: X4
Ten thousands bit: X5
0: High level valid
XI terminal effective state 1: Low level valid
P2-17 00000 × 0211H
selection 2 Ones bit: X6
Tens bit: X7
P2-18 AI curve 1 min setting 0.00V~P2-20 0.00V ○ 0212H
AI curve 1 min setting
P2-19 corresponding frequency -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 0213H
percentage
P2-20 AI curve 1 max setting P2-18～+10.00V 10.00V ○ 0214H
AI curve 1 max setting
P2-21 corresponding frequency -100.0%~+100.0% 100.0% ○ 0215H
percentage
P2-22 AI curve 2 min setting 0.00V~P2-24 0.00V ○ 0216H
AI curve 2 min setting
P2-23 corresponding frequency -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 0217H
percentage
P2-24 AI curve 2 max setting P2-22~+10.00V 10.00V ○ 0218H
AI curve 2 max setting
P2-25 corresponding frequency -100.0%~+100.0% 100.0% ○ 0219H
percentage
P2-26 AI curve 3 min setting 0.00V~P2-28 0V ○ 021AH
AI curve 3 min setting
P2-27 corresponding frequency -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 021BH
percentage
P2-28 AI curve 3 max setting P2-26~+10.00V 10.00V ○ 021CH

57
 Group P2: Input terminal function parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
AI curve 3 max setting
P2-29 corresponding frequency -100.0%~+100.0% 100.0% ○ 021DH
percentage
P2-30 AI curve 4 min setting 0.00V~P2-32 0.00V ○ 021EH
AI curve 4 min setting
P2-31 corresponding frequency -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 021FH
percentage
AI curve 4 inflection point 1
P2-32 P2-30~P2-34 10.00V ○ 0220H
setting
AI curve 4 inflection point 1
P2-33 setting corresponding frequency -100.0%~+100.0% 100.0% ○ 0221H
percentage
AI curve 4 inflection point 2
P2-34 P2-32V~P2-36 0.00V ○ 0222H
setting
AI curve 4 inflection point 2
P2-35 setting corresponding frequency -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 0223H
percentage
P2-36 AI curve 4 max setting P2-34~+10.00V 10.00V ○ 0224H
AI curve 4 max setting
P2-37 corresponding frequency -100.0%~+100.0% 100.0% ○ 0225H
percentage
P2-38 AI curve 5 min setting -10.00V~P2-40 0V ○ 0226H
AI curve 5 min setting
P2-39 corresponding frequency -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 0227H
percentage
AI curve 5 inflection point 1
P2-40 P2-38~P2-42 10.00V ○ 0228H
setting
AI curve 5 inflection point 1
P2-41 setting corresponding frequency -100.0%~+100.0% 100.0% ○ 0229H
percentage
AI curve 5 inflection point 2
P2-42 P2-40~P2-44 0.00V ○ 022AH
setting
AI curve 5 inflection point 2
P2-43 setting corresponding frequency -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 022BH
percentage
P2-44 AI curve 5 max setting P2-42~+10.00V 10.00V ○ 022CH
AI curve 5 max setting
P2-45 corresponding frequency -100.0%~+100.0% 100.0% ○ 022DH
percentage
Ones bit: AI1 curve selection
1: Curve 1 (2 points, see P2-18 ~ P2-21)
P2-54 AI curve selection 321 ○ 0236H
2: Curve 2 (2 points, see P2-22 ~ P2-25)
3: Curve 3 (2 points, see P2-26 ~ P2-29)

58
 Group P2: Input terminal function parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
4: Curve 4 (4 points, see P2-30 ~ P2-37)
5: Curve 5 (4 points, see P2-38 ~ P2-45)
Tens bit: AI2 curve selection, ditto
Hundreds bit: AI3 curve selection, ditto
Ones bit: AI1 below minimum input
setting selection
0: Corresponding minimum input setting
AI below minimum input setting 1: 0.0%
P2-55 000 ○ 0237H
selection Tens bit: AI2 below minimum input
setting selection
Hundreds bit: AI3 below minimum input
setting selection
P2-56 AI1 filter time constant 0.00s~10.00s 0.10s ○ 0238H
P2-57 AI2 filter time constant 0.00s~10.00s 0.10s ○ 0239H
P2-58 AI3 filter time constant 0.00s~10.00s 0.10s ○ 023AH
P2-60 AI1 jump point 0.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 023CH
P2-61 AI1 jump range 0.0%~100.0% 0.5% ○ 023DH
P2-62 AI2 jump point 0.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 023EH
P2-63 AI2 jump range 0.0%~100.0% 0.5% ○ 023FH
P2-64 AI2 jump point 0.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 0240H
P2-65 AI2 jump range 0.0%~100.0% 0.5% ○ 0241H
0.00kH
P2-66 PULSE min setting 0.00kHz~P2-68 ○ 0242H
z
PULSE min setting
P2-67 corresponding frequency -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 0243H
percentage
50.00k
P2-68 PULSE max setting P2-66~50.0kHz ○ 0244H
Hz
PULSE max setting
P2-69 corresponding frequency -100.0%~+100.0% 100.0% ○ 0245H
percentage
P2-70 PULSE filter time constant 0.00s~10.00s 0.10s ○ 0246H

Group P3: Output terminal function parameters

Group P3: Output terminal function parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
0: High speed pulse output
P3-00 Y2 output mode 0 ○ 0300H
1: Common terminal output

59
 Group P3: Output terminal function parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
0: No output
1: Inverter in operation
2: Fault output (free stop fault)
3: Frequency level detection FDT1 output
Y1 output function 4: Frequency level detection FDT2 output
P3-01 01 ○ 0301H
selection 5: Frequency arrival
6: Zero speed operation (no output during
shutdown)
7: Zero speed operation 2 (output when
shutdown)
8: Upper limit frequency arrival
9:Lower limit frequency arrival (operation
related)
10: Motor overload alarm
Y2 (normal terminal) 11: Frequency converter overload alarm
P3-02 12: Communication settings 00 ○ 0302H
output function selection
13: In torque limit
15: Frequency 1 reached output
16: Frequency 2 reached output
17: Current 1 reached output
18: Current 2 reached output
19: Set counting value reached
Relay 1 output function 20: Specified counting value reached
P3-04 02 ○ 0304H
selection 21: Ready for operation
23: AI1 input overrange
24: Under voltage state output
25: Cumulative power on time reached
26: Timing arrival output
27: Length arrived
28: Simple PLC cycle completed
29: Cumulative running time arrival
32: Lower limit frequency reached (output when
shutdown)
Relay 2 output function 33: Fault output (free stop fault and no output
P3-05 00 ○ 0305H
selection under voltage)
34: Module temperature reached
35: Warning output (all faults)
37: In reverse operation
39: Output current overrange
40: Zero current state
41: This time of running time arrived
42: Bus voltage reaches
P3-06 Y1 output delay time 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○ 0306H
Y2 (normal terminal)
P3-07 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○ 0307H
output delay time
P3-09 Relay 1 output delay time 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○ 0309H
P3-10 Relay 2 output delay time 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○ 030AH

60
 Group P3: Output terminal function parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
0: positive logic
1: negative logic
Y terminal effective state Ones bit: Y1
P3-11 00000 ○ 030BH
selection Tens bit: Y2
Thousands bit: relay 1
Ten thousands bit: relay 2
0: Operating frequency
1: Set frequency
Y2 (high speed pulse )
P3-12 2: Output current 00 ○ 030CH
output selection
3:Motor output torque (absolute value,
percentage relative to motor)
4: Output power
5: Output voltage
P3-13 AO1 output selection 6: AI1 00 ○ 030DH
7: AI2
8: AI3
9:PULSE input (100.0% corresponding to
100.0KHz)
10: Output speed
P3-14 AO2 output selection 01 ○ 030EH
11: Communication control output
12: Count value
13: Length
P3-15 AO1 zero bias coefficient -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 030FH
P3-16 AO1 gain -10.00~+10.00 1.00 ○ 0310H
P3-17 AO2 zero bias coefficient -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 0311H
P3-18 AO2 gain -10.00~+10.00 1.00 ○ 0312H
Y2 (high speed pulse)
P3-23 max input pulse 0.01KHz~50.0KHz 50.0KHz ○ 0317H
frequency

Group P4: Start stop mode

Group P4: Start stop mode
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
0: Direct start
P4-00 Start mode 1: Speed tracking restart 0 ○ 0400H
2:Pre-excitation start (AC asynchronous motor)
P4-01 Starting frequency 0.00Hz~10.00Hz 0.00Hz ○ 0401H
P4-02 Start frequency duration 0.0s~100.0s 0.0s × 0402H
Percentage of starting DC
P4-03 braking current and 0%~100% 0% × 0403H
pre-excitation current
DC braking time /
P4-04 pre-excitation time at 0.0s~100.0s 0.0s × 0404H
start-up

61
 Group P4: Start stop mode
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
0: No protection
P4-05 Start protection selection 0 × 0405H
1: Protection
Speed tracking mode 0: Start from shutdown frequency
P4-06 (Only valid for 1: Starting from power frequency 0 × 0406H
asynchronous motors) 2: Start at maximum output frequency
P4-07 Speed tracking speed 1~100 20 ○ 0407H
Speed tracking closed Model
P4-10 30%~200% × 040AH
loop current confirmed
0: linear acceleration and deceleration
1:Continuous S-curve acceleration and
Acceleration and
P4-19 deceleration 0 × 0413H
deceleration mode
2:Intermittent S-curve acceleration and
deceleration
Time proportion at the
P4-20 0.0%~ (100.0% - P2-21) 30.0% × 0414H
beginning of the S curve
Time proportion at the
P4-21 0.0%~ (100.0% - P2-20) 30.0% × 0415H
end of the S curve
0: Deceleration stop
P4-22 Stop mode 0 ○ 0416H
1: Free stop
Starting frequency of DC
P4-23 0.00Hz~maximum output frequency P0-13 0.00Hz ○ 0417H
braking during shutdown
DC braking waiting time
P4-24 0.0s~100.0s 0.0s ○ 0418H
during shutdown
Percentage of DC
P4-25 braking current when 0%~100% 0% ○ 0419H
shutdown
Waiting time of DC
P4-26 0.0s~100.0s 0.0s ○ 041AH
braking during shutdown

Group P5: VF parameters

Group P5: VF parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
0: Linear VF
1: Multipoint VF
2: Square VF
3: the 1.2nd power VF
P5-00 VF curve selection 4: the 1.4th power VF 00 × 0500H
6: the 1.6th power VF
8: the 1.8th power VF
10: VF complete separation mode
11: VF semi separation mode
P5-01 Multipoint VF frequency point F1 0.00Hz~P5-03 0.00Hz × 0501H

62
 Group P5: VF parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
P5-02 Multipoint VF voltage point V1 0.0~100.0% 0.0% × 0502H
P5-03 Multipoint VF frequency point F2 P5-01~P5-05 0.00Hz × 0503H
P5-04 Multipoint VF voltage point V2 0.0~100.0% 0.0% × 0504H
P5-05 Multipoint VF frequency point F3 P5-05~P1-04 (motor rated frequency) 0.00Hz × 0505H
P5-06 Multipoint VF voltage point V3 0.0~100.0% 0.0% × 0506H
0.0% (automatic torque boost) Model
P5-07 Torque boost ○ 0507H
0.1%~30.0% setting
0.00Hz~ maximum output frequency
P5-08 Cut-off frequency of torque boost 50.00Hz × 0508H
P0-13
0: Digital setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
P5-09 VF separated voltage source 4: PULSE setting (X4) 0 ○ 0509H
5: Communication setting
6: Multi-speed command
7: PID setting
8: Simple PLC operation
VF separated voltage source
P5-10 0~motor rated voltage 0V ○ 050AH
digital setting
VF separated voltage acceleration
P5-11 0.0s~1000.0s 0.0s ○ 050BH
time
VF separated voltage deceleration
P5-12 0.0s~1000.0s 0.0s ○ 050CH
time
0:The frequency voltage reduced to 0
independently
P5-13 VF separated stop mode selection 1: When the voltage decreases to 0 ○ 050DH
zero, the frequency begins to
decrease again
P5-14 VF slip compensation gain 0.0%~200.0% 0.0% ○ 050EH
P5-15 Slip compensation time constant 0.1~10.0s 0.1s ○ 050FH
P5-16 VF over excitation gain 0~200 64 ○ 0510H
Model
P5-17 VF oscillation suppression gain 0~100 ○ 0511H
setting
VF oscillation suppression mode
P5-18 0~4 3 × 0512H
selection
VF over current stall action
P5-19 50~200% 150% × 0513H
current
VF over current stall suppression 0: invalid
P5-20 1 × 0514H
enable 1: valid
VF over current stall suppression
P5-21 0~100 5 ○ 0515H
gain
P5-22 VF over current stall action 50%~200% 50 × 0516H

63
 Group P5: VF parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
current compensation coefficient
Model
P5-23 Overvoltage stall action voltage 200.0V~2000.0V × 0517H
setting
0: Invalid
P5-24 Overvoltage stall enable 1 × 0518H
1: Valid
Over voltage stall suppression
P5-25 0~100 30 ○ 0519H
frequency gain
Over voltage stall suppression
P5-26 0~100 30 ○ 051AH
voltage gain
Limit of maximum rise frequency
P5-27 0~50Hz 5Hz × 051BH
of over voltage stall
PID shutdown reference voltage
P5-34 (supported by versions 3740 and 0.0~1000.0V 780.0V ○ 0522H
above)
PID shutdown proportional gain
P5-35 (supported in versions 3740 and 0~65535 500 ○ 0523H
above)
PID shutdown integral gain
P5-36 (supported in versions 3740 and 0~65535 200 ○ 0524H
above)
PID shutdown differential
P5-37 gain(supported in versions 3740 0~65535 100 ○ 0525H
and above)
PID reference time for parabolic
P5-38 shutdown (supported in versions 0.0~4200.0s 20.0s ○ 0526H
3740 and above)
Selection of deceleration 0: Linear deceleration shutdown
P5-39 shutdown (supported in versions 1: Parabolic deceleration shutdown 0 ○ 0527H
3740 and above) 2: PID deceleration shutdown

Group P6: Vector control parameters

Group P6: Vector control parameters
Default value Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
address
P6-00 Speed loop proportional gain 1 1~100 20 ○ 0600H
P6-01 Speed loop integration time 1 0.01s~10.00s 0.50s ○ 0601H
P6-02 Speed loop proportional gain 2 1~100 6 ○ 0602H
P6-03 Speed loop integration time 2 0.01s~10.00s 1.00s ○ 0603H
P6-04 Switching frequency 1 0.00~P6-05 5.00Hz ○ 0604H
P6-05 Switching frequency 2 P6-04~ P0-13 10.00Hz ○ 0605H
Ones bit: integral separation
P6-06 Integral attribute of speed loop 0: invalid 0 ○ 0606H
1: valid

64
 Group P6: Vector control parameters
Default value Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
address
P6-07 Vector slip compensation coefficient 50%~200% 110 ○ 0607H
P6-08 SVC speed feedback filter time 0.000s~0.100s 0.015s ○ 0608H
0: Set by P6-11
1: AI1
2: AI2
Speed control (drive) torque upper 3: AI3
P6-10 0 ○ 060AH
limit source 4: PULSE setting
5:Communication setting
6: min(AI1,AI2)
7: max(AI1,AI2)
Speed control (drive) torque upper
P6-11 0.0%~200.0% 150.0% ○ 060BH
limit digital setting
Proportional gain of excitation
P6-14 0 ~ 60000 2400 ○ 060EH
regulation
P6-15 Integral gain of excitation regulation 0 ~ 60000 400 ○ 060FH
P6-16 Torque regulated proportional gain 0 ~ 60000 2400 ○ 0610H
P6-17 Integral gain of torque regulation 0 ~ 60000 400 ○ 0611H

Group P7: Fault parameters

Group P7: Fault parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
P7-00 Third time (last) fault type 0: No fault - - -
1: Accelerated over current
P7-01 Second time fault type - - -
2: Deceleration over current
3: Constant speed over current
4: Acceleration overvoltage
5: Deceleration overvoltage
6: Constant speed overvoltage
7: Buffer resistance overload fault
8: Under voltage fault
9: Inverter overload
10: Motor overload
11: Input phase loss
12: Output phase loss
P7-02 First time fault type 13: Radiator overheating - - -
14: Contactor fault
15: Current detection fault
16: Motor tuning fault
17: Code disk failure
18: Short circuit fault of motor to
ground
19: Load drop
20: Wave by wave current limiting
fault
21: Pole position detection failed

65
 Group P7: Fault parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
22: UVW signal feedback error
23: Brake resistance short circuit
24: Brake pipe overload
25: Brake pipe straight through
26: SVC stall fault
43: External fault
44: Communication failure
45: EEPROM read / write failure
46: Operation time arrival
47: Power on time arrival
48: User defined fault 1
49: User defined fault 2
50: PID feedback loss during
operation
51: Running switch motor
52: Speed feedback deviation too
large
53: Motor over speed
54: Motor over temperature fault
55: Point to point slave failure
56: Power on lock time has arrived
P7-03 Third time (last time) fault frequency - - - -
P7-04 Third time (last time) fault current - - - -
P7-05 Third time (last time) fault bus voltage - - - -
Third time (last time) fault input
P7-06 - - - -
terminal status
Third time (last time) fault output
P7-07 - - - -
terminal status
P7-08 Third time (last time) fault VFD status - - - -
Third time (last time) fault power on
P7-09 Unit:minute - - -
time
Third time (last time) fault operation
P7-10 Unit:minute - - -
time
Location information of the third
P7-11 (latest) fault(supported by 3720 and -
above versions)
P7-13 Second time fault frequency - - - -
P7-14 Second time fault current - - - -
P7-15 Second time fault bus voltage - - - -
P7-16 Second time fault input terminal status - - - -
Second time fault output terminal
P7-17 - - - -
status
P7-18 Second time fault VFD status - - - -
P7-19 Second time fault power on time Unit: minute - - -
P7-20 Second time fault operation time Unit: minute - - -

66
 Group P7: Fault parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
Location information of the second
P7-21 fault(supported by 3720 and above -
versions)
P7-23 First time fault frequency - - - -
P7-24 First time fault current - - - -
P7-25 First time fault bus voltage - - - -
P7-26 First time fault input terminal status - - - -
P7-27 First time fault output terminal status - - - -
P7-28 First time fault VFD status - - - -
P7-29 First time fault power on time Unit:minute - - -
P7-30 First time fault operation time Unit:minute - - -
Location information of the first
P7-31 fault(supported by 3720 and above - - - -
versions)
Motor overload protection mode 0: Forbidden
P7-33 1 ○ 0721H
selection 1: Allow
P7-34 Motor overload protection gain 0.20~10.00 1.00 ○ 0722H
P7-35 Motor overload warning coefficient 50%~100% 80% ○ 0723H
Ones bit: input phase lacking
protection
Input phase lacking/contactor closing Tens bit: Contactor closing
P7-39 11 ○ 0727H
protection selection protection selection
0: Forbidden
1: Allow
Output phase lacking protection 0: Forbidden
P7-40 1 ○ 0728H
selection 1: Allow
Power on short circuit protection 0: Invalid
P7-41 1 ○ 0729H
towards the ground function 1: Valid
Action selection of fault relay during 0: No action
P7-42 0 ○ 072AH
automatic fault reset 1: Action
P7-43 Interval time of automatic fault reset 0.1s~60.0s 1.0s ○ 072BH
P7-44 Number of automatic reset of faults 0~20 0 ○ 072CH
Ones bit: motor overload (Err 10)
0: Free stop
1: Stop as stop mode
Tens bit: input phase lacking (Err11)
0: Free stop
Protection action selection 1 when
P7-45 1: Stop as stop mode 00000 ○ 072DH
fault
Hundreds bit: output phase lacking
(Err12)
0: Free stop
1: Stop as stop mode
Thousands bit: output load drop

67
 Group P7: Fault parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
(Err19)
0: Free stop
1: Stop as stop mode
Ten thousand bit: pole position
detection failed (Err21)
0: Free stop
1: Stop as stop mode
Ones bit: external fault 1 (Err43)
0: Free stop
1: Stop as stop mode
Tens bit: communication error
(Err44)
0: Free stop
1: Stop as stop mode
Hundreds bit: EEPROM read write
error (Err45)
Protection action selection 2 when
P7-46 0: Free stop 00000 ○ 072EH
fault
1: Stop as stop mode
Thousands bit: operation time
reached (Err46)
0: Free stop
1: Stop as stop mode
Ten thousand bit: power on time
reached (Err47)
0: Free stop
1: Stop as stop mode
Ones bit: user defined fault 1
(Err48)
0: Free stop
1: Stop as stop mode
Tens bit: user defined fault 2 (Err49)
0: Free stop
1: Stop as stop mode
Hundreds bit: PID feedback lost in
Protection action selection 3 when
P7-47 operation (Err50) 00000 ○ 072FH
fault
0: Free stop
1: Stop as stop mode
Thousands bit: speed deviation too
large (Err52)
0: Free stop
1: Stop as stop mode
Ten thousand bit: motor over speed
(Err53)

68
 Group P7: Fault parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
0: Free stop
1: Stop as stop mode
Ones bit: motor overheat (Err54)
Protection action selection 4 when
P7-48 0: Free stop 0 ○ 0730H
fault
1: Stop as stop mode
P7-52 Brake starting voltage 200.0V ~ 2000.0V 690V ○ 0734H
P7-53 Utilization rate of brake resistor 0 ~ 100% 100% ○ 0735H
P7-55 Over voltage stall gain 0 ~ 100 30 ○ 0737H
P7-56 Over voltage stall protection voltage 650V ~ 800V 760.0V ○ 0738H
P7-61 Load drop detection level 0.0%~100.0% 10.0% ○ 073DH
P7-62 Load drop detection time 0.0~60.0s 1.0s ○ 073EH
0.0% ~ 50.0% (unit is max
P7-63 Over speed detection value 20.0% ○ 073FH
frequency P0-12)
P7-64 Over speed detection time 0.0s~60.0s 1.0s ○ 0740H
Detection value of excessive speed 0.0% ~ 50.0%(unit is max
P7-65 20.0% ○ 0741H
deviation frequency P0-13)
Excessive speed deviation detection
P7-66 0.0s ~ 60.0s 5.0s ○ 0742H
time
0: Transient power failure invalid
1:Deceleration in case of
Selection of instantaneous stop
P7-67 instantaneous power failure 0 × 0743H
non-stop function
2:Deceleration stop in case of
instantaneous power failure
Pause judgement voltage of transient
P7-68 80.0%~100.0% 85.0% × 0744H
stop action
Judgment time of instantaneous stop
P7-69 0.0s~30.0s 0.5s × 0745H
non-stop voltage rising
Judgement voltage of instantaneous
P7-70 60.0%~100.0% (bus voltage) 80.0% ○ 0746H
stop non-stop action
Proportional gain of instantaneous stop
P7-71 0 ~ 100 40 ○ 0747H
non-stop
Integral coefficient of instantaneous
P7-72 0 ~ 100 30 ○ 0748H
stop non-stop
Deceleration time of instantaneous
P7-73 0 ~ 300.0s 20.0 × 0749H
stop non-stop

Group P8: Keyboard and display

Group P8: Keyboard and display
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
0: Menu switching
JOG/REV function
P8-00 1: Forward and reverse switching 0 × 0800H
selection
2: Forward jog

69
 Group P8: Keyboard and display
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
3: Reverse jog
0: Only in keyboard operation mode,
STOP/REST key shutdown function is
P8-01 STOP/REST function effective 1 ○ 0801H
1: In any operation mode, STOP/REST key
is effective
0: No operation
1: Restore factory parameters, excluding
motor parameters
1: Restore factory parameters, excluding
motor parameters and values of P0-13 and
P0-15 (supported by versions 3730 and
above)
P8-02 Parameter initialization 0 × 0802H
2: Clear record information
3: Restore factory parameters (including
motor parameters)
4: Backup current user parameters (only
supported by LCD panel)
5: Restore user backup parameters (only
supported by LCD panel)
P8-03 User password 0~65535 00000 ○ -
Ones bit:
0: No display
Personalized parameter 1: Display user selected parameters
P8-05 00 × -
mode selection Tens bit:
0: No display
1: Display user modified parameters
Parameter modification 0: Modifiable
P8-06 0 ○ -
attribute 1: Not modifiable
The bit meaning
LED operation display
P8-07 Bit0: Operating frequency 001F ○ 0807H
parameter 1 (Low bit)
Bit1: The set frequency
Bit2: Bus voltage
Bit3: Output current
Bit4: Output voltage
Bit5: Output torque
Bit6: Output power
LED operation display
P8-08 Bit7: X input status 0000 ○ 0808H
parameter 2 (High bit)
Bit8: Y output status
Bit9: AI1 voltage
Bit10: AI2 voltage
Bit11: AI3 voltage
Bit12: PULSE input pulse frequency, the

70
 Group P8: Keyboard and display
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
unit is 0.01KHz
Bit13: PULSE input pulse frequency, the
unit is 1Hz
Bit14: PID setting
Bit15: PID feedback
Bit16: Load speed display
Bit17: Feedback speed, the unit is 0.1Hz
Bit18: Actual feedback speed
Bit19: Line speed
Bit20: PLC stage
Bit21: Counting value
Bit22: Length value
Bit23: Main frequency A display
Bit24: Auxiliary frequency B display
Bit25: Communication setting value
Bit26: Voltage before AI1 correction
Bit27: Voltage before AI2 correction
Bit28: Voltage before AI3 correction
Bit29: Remaining running time
Bit30: Current power on time
Bit31: Current running time
The bit meaning
Bit0: The set frequency
Bit1: Bus voltage
Bit2: X input status
Bit3: Y output status
Bit4: AI1 voltage
LED stop display Bit5: AI2 voltage
P8-09 0033 ○ 0809H
parameters Bit6: AI3 voltage
Bit7: PULSE input pulse frequency
Bit8: PID setting
Bit9: Load speed display
Bit10: PLC Step
Bit11: Counting value
Bit12: Length value
P8-10 Accumulated running time 0h~65535h - - 080AH
P8-11 Cumulative power on time 0h~65535h - - 080BH
Cumulative power
P8-12 0~65535 degree - - 080CH
consumption
P8-14 Product ID - - - 080EH
P8-15 Software version - - - 080FH
P8-16 Firmware version - - - 0810H
P8-19 Inverter module radiator 0.0℃~100.0℃ - - 0813H

71
 Group P8: Keyboard and display
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
temperature
P8-20 Output power factor 0.00% ~ 200.0% 100.0 ○ 0814H
P8-21 Load speed display factor 0.0001~6.5000 1.0000 ○ 0815H
Ones bit:number of decimal points of U0-16
0: 0 decimal places
1: 1 decimal place
2: 2 decimal places
Number of decimal points
P8-22 3: 3 decimal places 11 ○ 0816H
for load speed display
Tens bit:number of decimal points of
U0-17,U0-18
1: 1 decimal place
2: 2 decimal places

Group P9: Communication parameters

Group P9: Communication parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
0: Modbus-RTU protocol
Serial communication
P9-00 1: Extension card(Ethercat, CANopen) 0 × 0900H
protocol selection
2：ASCII mode
0: Broadcast address
P9-01 Local address 1 ○ 0901H
1 ~ 247 (Modbus valid)
Ones bit: MODBUS
0: 300BPS
1: 600BPS
2: 1200BPS
3: 2400BPS
4: 4800BPS
5: 9600BPS
6: 19200BPS
P9-02 Communication baud rate 7: 38400BPS 06 ○ 0902H
8: 57600BPS (Supported in versions
3740 and above)
9: 115200BPS (Supported in versions
3740 and above)
Tens bit: EtherCAT
0：115200BPS
1：208300BPS
2：256000BPS
0: No verification (8-N-2) (RTU)
1: Even verification (8-E-1) (RTU)
P9-03 MODBUS data format 1 ○ 0903H
2: Odd Verification (8-O-1) (RTU)
3: No verification (8-N-1) (RTU)

72
 4: Even check (7-E-1) (ASCII)
0.0: Invalid
P9-04 Communication timeout 0.0 ○ 0904H
0.1~60.0s
P9-05 MODBUS response delay 0~20ms 2 ○ 0905H
Extension card
P9-06 communication 0.0~60.0s 0.0s ○ 0906H
interruption detection
VB3/VB5/V5
Ten bit:
communication control
P9-07 0: Disable 0 ○ 0907H
words (supported in
1: Enable
versions 3740 and above)

Group PA: Process control closed-loop parameters

Group PA: Process control closed-loop parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
0: PA-05 setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
PA-01 Setting channel selection 3: AI3 0 ○ 0A01H
4: PULSE pulse setting (X4)
5: Communication setting
6: Multi-segment command setting
0: AI1
1: AI2
2: AI3
PA-02 Feedback channel selection 3: AI1-AI2 0 ○ 0A02H
4: AI1+AI2
5: PULSE pulse setting (X4)
6: Communication setting
PA-03 PID feedback filter time 0.00s~30.00s 0.00s ○ 0A03H
PA-04 PID output filter time 0.00s~30.00s 0.00s ○ 0A04H
PA-05 PID value setting 0.0%~100.0% 50.0% ○ 0A05H
PA-06 PID setting change time 0.00s~300.00s 0.00s ○ 0A06H
PA-07 PID reverse cut-off frequency 0.00Hz~ Max output frequency 0.00Hz ○ 0A07H
PA-08 PID deviation limit 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○ 0A08H
PA-09 PID differential limit 0.00%~100.00% 0.10% ○ 0A09H
PA-10 Proportional gain P 0.0~1000.0 20.0 ○ 0A0AH
PA-11 Integral time I 0.01s~10.00s 2.00s ○ 0A0BH
PA-12 Differential time D 0.000s~10.000s 0.000s ○ 0A0CH
0: Don't switch
1: Switch through X terminal
PID parameter switching 2:Switch automatically according to
PA-13 0 ○ 0A0DH
condition deviation
3: Switch automatically according to the
operation frequency

73
 Group PA: Process control closed-loop parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
PID parameter switching
PA-14 0.0%~PA-15 20.0% ○ 0A0EH
deviation 1
PID parameter switching
PA-15 PA-14~100.0% 80.0% ○ 0A0FH
deviation 2
PA-16 PID proportional gain P2 0.0~100.0 20.0 ○ 0A10H
PA-17 PID integral time I2 0.01s~10.00s 2.00s ○ 0A11H
PA-18 PID differential time D2 0.000s~10.000s 0.000s ○ 0A12H
0: Positive action
PA-19 PID action direction 0 ○ 0A13H
1: Negative action
PA-20 PID given feedback range 0~65535 1000 ○ 0A14H
PID maximum deviation
PA-21 0.00%~100.00% 1.00% ○ 0A15H
between two outputs
PID minimum deviation
PA-22 0.00%~100.00% 1.00% ○ 0A16H
between two outputs
PA-23 PID initial value 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○ 0A17H
PA-24 PID initial value holding time 0.00s~600.00s 0.00s ○ 0A18H
PID operation mode (whether 0: Not operation when stop
PA-25 0 ○ 0A19H
to operate when stop) 1: Operation during shutdown
Ones bit: Integral separation
0: Invalid
1: Valid
PA-26 PID integral attribute Tens bit: Whether to stop integration 00 ○ 0A1AH
after output to limit value
0: Continue to integral
1: Stop integral
PID feedback lost detection 0.0%: not judge the feedback lost
PA-27 0.0% ○ 0A1BH
value 0.1%~100.0%
PID feedback lost detection
PA-28 0.0s~30.0s 0.0s ○ 0A1CH
time

Group PB: Multi-speed and simple PLC operation parameters

Group PB: multi-speed and simple PLC operation parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
PB-00 Multi-segment frequency 0 -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 0B00H
PB-01 Multi-segment frequency 1 -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 0B01H
PB-02 Multi-segment frequency 2 -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 0B02H
PB-03 Multi-segment frequency 3 -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 0B03H
PB-04 Multi-segment frequency 4 -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 0B04H
PB-05 Multi-segment frequency 5 -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 0B05H
PB-06 Multi-segment frequency 6 -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 0B06H
PB-07 Multi-segment frequency 7 -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 0B07H
PB-08 Multi-segment frequency 8 -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 0B08H

74
 Group PB: multi-speed and simple PLC operation parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
PB-09 Multi-segment frequency 9 -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 0B09H
PB-10 Multi-segment frequency 10 -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 0B0AH
PB-11 Multi-segment frequency 11 -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 0B0BH
PB-12 Multi-segment frequency 12 -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 0B0CH
PB-13 Multi-segment frequency 13 -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 0B0DH
PB-14 Multi-segment frequency 14 -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 0B0EH
PB-15 Multi-segment frequency 15 -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○ 0B0FH
0: PB-00 setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
Multi-segment 0 command setting
PB-16 3: AI3 0 ○ 0B10H
mode
4: Pulse
5: PID setting
6: Preset frequency P0-10
Simple PLC segment 0 operation
PB-17 0.0~6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ○ 0B11H
time
PB-18 Simple PLC segment 0 acc/dec time 0~3 0 ○ 0B12H
Simple PLC segment 1 operation
PB-19 0.0~6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ○ 0B13H
time
PB-20 Simple PLC segment 1 acc/dec time 0~3 0 ○ 0B14H
Simple PLC segment 2 operation
PB-21 0.0~6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ○ 0B15H
time
PB-22 Simple PLC segment 2 acc/dec time 0~3 0 ○ 0B16H
Simple PLC segment 3 operation
PB-23 0.0~6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ○ 0B17H
time
PB-24 Simple PLC segment 3 acc/dec time 0~3 0 ○ 0B18H
Simple PLC segment 4 operation
PB-25 0.0~6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ○ 0B19H
time
PB-26 Simple PLC segment 4 acc/dec time 0~3 0 ○ 0B1AH
Simple PLC segment 5 operation
PB-27 0.0~6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ○ 0B1BH
time
PB-28 Simple PLC segment 5 acc/dec time 0~3 0 ○ 0B1CH
Simple PLC segment 6 operation
PB-29 0.0~6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ○ 0B1DH
time
PB-30 Simple PLC segment 6 acc/dec time 0~3 0 ○ 0B1EH
Simple PLC segment 7 operation
PB-31 0.0~6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ○ 0B1FH
time
PB-32 Simple PLC segment 7 acc/dec time 0~3 0 ○ 0B20H
Simple PLC segment 8 operation
PB-33 0.0~6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ○ 0B21H
time
PB-34 Simple PLC segment 8 acc/dec time 0~3 0 ○ 0B22H
PB-35 Simple PLC segment 9 operation 0.0~6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ○ 0B23H

75
 Group PB: multi-speed and simple PLC operation parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
time
PB-36 Simple PLC segment 9 acc/dec time 0~3 0 ○ 0B24H
Simple PLC segment 10 operation
PB-37 0.0~6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ○ 0B25H
time
PB-38 Simple PLC segment 10 acc/dec time 0~3 0 ○ 0B26H
Simple PLC segment 11 operation
PB-39 0.0~6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ○ 0B27H
time
PB-40 Simple PLC segment 11 acc/dec time 0~3 0 ○ 0B28H
Simple PLC segment 12 operation
PB-41 0.0~6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ○ 0B29H
time
PB-42 Simple PLC segment 12 acc/dec time 0~3 0 ○ 0B2AH
Simple PLC segment 13 operation
PB-43 0.0~6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ○ 0B2BH
time
PB-44 Simple PLC segment 13 acc/dec time 0~3 0 ○ 0B2CH
Simple PLC segment 14 operation
PB-45 0.0~6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ○ 0B2DH
time
PB-46 Simple PLC segment 14 acc/dec time 0~3 0 ○ 0B2EH
Simple PLC segment 15 operation
PB-47 0.0~6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ○ 0B2FH
time
PB-48 Simple PLC segment 15 acc/dec time 0~3 0 ○ 0B30H
0:Stop at the end of single
operation
PB-49 Simple PLC operation mode 1: Keep the final value at the end 0 ○ 0B31H
of single operation
2: Cycle all the time
0: second
PB-50 Simple PLC operation time unit 0 ○ 0B32H
1: hour
Ones bit: power-off memory
0: not memory
Simple PLC power-off memory 1: memory
PB-51 00 ○ 0B33H
selection Tens bit: stop memory
0: not memory
1: memory

Group PC: Auxiliary operation parameters

Group PC: auxiliary operation parameters
Default value Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
address
PC-00 Jog frequency 0.00Hz ~ P0-13 2.00Hz ○ 0C00H
PC-01 Jog acceleration time 0.0s~6500.0s 20.0s ○ 0C01H
PC-02 Jog deceleration time 0.0s~6500.0s 20.0s ○ 0C02H
PC-03 acceleration time 2 0.1s~6500.0s Model setting ○ 0C03H
PC-04 deceleration time 2 0.1s~6500.0s Model setting ○ 0C04H

76
 Group PC: auxiliary operation parameters
Default value Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
address
PC-05 acceleration time 3 0.1s~6500.0s Model setting ○ 0C05H
PC-06 deceleration time 3 0.1s~6500.0s Model setting ○ 0C06H
PC-07 acceleration time 4 0.1s~6500.0s Model setting ○ 0C07H
PC-08 deceleration time 4 0.1s~6500.0s Model setting ○ 0C08H
0: 1s
PC-09 The unit of acc/dec time 1: 0.1s 1 × 0C09H
2: 0.01s
0: Max frequency
The base frequency of acc/dec
PC-10 1: Setting frequency 0 × 0C0AH
time
2: 100Hz
Switching frequency point
PC-11 between acceleration time 1 and 0.00Hz~max output frequency 0.00Hz ○ 0C0BH
acceleration time 2
Switching frequency point
PC-12 between deceleration time 1 and 0.00Hz~ max output frequency 0.00Hz ○ 0C0CH
deceleration time 2
PC-13 Jump frequency 1 0.00Hz~ max output frequency 0.00Hz ○ 0C0DH
PC-14 Jump frequency 2 0.00Hz~ max output frequency 0.00Hz ○ 0C0EH
PC-15 Jump frequency range 0.00Hz~ max output frequency 0.00Hz ○ 0C0FH
Whether the jump frequency is
0: invalid
PC-16 effective during acceleration and 0 ○ 0C10H
1: valid (in vector condition)
deceleration
Frequency reaching detection
PC-17 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○ 0C11H
range
Frequency detection value (FDT1
PC-18 0.00Hz~max frequency 50.00Hz ○ 0C12H
voltage level)
Frequency detection hysteresis 0.0%~100.0% (max output
PC-19 5.0% ○ 0C13H
value (FDT1 voltage level) frequency)
Frequency detection value (FDT2
PC-20 0.00Hz~ max output frequency 50.00Hz ○ 0C14H
voltage level)
Frequency detection hysteresis
PC-21 0.0%~100.0% 5.0% ○ 0C15H
value (FDT2 voltage level)
Frequency reached detection
PC-22 0.00Hz~ max output frequency 50.00Hz ○ 0C16H
value 1
Frequency reached detection 1 0.0%~100.0% (max output
PC-23 0.0% ○ 0C17H
range frequency)
Frequency reached detection
PC-24 0.00Hz~ max output frequency 50.00Hz ○ 0C18H
value 2
Frequency reached detection 2 0.0%~100.0% (max output
PC-25 0.0% ○ 0C19H
range frequency)
0: invalid
PC-26 Timing function selection 0 × 0C1AH
1: valid
PC-28 Setting operation time 0.0Min~6500.0Min 0.0Min × 0C1CH

77
 Group PC: auxiliary operation parameters
Default value Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
address
PC-29 Present operation reached time 0.0Min~6500.0Min 0.0Min × 0C1DH
PC-30 Setting power on reached time 0 ~ 65000h 0 × 0C1EH
PC-32 Setting operation reached time 0 ~ 65000h 0 × 0C20H
0.0%~300.0% (motor rated
PC-34 Current reached detection value 1 100.0% ○ 0C22H
current)
Current reached detection 1 0.0%~300.0% (motor rated
PC-35 0.0% ○ 0C23H
range current)
0.0%~300.0% (motor rated
PC-36 Current reached detection value 2 100.0% ○ 0C24H
current)
Current reached detection 2 0.0%~300.0% (motor rated
PC-37 0.0% ○ 0C25H
range current)
0.0%~300.0% (motor rated
PC-38 Zero current detection value 5.0% ○ 0C26H
current)
PC-39 Zero current detection delay time 0.01s~600.00s 0.10s ○ 0C27H
0：0.0% (not detect)
PC-40 Software overcurrent point 1 ： 0.1%~300.0% (motor rated 200.0% ○ 0C28H
current)
Software overcurrent detection
PC-41 0.00s~600.00s 0.00s ○ 0C29H
delay time
PC-42 AI1 input voltage lower limit 0.00V~PC-43 3.10V ○ 0C2AH
PC-43 AI1 input voltage upper limit PC-42~10.50V 6.80V ○ 0C2BH
PC-44 Overvoltage point 200~810V 810V × 0C2CH
PC-45 Undervoltage point 100~537V 350V × 0C2DH
Operation action when the 0: Run at lower limit frequency
PC-46 frequency is lower than lower 1: Stop 0 ○ 0C2EH
limit frequency 2: Run at zero speed
PC-47 Module temperature reached 0℃~100℃ 75 ○ 0C2FH
0: The fan runs during operation
PC-48 Fan control 0 ○ 0C30H
1: The fan is running all the time
PC-49 Droop control 0.00Hz~10.00Hz 0.00Hz ○ 0C31H
0: Invalid
PC-50 Terminal jog run priority 0 ○ 0C32H
1: Valid
1: Optimization mode 1
PC-51 SVC optimization selection 2 ○ 0C33H
2: Optimization mode 2
0: No compensation
PC-52 Dead area compensation mode 1 ○ 0C34H
1: Compensation mode 1
0: Asynchronous Modulation
PC-54 Modulation mode 0 ○ 0C36H
1: Synchronous modulation
DPWM switching upper limit
PC-55 5.00Hz~max output frequency 8.00Hz ○ 0C37H
frequency
0: Random PWM invalid
PC-56 Random PWM depth 1~10: PWM carrier frequency 0 ○ 0C38H
random depth

78
 Group PC: auxiliary operation parameters
Default value Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
address
Dormancy frequency
PC-57 Wake up frequency PC-59~max output frequency 0.00Hz ○ 0C39H
P0-13
PC-58 Wake up delay time 0.0s~6500.0s 0.00Hz ○ 0C3AH
0.00Hz~wake up frequency
PC-59 Dormancy frequency 0.0s ○ 0C3BH
PC-57
PC-60 Dormancy delay time 0.0s~6500.0s 0.0s ○ 0C3CH
Wave by wave current limiting 0: Not enable
PC-61 1 ○ 0C3DH
enable 1: Enable
PC-62 Overmodulation coefficient 100～110 105 ○ 0C3EH
PC-65 Bus voltage reached value Unit is 0.1V 500.0 ○ 0C41H
The bus voltage reached
PC-66 Unit is 0.1V 50.0 ○ 0C42H
hysteresis value
PC-67 Carrier frequency 0.5K~16.0K Model setting ○ 0C43H
The carrier frequency is adjusted 0: Invalid
PC-68 1 ○ 0C44H
with temperature 1: Valid
VFD temperature protection
PC-69 Retain - - 0C45H
alarm threshold
Encoder position count display
0: HEX
PC-70 mode (supported by 3720 and 1 ○ 0C46H
1: DEC
above)
Clear encoder position count 0: No functionality
PC-71 (supported by versions 3720 and 1: Zero reset to 0, valid for a 0 ○ 0C47H
above) single use
0:Don't use external linear speed
1: AI1
External linear speed given
2: AI2
PC-72 source 0 ○ 0C48H
3: AI3
(supported by 3720 and above)
4: Pulse X4
5: Communication
Maximum allowable update
PC-73 deviation of main frequency 0.00%～10.00% 0.10% ○ 0C49H
(supported by 3720 and above)
PC-74 Allowed update interval of main
frequency (supported by 3720 0.00s~200.00s 3.00s ○ 0C4AH
and above)
PC-75 Differential time of external
linear speed change (supported 0.00s~50.00s 1.00s ○ 0C4BH
by 3720 and above)
PC-76 External linear speed change
0.00Hz~50.00Hz 1.00Hz ○ 0C4CH
(supported by 3720 and above)

79
 Group PE: User optional parameters
Group PE: user optional parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
P0.00 ~ PF.xx
A0.00 ~ A2.xx
PE-00 User optional parameters 0 A9.00 ~ Ad.xx U4-00 ○ 0E00H
U0.00 ~ U0.xx
U4.00 ~ U5.xx
PE-01 User optional parameters 1 Same to PE-00 U4-01 ○ 0E01H
PE-02 User optional parameters 2 Same to PE-00 U4-08 ○ 0E02H
PE-03 User optional parameters 3 Same to PE-00 U4-09 ○ 0E03H
PE-04 User optional parameters 4 Same to PE-00 U4-10 ○ 0E04H
PE-05 User optional parameters 5 Same to PE-00 U4-03 ○ 0E05H
PE-06 User optional parameters 6 Same to PE-00 U4-06 ○ 0E06H
PE-07 User optional parameters 7 Same to PE-00 P0-00 ○ 0E07H
PE-08 User optional parameters 8 Same to PE-00 P0-00 ○ 0E08H
PE-09 User optional parameters 9 Same to PE-00 P0-00 ○ 0E09H
PE-10 User optional parameters 10 Same to PE-00 P0-00 ○ 0E0AH
PE-11 User optional parameters 11 Same to PE-00 P0-00 ○ 0E0BH
PE-12 User optional parameters 12 Same to PE-00 P0-00 ○ 0E0CH
PE-13 User optional parameters 13 Same to PE-00 P0-00 ○ 0E0DH
PE-14 User optional parameters 14 Same to PE-00 P0-00 ○ 0E0EH
PE-15 User optional parameters 15 Same to PE-00 P0-00 ○ 0E0FH
PE-16 User optional parameters 16 Same to PE-00 P0-00 ○ 0E10H
PE-17 User optional parameters 17 Same to PE-00 P0-00 ○ 0E11H
PE-18 User optional parameters 18 Same to PE-00 P0-00 ○ 0E12H
PE-19 User optional parameters 19 Same to PE-00 P0-00 ○ 0E13H
PE-20 User optional parameters 20 Same to PE-00 U0-67 ○ 0E14H
PE-21 User optional parameters 21 Same to PE-00 U0-68 ○ 0E15H
PE-22 User optional parameters 22 Same to PE-00 U0-69 ○ 0E16H
PE-23 User optional parameters 23 Same to PE-00 U0-70 ○ 0E17H
PE-24 User optional parameters 24 Same to PE-00 U0-74 ○ 0E18H
PE-25 User optional parameters 25 Same to PE-00 U0-00 ○ 0E19H
PE-26 User optional parameters 26 Same to PE-00 U0-55 ○ 0E1AH
PE-27 User optional parameters 27 Same to PE-00 U0-56 ○ 0E1BH
PE-28 User optional parameters 28 Same to PE-00 P0-00 ○ 0E1CH
PE-29 User optional parameters 29 Same to PE-00 P0-00 ○ 0E1DH
PE-30 User optional parameters 30 Same to PE-00 P0-00 ○ 0E1EH
PE-31 User optional parameters 31 Same to PE-00 P0-00 ○ 0E1FH

80
 Group PF: Torque control(Firmware versions below 3720)
Group PF: Torque control
Default value Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
address
0: Speed control
PF-00 Torque control 0 × 0F00H
1: Torque control
0: Digital setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
Upper limit source of driver 4: PULSE
PF-01 0 × 0F01H
torque 5: Communication setting
6: min(AI1, AI2)
7: max(AI1, AI2)
(the full scale of option 1~7 correspond
to PF-02 digital setting)
PF-02 Driver torque upper limit -200.0%~200.0% 150.0% ○ 0F02H
Torque control forward
PF-03 0.00Hz~max output frequency 50.00Hz ○ 0F03H
direction max frequency
Torque control reverse
PF-04 0.00Hz~ max output frequency 50.00Hz ○ 0F04H
direction max frequency
PF-05 Torque acceleration time 0.00s~650.00s 0.00s ○ 0F05H
PF-06 Torque deceleration time 0.00s~650.00s 0.00s ○ 0F06H

Group PF: Torque control(Firmware versions 3720 and above)

Group PF: torque control
Default value Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
address
0: Speed control
PF-00 Torque control 0 × 0F00H
1: Torque control
0: Digital setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
Upper limit source of 4: PULSE
PF-01 0 × 0F01H
driver torque
5: Communication setting
6: min(AI1, AI2)
7: max(AI1, AI2)
(The full scale of option 1~7 correspond
to PF-02 digital setting)
PF-02 Driver torque upper limit -200.0%~200.0% 150.0% ○ 0F02H
0: Digital setting
1: AI1
Torque control forward 2: AI2
PF-03 maximum frequency 3: AI3 0 ○ 0F03H
source 4: PULSE
5: Communication setting
6: min(AI1, AI2)

81
 Group PF: torque control
Default value Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
address
7: max(AI1, AI2)
(The full scale of option 0~7 correspond
to P0-13 digital setting)
Torque control forward
PF-04 0.00Hz~max output frequency 50.00Hz ○ 0F04H
maximum frequency
0: Digital setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
Torque control reverse 4: PULSE
PF-05 maximum frequency 5: Communication setting 0 ○ 0F05H
source 6: min(AI1, AI2)
7: max(AI1, AI2)
(The full scale of option 0~7 correspond
to P0-13 digital setting)
Torque control reverse
PF-06 0.00Hz~max output frequency 50.00Hz ○ 0F06H
maximum frequency
PF-07 Torque acceleration time 0.00s～650.00s 0.00s ○ 0F07H
PF-08 Torque deceleration time 0.00s～650.00s 0.00s ○ 0F08H

Group A0: Textile

Group A0: textile
Default value Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
address
A0-00 Setting length 0m~65535m 1000m ○ A000H
A0-01 Actual length 0m~65535m 0m ○ A001H
A0-02 Pulse number per meter 0.1~6553.5 100.0 ○ A002H
A0-03 Setting count value 1~65535 1000 ○ A003H
A0-04 Specified count value 1~65535 1000 ○ A004H
0: Relative to center frequency
Swing frequency setting
A0-05 1: Relative to the maximum 0 ○ A005H
mode
frequency
A0-06 Swing frequency range 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○ A006H
A0-07 Jump frequency amplitude 0.0%~50.0% 0.0% ○ A007H
A0-08 Swing frequency period 0.1s~3600.0s 10.0s ○ A008H
Triangular wave rise time of
A0-09 0.1%~100.0% 50.0% ○ A009H
swing frequency

Group A1: Virtual IO

Group A1: Virtual IO
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
Function selection of virtual
A1-00 00 × A100H
X1 terminal
Function selection of virtual 0~52: See group P2 physical X input selection
A1-01 00 × A101H
X2 terminal
A1-02 Function selection of virtual 00 × A102H

82
 Group A1: Virtual IO
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
X3 terminal
Function selection of virtual
A1-03 00 × A103H
X4 terminal
Function selection of virtual
A1-04 00 × A104H
X5 terminal
Ones bit: virtual X1
0: The state of virtual Y1 determines whether
virtual X1 is valid
1: Function code A1-06 sets whether virtual
Virtual X terminal effective
A1-05 X1 is valid 00000 × A105H
state source
Tens bit: virtual X2
Hundreds bit: virtual X3
Thousands bit: virtual X4
Ten thousands bit: virtual X5
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Tens bit: virtual X1
Virtual X terminal status
A1-06 Tens bit: virtual X2 00000 × A106H
setting
Hundreds bit: virtual X3
Thousands bit: virtual X4
Ten thousands bit: virtual X5
Function selection of AI1
A1-07 0~52 00 × A107H
terminal as X terminal
Function selection of AI2
A1-08 0~52 00 × A108H
terminal as X terminal
Ones bit: AI1
Selection of effective mode
0: Low level valid A10A
A1-10 when AI is used as X 000 ×
1: High level valid H
terminal
Tens bit: AI2
0: connect with physical X1 inside
Virtual Y1 output function
A1-11 1~42: See group P3 physical Y output 00 A10BH
selection
selection
0: connect with physical X2 inside
Virtual Y2 output function
A1-12 1~42: See group P3 physical Y output 00 ○ A10CH
selection
selection
0: connect with physical X3 inside
Virtual Y3 output function A10D
A1-13 1~42: See group P3 physical Y output 00 ○
selection H
selection
0: connect with physical X4 inside
Virtual Y4 output function
A1-14 1~42:See group P3 physical Y output 00 ○ A10EH
selection
selection
Virtual Y5 output function 0: connect with physical X5 inside
A1-15 00 ○ A10FH
selection 1~42:See group P3 physical Y output

83
 Group A1: Virtual IO
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
selection
A1-16 Virtual Y1 output delay time 0.0s ~ 3600.0s 0.0s ○ A110H
A1-17 Virtual Y2 output delay time 0.0s ~ 3600.0s 0.0s ○ A111H
A1-18 Virtual Y3 output delay time 0.0s ~ 3600.0s 0.0s ○ A112H
A1-19 Virtual Y4 output delay time 0.0s ~ 3600.0s 0.0s ○ A113H
A1-20 Virtual Y5 output delay time 0.0s ~ 3600.0s 0.0s ○ A114H
Ones bit: virtual Y1
0: Positive logic
1: Negative logic
Virtual Y terminal effective
A1-21 Tens bit: virtual Y2 00000 ○ A115H
state selection
Hundreds bit: virtual Y3
Thousands bit: virtual Y4
Ten thousands bit: virtual Y5

Group A2: Second motor parameters

Group A2: Second motor parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
0: Common asynchronous motor
A2-00 Motor type selection 0 × A200H
1: Synchronous motor
Model
A2-01 Motor rated power 0.1KW~650.0KW × A201H
setting
Model
A2-02 Motor rated voltage 1V~1200V × A202H
setting
0.01A~655.35A (VFD power ≤55kW) Model
A2-03 Motor rated current × A203H
0.1A~6553.5A (VFD power >55kW) setting
Model
A2-04 Motor rated frequency 0.01Hz~max output frequency × A204H
setting
Model
A2-05 Motor rated speed 1rpm~65535rpm × A205H
setting
Asynchronous motor stator 0.001Ω~65.535Ω (VFD power ≤55kW) Tuning
A2-06 × A206H
resistance 0.0001Ω~6.5535Ω (VFD power >55kW) parameters
Asynchronous motor rotor 0.001Ω~65.535Ω (VFD power ≤55kW) Tuning
A2-07 × A207H
resistance 0.0001Ω~6.5535Ω (VFD power >55kW) parameters
Leakage inductance of 0.01mH~655.35mH (VFD power ≤55kW) Tuning
A2-08 × A208H
asynchronous motor 0.001mH~65.535mH (VFD power >55kW) parameters
asynchronous motor mutual 0.01mH~655.35mH (VFD power ≤55kW) Tuning
A2-09 × A209H
inductance 0.001mH~65.535mH (VFD power >55kW) parameters
asynchronous motor current 0.01A~A2-03 (VFD power ≤55kW) Tuning
A2-10 × A20AH
without load 0.1A~A2-03 (VFD power >55kW) parameters
Synchronous motor rotor 0.001Ω~65.535Ω (VFD power ≤55kW) Tuning
A2-15 × A20FH
resistance 0.0001Ω~6.5535Ω (VFD power >55kW) parameters
A2-16 Synchronous motor D-axis 0.01mH~655.35mH (VFD power ≤55kW) Tuning × A210H

84
 Group A2: Second motor parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
inductance 0.001mH~65.535mH (VFD power >55kW) parameters
Synchronous motor Q-axis 0.01mH~655.35mH (VFD power ≤55kW) Tuning
A2-17 × A211H
inductance 0.001mH~65.535mH (VFD power >55kW) parameters
Synchronous motor back Tuning
A2-19 0~6000.0 × A213H
EMF coefficient parameters
0: ABZ incremental encoder
A2-25 Encoder type 0 × A219H
1: Resolver encoder
A2-26 Encoder pulse per rotate 1~65535 1024 × A21AH
A2-27 Encoder mounting angle 0.0~359.9° 0.0 × A21BH
Encoder phase order/main
0: Forward direction
A2-28 direction. only ABZ 0 × A21CH
1: Reverse direction
incremental encoder
A2-32 Polar logarithm of rotation 1~65535 1 × A220H
Speed feedback PG 0.0~10.0 (0.0: Speed feedback
A2-33 0.0 × A221H
disconnection detection time disconnection detection ineffective)
Ones bit:
0: No operation
1: Static self learning 1(part of parameters)
2: Motor rotation self-learning
Motor 2 parameter
A2-35 3: Static self learning 2 (part of parameters) 0 × A223H
self-learning
Tens bit:(supported by 3720 and above
version)
0: Asynchronous motor
1: Synchronous motor
0: VF control
A2-36 Motor 2 control mode 1: no speed sensor vector control (SVC) 0 × A224H
2: with speed sensor vector control (FVC)
0: Same to first motor
1: Acceleration and deceleration time 1
Motor 2 acc/dec time
A2-37 2: Acceleration and deceleration time 2 0 ○ A225H
selection
3: Acceleration and deceleration time 3
4: Acceleration and deceleration time 4
0.0%: Automatic torque boost Model
A2-38 Motor 2 torque boost ○ A226H
0.1%~30.0% setting
Motor 2 oscillation Model
A2-40 0~100 ○ A228H
suppression gain setting
A2-41 Speed loop proportion gain 1 1~100 30 ○ A229H
A2-42 Speed loop integral time 1 0.01s~10.00s 0.50 ○ A22AH
A2-43 Speed loop proportion gain 2 1~100 20 ○ A22BH
A2-44 Speed loop integral time 2 0.01s~10.00s 1.00 ○ A22CH
A2-45 Switching frequency 1 0.00~A2-46 5.00 ○ A22DH
A2-46 Switching frequency 2 P6-05~max output frequency (P0-13) 10.00 ○ A22EH
A2-47 Speed loop integral property Ones bit: integral separation 0 ○ A22FH

85
 Group A2: Second motor parameters
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
0: invalid
1: valid
A2-48 Vector control slip gain 50%~200% 100% ○ A230H
SVC speed feedback filter
A2-49 0.000s～0.100s 0.015 ○ A231H
time
0: Parameter setting (A2-52)
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
Torque upper limit source 4: PULSE setting
A2-51 0 ○ A233H
under speed control mode 5: Communication setting
6: min(AI1,AI2)
7: max(AI1,AI2)
Full range of options 1-7, corresponding to
A2-53 digital settings
Digital setting of torque
A2-52 upper limit in speed control 0.0%~200.0% 150.0% ○ A234H
mode
Proportional gain of
A2-55 0 ~ 60000 2000 ○ A237H
excitation regulation
Integral gain of excitation
A2-56 0 ~ 60000 1300 ○ A238H
regulation
Torque regulation
A2-57 0 ~ 60000 2000 ○ A239H
proportional gain
Integral gain of torque
A2-58 0 ~ 60000 1300 ○ A23AH
regulation

Group A4: Password countdown lock (supported by 3720 and above versions)
Group A4: Password countdown lock
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
A4-00 Parameter group access verification 0～65000 0 ○ -
A4-01 Parameter group lock password 0～65000 0 ○ -
A4-02 Total power on time before locking 0～7200 0h ○ -
A4-03 Remaining time of power on locking 0～7200 0h ○ -

Group A9: Communication address mapping (supported by 3720 and above versions)
Group A9: Communication address mapping
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
0: Communication mapping
function doesn't take effect
A9-00 Communication address mapping selection 0 ○ A900H
1: Communication mapping
function takes effect

86
 Group A9: Communication address mapping
Default Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
value address
A9-01 Communication address mapping primitive 1 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A901H
A9-02 Communication address mapping primitive 2 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A902H
A9-03 Communication address mapping primitive 3 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A903H
A9-04 Communication address mapping primitive 4 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A904H
A9-05 Communication address mapping primitive 5 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A905H
A9-06 Communication address mapping primitive 6 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A906H
A9-07 Communication address mapping primitive 7 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A907H
A9-08 Communication address mapping primitive 8 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A908H
A9-09 Communication address mapping primitive 9 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A909H
A9-10 Communication address mapping primitive 10 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A90AH
A9-11 Communication address mapping primitive 11 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A90BH
A9-12 Communication address mapping primitive 12 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A90CH
A9-13 Communication address mapping primitive 13 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A90DH
A9-14 Communication address mapping primitive 14 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A90EH
A9-15 Communication address mapping image 1 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A90FH
A9-16 Communication address mapping image 2 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A910H
A9-17 Communication address mapping image 3 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A911H
A9-18 Communication address mapping image 4 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A912H
A9-19 Communication address mapping image 5 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A913H
A9-20 Communication address mapping image 6 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A914H
A9-21 Communication address mapping image 7 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A915H
A9-22 Communication address mapping image 8 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A916H
A9-23 Communication address mapping image 9 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A917H
A9-24 Communication address mapping image 10 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A918H
A9-25 Communication address mapping image 11 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A919H
A9-26 Communication address mapping image 12 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A91AH
A9-27 Communication address mapping image 13 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A91BH
A9-28 Communication address mapping image 14 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○ A91CH

Group AD: AIAO correction

Group AD: AIAO correction
Default value Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
address
Factory
AD-00 AI1 measured voltage 1 0.500V~4.000V ○ AD00H
calibration
Factory
AD-01 AI1 display voltage 1 0.500V~4.000V ○ AD01H
calibration
Factory
AD-02 AI1 measured voltage 2 6.000V~9.999V ○ AD02H
calibration
Factory
AD-03 AI1 display voltage 2 6.000V~9.999V ○ AD03H
calibration
Factory
AD-04 AI2 measured voltage 1 0.500V~4.000V ○ AD04H
calibration

87
 Group AD: AIAO correction
Default value Modbus
Parameter Name Setting range Modify
address
Factory
AD-05 AI2 display voltage 1 0.500V~4.000V ○ AD05H
calibration
Factory
AD-06 AI2 measured voltage 2 6.000V~9.999V ○ AD06H
calibration
Factory
AD-07 AI2 display voltage 2 6.000V~9.999V ○ AD07H
calibration
AI3 measured voltage 1 (only AI3 Factory
AD-08 -9.999V~9.999V ○ AD08H
support negative voltage) calibration
AI3 display voltage 1 (only AI3 support Factory
AD-09 -9.999V~9.999V ○ AD09H
negative voltage) calibration
AI3 measured voltage 2 (only AI3 Factory
AD-10 -9.999V~9.999V ○ AD0AH
support negative voltage) calibration
AI3 display voltage 2 (only AI3 support Factory
AD-11 -9.999V~9.999V ○ AD0BH
negative voltage) calibration
Factory
AD-12 AO1 target voltage 1 0.500V~4.000V ○ AD0CH
calibration
Factory
AD-13 AO1 measured voltage 1 0.500V~4.000V ○ AD0DH
calibration
Factory
AD-14 AO1 target voltage 2 6.000V~9.999V ○ AD0EH
calibration
Factory
AD-15 AO1 measured voltage 2 6.000V~9.999V ○ AD0FH
calibration
Factory
AD-16 AO2 target voltage 1 0.500V~4.000V ○ AD10H
calibration
Factory
AD-17 AO2 measured voltage 1 0.500V~4.000V ○ AD11H
calibration
Factory
AD-18 AO2 target voltage 2 6.000V~9.999V ○ AD12H
calibration
Factory
AD-19 AO2 measured voltage 2 6.000V~9.999V ○ AD13H
calibration

Group U0: Monitor parameters

Group U0: monitor parameters
Parameter Name Min unit Modbus address Display range
U0-00 Operation frequency (Hz) 0.01Hz 7000H 0.00~600.00Hz
U0-01 Setting frequency (Hz) 0.01Hz 7001H 0.00~600.00Hz
U0-02 Bus voltage (V) 0.1V 7002H 0.0~1024.0
U0-03 Output current (A) 0.01A 7003H 0.0~655.35A
U0-04 Output voltage (V) 1V 7004H 0V~1140V
Output torque (%) Percentage
U0-05 output value of motor rated 0.1% 7005H -200.0%~200.0%
torque
U0-06 Output power (kW) 0.1kW 7006H 0~32767

88
 Group U0: monitor parameters
Parameter Name Min unit Modbus address Display range
U0-07 X input state 1 7007H 0x0000~0x7FFF
U0-08 Y output state 1 7008H 0x0000~0x03FF
0.00V～10.57V/
U0-09 AI1 voltage (V)/current(mA) 0.01V/0.01mA 7009H
0.00mA～20.00mA
0.00V～10.57V/
U0-10 AI2 voltage (V)/current (mA) 0.01V/0.01mA 700AH
0.00mA～20.00mA
0.00V～10.57V/
U0-11 AI3 voltage (V)/current(mA) 0.01V/0.01mA 700BH
0.00mA～20.00mA
U0-12 PULSE input frequency 0.01KHz 700CH 0.00kHz ～ 50.00KHz
U0-13 PULSE input frequency (Hz) 1 Hz 700DH 0 ～ 65535Hz
U0-14 PID setting 1 700EH 0 ～ 65535
U0-15 PID feedback 1 700FH 0 ～ 65535
U0-16 Load speed display Depend on P8-22 7010H 0~65535
U0-17 Feedback speed (Hz) Depend on P8-22 7011H -600.00Hz~600.00Hz
Actual encoder feedback speed
U0-18 Depend on P8-22 7012H -600.00Hz~600.00Hz
(Hz)
U0-19 Line speed 1m/Min 7013H 0~65535
U0-20 PLC stage 1 7014H 0~15
U0-21 Count value 1 7015H 0~65535
U0-22 Length value 1 7016H 0~65535
0.01~maximum output
U0-23 Main frequency A display 0.01Hz 7017H
frequency
0.01~maximum output
U0-24 Auxiliary frequency B display 0.01Hz 7018H
frequency
U0-25 Communication setting 0.01% 7019H -100.00%~100.00%
AI1 voltage/current before 0.000V~10.570V/
U0-26 0.001V/0.001mA 701AH
calibration 0.000mA~20.000mA
AI2 voltage/current before 0.000V~10.570V/
U0-27 0.001V/0.001mA 701BH
calibration 0.000mA~20.000mA
AI3 voltage/current before 0.000V~10.570V/
U0-28 0.001V/0.001mA 701CH
calibration 0.000mA~20.000mA
U0-29 Remaining running time 0.1Min 701DH 0.0~6500.0min
U0-30 Present power on time 1Min 701EH 0~65000min
U0-31 Present operation time 0.1Min 701FH 0.0~6500.0min
U0-33 Present fault 1 7021H 1~56
U0-34 Fault information 1 7022H -
U0-35 Target torque (%) 0.1% 7023H -200.0%~200.0%
U0-36 Torque upper limit 0.01% 7024H -200.00%~200.00%
Synchronous motor rotor
U0-37 1 7025H 0.1~360.0°
position
U0-38 Rotation position 1 7026H 0~4095
U0-39 ABZ position 1 7027H 0~65535
U0-40 Motor temperature 1°C 7028H -

89
 Group U0: monitor parameters
Parameter Name Min unit Modbus address Display range
U0-41 Power factor angle 0.1° 7029H -
U0-42 Setting frequency (%) 0.01% 702AH -100.00%~100.00%
U0-43 Operation frequency (%) 0.01% 702BH -100.00%~100.00%
U0-44 VF separate target voltage 1V 702CH 0V ~motor rated voltage
U0-45 VF separate output voltage 1V 702DH 0V~motor rated voltage
U0-46 Z signal counter 1 702EH 0~65535
0: motor 1
U0-47 Motor serial number 702FH -
1: motor 2
Check any memory address
U0-48 1 7030H -
value
Encoder feedback value 1
U0-53 0 7035H 0x0000~0xFFFF
(supported by 3720 and above )
Encoder feedback value
U0-54 2(supported by 3720 and 0 7036H 0x0000~0xFFFF
above )
Encoder feedback value
U0-55 3(supported by 3720 and 0 7037H 0x0000~0xFFFF
above )
Encoder feedback value
U0-56 4(supported by 3720 and 0 7038H 0x0000~0xFFFF
above )
Cumulative operation time of
U0-65 frequency converter (supported 1s 7041H 0~3600S
by 3720 and above versions)
Motor speed (supported by
U0-66 1RPM 7042H 0~ rated speed
3720 and above versions)
Communication extension card
U0-67 - 7043H -
type
Communication extension
U0-68 - 7044H -
version
Parameter
Display unit
description
Bit0 running state
Running
Bit1
direction
Bit2 Fault/No fault
Communication expansion card 7045H 0x0000~0xFFFF
U0-69 Frequency
VFD state
reaches the set
frequency
Bit3
(supported by
3720 and
above versions)
Bit8~Bit15 Alarm

90
 Group U0: monitor parameters
Parameter Name Min unit Modbus address Display range
code(supported
by 3720 and
above versions)
Communication feedback motor
U0-70 0.1Hz 7046H -
speed 1
Communication feedback motor
U0-71 1RPM 7047H 0~rated speed
speed 2
Special current display for
U0-72 - 7048H -
communication card
Communication card error
U0-73 - 7049H -
status
U0-74 Motor actual output torque 0.01% 704AH -200.00% ~ 200.00%
U0-75 Fault code - 704BH 1~56
Parameter
Display unit
description
0: shutdown
Bit0
1: in operation
Normal
operation
Bit1
(Non jogging,
tuning)
Bit2 Jog operation
Tuning
Bit3
operation
Jog during
Bit4
operation
0: Constant
speed
U0-76 Operation status word Bit5~Bit6 704CH
1: Acceleration 0x0000~0xFFFF
2: Slow down
Bit7 PLC operation
Bit8 PID operation
Bit9 Torque control
Set frequency
Bit10
direction
Current
frequency
Bit11
operation
direction
Running
reverse flag
Bit12
0:Forward
1:Reverse

91
 Group U0: monitor parameters
Parameter Name Min unit Modbus address Display range
Final frequency
setting
direction
0: Positive
Bit13
direction
1: In the
opposite
direction

Group U4: Communication monitoring parameters(supported by 3720 versions and above)

Group U4:Communication monitoring parameters
Parameters Name Min unit
Speed command(Communication frequency
U4-00 Unit: 0.01%
setting value)
Display unit Parameter description
1: Forward running
2: Reverse operation
3: Forward jog
U4-01 Communication control command word BIT0~BIT7 4: Reverse jog
5: Deceleration stop
6: Free stop
7: Fault reset
Fault code sent by expansion card
BIT8~BIT15
fault
U4-02 Communication control DO -
U4-03 Communication control FMP -
U4-04 Communication control AO1 -
U4-05 Communication control AO2 -
U4-06 Torque command (Communication torque Unit: 0.01%
setting value)
Speed command (Communication
U4-07 Unit: 1RPM
frequency setting value)
U4-08 Communication expansion card model -
U4-09 Communication expansion card version -
U4-10 Expansion card error status

92
4-2. Parameter explanation
4-2-1. Group P0 Basic operation parameter
Parameter Name Setting range
0 VF control
No speed sensor vector control
1
P0-01 First motor control mode selection (SVC)
With speed sensor vector control
2
(FVC)
0: VF control
VF control is suitable for low-speed occasions where the control accuracy is not high, and can also be used for
occasions where one inverter drives multiple motors. It is recommended to set P1-00 ~ P1-05 in VF control.
1: No speed sensor vector control (SVC)
It refers to the open-loop vector control, which can be applied to high-performance general occasions without
pulse encoder, occasions requiring low-frequency large torque and high speed control accuracy, such as
machine tools, centrifuges, wire drawing machines, injection molding machines, etc.
2: With speed sensor vector control (FVC)
It refers to closed-loop vector control. The motor end must be equipped with encoder, and the frequency
converter must be equipped with PG card of the same type as the encoder. Suitable for high precision speed
control or torque control occasions, such as high-speed paper machinery, lifting machinery, elevators and other
loads.
For vector control of frequency converter, only one motor can be driven by one frequency converter, so accurate
parameters of controlled motor must be obtained for self tuning. See P1-35 for specific tuning method.

Parameter Name Range

0 Operate panel
Operation command channel
P0-02 1 Terminal operation
selection
2 Communication
0: Operate panel
Controlled by the key on the operate panel.
1: Terminal
Controlled by multi-function terminals.
2: Communication
Controlled by upper PC via communication.

Parameter Name Setting Choose setting channel

0 Digital setting (Power-off no memory)
1 Digital setting (Power-off memory)
2 AI1
3 AI2
4 AI3
Main frequency source A channel 5 X4 terminal pulse setting
P0-03
selection 6 Communication setting
7 Multi-segment command setting
8 PID setting
9 Simple PLC operation
10 Specific mode for wire drawing and

93
 winding
11 LED panel knob with knob given
0: Digital setting (Power-off no memory)
Set frequency in P0-10, and adjust by keyboard increase and decrease key (or up/down terminal), after power
off and power on, the frequency will return to the value of P0-10.
1: Digital setting (Power-off memory)
After setting the frequency in P0-10, press increase, decrease key through the keyboard, or after up/down
adjustment, the frequency of the inverter will return to the adjusted value after power down. This parameter
setting is only used for power down, not for shutdown. The shutdown frequency memory setting can be
modified in parameter P0-12.
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: AI3
Support 0V~10V voltage input. Pay attention to the dialing switch position when using. The input voltage value
of AI1, AI2, AI3 and the corresponding curve of target frequency can be freely selected by users. When AI is
used as frequency setting, voltage/current input corresponding to 100.0% of setting refers to the percentage
relative to the max output frequency P0-13.
5: Terminal pulse X4 setting
High-speed pulse input through X4, support 0 ~ 50KHz, 9V ~ 30V pulse specifications. The pulse frequency
and output frequency are corresponded by P2 group pulse parameters.
6: Communication setting
Set to Modbus-RTU communication, modify frequency through RS485 communication, address H1000. Write
5000 to the address, which means 50.00% of the maximum frequency. If the maximum frequency is 50 Hz, then
the frequency is 25 Hz. Communication parameters can be set in group P9. See Modbus address Appendix
B-3-3. Communication protocol parameter address and 4-1. Function code list.
7: Multi-segment command setting
The non-zero combination of input terminals correspond to different frequencies and acceleration and
deceleration time, up to 16 frequency segments can be set.
8: PID setting
Generally used in the field of closed-loop control, such as constant pressure closed-loop control, constant
tension closed-loop control and other occasions. Closed loop control parameters can be set in group PA. VH6
has two groups of PID parameters to switch.
9: Simple PLC operation
When the frequency source is simple PLC, the frequency converter operates according to the specified
frequency, specified time and specified acceleration and deceleration time. The specific parameters can be set
through group PB, and can run for up to 16 sections.
10:Specific mode for wire drawing and winding
PC-72~PC-76 and group PA parameters shall be set for relevant parameters. This feature is only supported in
software versions 3720 and later.
11:LED panel knob with knob given (Supported by versions 3730 and above)
The given frequency can be adjusted through the panel knob without the need for an external potentiometer to

94
adjust the frequency.

Parameter Name Range

Auxiliary frequency source B
P0-04 0~11
channel selection
Ones bit: frequency source selection
0: main frequency source A
1: Operation results of main and auxiliary
frequency sources (determined by tens bits)
2: Switching between main frequency A and
Frequency source superposition auxiliary frequency B
P0-05
selection Tens bit: Operation relationship of main and
auxiliary frequency sources
0: A+B
1: A-B
2: max(A,B)
3: min(A,B)
The using method of auxiliary frequency channel is similar to the main frequency input channel P0-03.
Note: When the frequency source superposition is selected (P0-05 ones bit is 1), that is, when the VFD
frequency is set by superposition of main and auxiliary frequency:
(1) The auxiliary frequency input channel is digital setting (P0-04 = 0 or 1), and the preset frequency (P0-10)
doesn't work any more. The frequency adjustment made by the user through keyboard keys (or up and
down of X terminal) is directly based on the main frequency.
(2) The auxiliary frequency input channel is analog or pulse setting (P0-04 = 2, 3, 4 or 5). 100% of the input
setting corresponds to the range of auxiliary frequency source B, which is set through P0-06 and P0-07.
(3) The main and auxiliary frequency sources cannot be set to the same channel, otherwise it is easy to cause
confusion.

Parameter Name Range

Auxiliary frequency source B range 0: Relative to the maximum frequency
P0-06
selection 1: Relative to the main frequency source A
P0-07 Auxiliary frequency source B range 0%~150%
When the frequency source is selected as "frequency superposition" (P0-05 ones bit is 1), these two parameters
are used to determine the adjustment range of the auxiliary frequency source.
P0-06 is used to determine the object corresponding to the range of the auxiliary frequency source. It can be
selected as relative to the maximum frequency or relative to the main frequency source A. If it is selected as
relative to the main frequency source, the range of the auxiliary frequency source will change with the change
of the main frequency source A.

Parameter Name Range

Digital setting of auxiliary frequency
P0-09 0.00Hz~max output frequency (P0-13)
source offset when superposition
This parameter is only valid when the frequency source is selected as the main and auxiliary operation (P0-05
ones bit is 1).
When the frequency source is used as the main and auxiliary operation, P0-09 is used as the bias frequency, and
the superposition of the main and auxiliary operation results is used as the final frequency setting value, which
makes the frequency setting more flexible

95
 Parameter Name Range
P0-10 Preset frequency 0.00Hz~max output frequency (P0-13)
When the frequency input channel is set to digital setting, the parameter value is the initial value of frequency
digital setting.

Parameter Name Range

1 One decimal point
P0-11 Frequency instruction decimal point
2 Two decimal places
Range 1-2, default parameter selection 2: two decimal places, modified to 1: one decimal place. (Supported by
versions 3740 and above)

Parameter Name Range

Frequency shutdown memory selection 0 No memory
P0-12
for digital setting 1 Memory
Memory and no memory refers to the frequency adjustment by keyboard and key (or up and down of X
terminal) during operation, and whether the changed frequency is memorized during shutdown. When no
memory is selected, the frequency will return to the set value of P0-10 (preset frequency) after shutdown. When
P0-12=1. PB-16 chooses 6. After changing the frequency with the up and down keys on the panel. The modified
frequency will result in power loss memory.

Note: When memory is selected, it is only applicable to normal shutdown. If power is cut off suddenly during
operation, the frequency will not be memorized after power is turned on again.

Parameter Name Range

P0-13 Max output frequency 50.00Hz~600.00Hz
Used to set the maximum output frequency of frequency converter.

Parameter Name Range

0 Set by P0-15
1 AI1
2 AI2
P0-14 Upper limit frequency source
3 AI3
4 PULSE setting
5 Communication setting
The default upper limit frequency is set by P0-15. It can also be set by analog quantity (AI1, AI2, AI3), pulse
and communication. When the operating frequency reaches the upper limit frequency, the upper limit frequency
will be maintained. Set the upper limit through analog quantity and pulse, please refer to P2-01~P2-70.

Parameter Name Range

Lower limit frequency P0-17~ max output
P0-15 Upper limit frequency
frequency P0-13
Set the upper limit frequency, the setting range is from lower limit frequency P0-17 to max output frequency
P0-13.

Parameter Name Range

P0-16 Upper limit frequency offset 0.00Hz~max output frequency (P0-13)
When the upper limit frequency source P0-14 is set to analog or pulse setting, P0-16 is used as the offset of the
set value, the offset frequency is added with the upper limit frequency value set by P0-14 to get the set value of
the final upper limit frequency.

96
For example: the operation frequency is given as P0-10 = 30, P0-14 = 4 (pulse setting), P0-16 = 10. At this time,
if the pulse frequency is not given, the inverter can only run to 10Hz. If the pulse frequency is given to 25Hz,
the upper limit frequency is P0-16 + P0-14 (pulse) = 10 + 25 = 35Hz, it can run to the preset frequency 35Hz.

Parameter Name Range

P0-17 Lower limit frequency 0.00Hz~upper limit frequency (P0-15)
Set the lower limit frequency. The range is from 0.00Hz to upper limit frequency (P0-15).

Parameter Name Range

0 ~ 65000s (PC-09=0)
P0-18 Acceleration time 1 0.0 ~ 6500.0s (PC-09=1)
0.00 ~ 650.00s (PC-09=2)
0 ~ 65000s (PC-09=0)
P0-19 Deceleration time 1 0.0 ~ 6500.0s (PC-09=1)
0.00 ~ 650.00s (PC-09=2)
Acceleration time refers to the time required for the frequency converter to accelerate from 0Hz to the
acceleration/deceleration base frequency (PC-10). Similarly, deceleration time refers to the time required for the
frequency converter to decelerate from the acceleration/deceleration base frequency to 0Hz. As shown in the
figure, T1 and T3 are the actual acceleration and deceleration time, T2 and T4 are the set acceleration and
deceleration time. The other three kinds of acceleration and deceleration time (PC-03 ~ PC-08) are the same.

Parameter Name Range

0 Default operation direction
Ones place: Operation direction Runs in the opposite direction from
1
the default
P0-20 0 Invalid
Tens place: Reverse inhibit
(supported by 3720 and above One click prohibition of all operations
versions) 1 in the opposite direction (supported by
3720 and above versions )
By changing the function code, the motor direction can be changed without changing the motor wiring, which is
equivalent to changing the phase sequence of any two phases in the motor (U, V, W) to realize the conversion of
motor rotation direction. The one click anti reversal function is only supported in versions 3720 and above.

Note: After parameter initialization, the motor running direction will return to the original state. It is strictly
forbidden to change the direction of the motor when the system is debugged.

97
 Parameter Name Range
Reverse frequency Prohibition 0 Invalid
P0-21 (Supported by 3720 and above
versions) 1 Valid
When the motor is not allowed to run in the reverse direction, the parameter should be set to 1.
If P0-21=0 (negative frequency prohibition is invalid), the operation frequency of the communication given
frequency converter is negative or the external given reverse operation command, and the frequency converter
operates in reverse.
If P0-21=1 (negative frequency prohibition is effective), the operation frequency of the communication given
frequency converter is negative or the external given reverse operation command, and the frequency converter
operates at 0Hz.
The function of input terminal 49 "reverse frequency static" is the same as that of P0-21.
For applications where motor reverse rotation is not allowed, please don’t use parameter P0-21 to change the
steering, because the parameter setting will be reset after restoring factory settings.

Parameter Name Range

Dead time of forward and reverse
P0-22 0.0s~3600.0s
rotation
The transition time at the output 0Hz during the process of forward and reverse rotation is shown as t1 in the
figure.

Parameter Name Range

frequency command UP/DOWN 0 Operation frequency
P0-23
base when operation 1 Setting frequency
This parameter is only valid when the frequency source is digital setting.
This parameter is used to confirm the mode to modify the setting frequency when keyboard ▲, ▼ or terminal
UP/DOWN acted, which means the target frequency is increased or decreased based on the operating frequency
or the set frequency.
The difference between the two settings is obvious when the frequency converter is in the process of
acceleration and deceleration, that is, if the operating frequency of the frequency converter is different from the
set frequency, the different selection of this parameter is very different.

Parameter Name Range

0 Motor parameter group 1
P0-25 Motor parameter group selection
1 Motor parameter group 2
VH6 series inverter can save two groups of motor parameters, and select the current working motor parameter
group through P0-25. Two motors can set their own name plate parameters, and need to complete their own

98
parameter tuning before operation. The parameters of motor parameter group 1 are P1 parameters, and the
parameters of motor parameter group 2 are A2 parameters.

4-2-2. Group P1 First motor parameters

Parameter Name Range
0: Common asynchronous motor
P1-00 Motor type selection
1: Synchronous motor
P1-01 Motor rated power 0.1kW~650.0kW
P1-02 Motor rated voltage 1V~1200V
0.01A~655.35A (VFD power ≤55kW）
P1-03 Motor rated current
0.1A~6553.5A (VFD power >55kW）
P1-04 Motor rated frequency 0.01Hz~max output frequency
P1-05 Motor rated speed 1rpm~65535rpm
P1-00 ~ P1-05 are the parameters on the motor nameplate. It is recommended to input these parameters
manually after getting the new product.

Parameter Name Range

0.001Ω~65.535Ω (VFD power≤55kW)
P1-06 Asynchronous motor stator resistance
0.0001Ω~6.5535Ω (VFD power>55kW)
0.001Ω~65.535Ω (VFD power≤55kW)
P1-07 Asynchronous motor rotor resistance
0.0001Ω~6.5535Ω (VFD power>55kW)
Leakage inductance of asynchronous 0.01mH~655.35mH (VFD power≤55kW)
P1-08
motor 0.001mH~65.535mH (VFD power>55kW)
Mutual inductance of asynchronous 0.01mH~655.35mH (VFD power≤55kW)
P1-09
motor 0.001mH~65.535mH (VFD power>55kW)
0.01A~P1-03 (VFD power≤55kW)
P1-10 asynchronous motor no load current
0.1A~P1-03 (VFD power>55kW)
0.001Ω～65.535Ω (VFD power ≤55kW)
P1-15 Synchronous motor stator resistance
0.0001Ω～6.5535Ω (VFD power >55kW)
0.01mH～655.35mH (VFD power ≤55kW)
P1-16 Synchronous motor D-axis inductance
0.001mH～65.535mH (VFD power >55kW)
0.01mH～655.35mH (VFD power ≤55kW)
P1-17 Synchronous motor Q-axis inductance
0.001mH～65.535mH (VFD power >55kW)
Synchronous motor back EMF
P1-19 0~6000.0
coefficient
Generally, P1-06~P1-10 cannot be viewed on the motor body, and the response data will be automatically
calculated and generated after the motor is tuned.

Parameter Name Range

0 ABZ incremental encoder
P1-25 Encoder type
1 Resolver encoder
VH6 supports various encoder types. Different encoder needs to be equipped with different expansion cards.
Please select expansion card correctly when using. But the asynchronous motor only uses the ABZ incremental
encoder and the resolver encoder.
After the expansion is installed, P1-25 should be set correctly according to the actual situation, otherwise the
inverter may not operate normally.

99
 Parameter Name Range
P1-26 Encoder ppr 1~65535
Set the pulse per rotation of ABZ incremental encoder.
In the vector control mode with speed sensor, the encoder pulse number must be set correctly, otherwise the
motor will not run normally.

Parameter Name Range

P1-27 Encoder installation angle 0.0~359.9°

Parameter Name Range

0 Forward direction
P1-28 Encoder phase order/main direction
1 Reverse direction
The function code is only valid for ABZ incremental encoder, that is, only valid when P1-25 = 0. It is used to set
the phase sequence of AB signal of ABZ incremental encoder.
The function code is effective for asynchronous motor. When the asynchronous motor is tuned dynamically, the
AB phase sequence of ABZ encoder can be obtained.

Parameter Name Range

P1-32 Polar logarithm of resolver 1~65535
The resolver encoder has the logarithm. When using this encoder, the pole logarithm parameter must be set
correctly.

Parameter Name Range

Speed feedback PG disconnection 0.0~10.0 (0.0: Speed feedback disconnection
P1-33
detection time detection invalid)
It is used to set the detection time of encoder disconnection fault. When it is set to 0.0s, the frequency converter
will not detect encoder disconnection fault. When the frequency converter detects the disconnection fault and
the duration exceeds the set time of P1-33, the frequency converter will give an alarm.

Parameter Name Range

Ones bit:
0: No operation
1: Static self learning 1 (part of parameters)
2: Motor rotation self-learning
P1-35 Motor parameter self learning
3: Static self learning 2 (part of parameters)
Tens bit:
0: Synchronous motor
1: Asynchronous motor
Generally speaking, the effect of dynamic tuning is better than that of static tuning. It is suggested to choose
dynamic tuning, but dynamic tuning should separate the load from the motor. If it is difficult to separate the load
from the motor, only static tuning can be selected. Both static tuning and dynamic tuning are only effective in
vector mode, that is, when P0-01 is set to 1 or 2.
Tuning steps of vector control without speed sensor mode (Take asynchronous motor as an example):
(1) Set P0-01 to 1, no speed sensor vector mode. Set P0-02 to 0, panel control.
(2) Set P1-00 ~ P1-05 according to the motor nameplate in turn.
(3) If it is convenient to separate the load from the motor, dynamic tuning is used. If it is not convenient to
separate, static tuning is used.
(4) Take dynamic tuning as an example, set P1-35 to 2, then press the ENT key, the panel will display TUNE,

100
then press the RUN key, the tuning will start, the TUNE light will flash slowly, and the tuning will be completed
in about 2 minutes. After completion, the TUNE will disappear and the panel will display the frequency.
Note: If P0-01 is set to 2, it is necessary to connect the encoder and set the encoder parameters correctly.

4-2-3. Group P2 Input terminal multi-function parameters

VH6 series inverter can be equipped with 7 multifunctional digital input terminals (X4 can be used as high
speed pulse input terminal) and 2 analog input terminals. Table 4-1 provides a detailed description of each
function.
Parameter Name Range
P2-00 Terminal X1 function selection
P2-01 Terminal X2 function selection
P2-02 Terminal X3 function selection
P2-03 Terminal X4 function selection 0~52
P2-04 Terminal X5 function selection
P2-05 Terminal X6 function selection
P2-06 Terminal X7 function selection

Setting
Function Explanation
value
The unused terminals can be set as "no function" to prevent
0 No function
misoperation.
1 FWD or RUN command
Control the inverter forward and reverse operation through the
REV or FWD/REV operation
2 external terminal
direction
Set the inverter operation mode to three wire control mode through
3 Three wire operation control this terminal. Please refer to the description of function code P2-10
("terminal command mode") for details.
4 Forward jog (FJOG) FJOG is forward jog operation, RJOG is reverse jog operation.
Please refer to the description of function code PC-01 and PC-02 for
5 Reverse jog (RJOG)
jog operation frequency and jog acceleration and deceleration time.
6 Terminal UP When the frequency is given by the external terminal, the command
to increase and decrease the frequency. When the frequency source is
7 Terminal DOWN set to digital setting, the setting frequency can be adjusted up and
down.
When the frequency is set through digital frequency, this terminal
UP/DOWN setting reset can clear the frequency value changed by terminal up/down or
8
(terminal, keyboard) keyboard up/down, and make the given frequency return to the value
set by P0-10.
The inverter blocks the output, and the motor shutdown process is
9 Free stop not controlled by the inverter. This mode has the same meaning as
free stop in P4-22.
Use the terminal to reset the fault. It has the same function as the
10 Fault reset (RESET) reset key on the keyboard. With this function, remote fault reset can
be realized.
11 Frequency source switching Main and auxiliary frequency source switching.

101
Setting
Function Explanation
value
Multi-segment command
12
terminal 1
Multi-segment command
13 Through the 16 states of the four terminals, the setting of 16 segment
terminal 2
speed or 16 other commands can be realized. See the attached table
Multi-segment command
14 for details.
terminal 3
Multi-segment command
15
terminal 4
Acceleration/deceleration time
16 Through the four states of the two terminals, four kinds of
selection terminal 1
acceleration and deceleration time can be selected. See the attached
Acceleration/deceleration time
17 table for details.
selection terminal 2
Ensure that the frequency converter is not affected by external
Acceleration and deceleration
18 signals (except shutdown command), and maintain the current output
forbidden
frequency.
PULSE frequency input
19 X4 functions as a pulse input terminal.
(only valid for X4)
20 Counter input Input terminal of count value.
21 Counter reset Clear the count value.
22 Length counting input Input terminal of length value.
23 Length counting reset Clear the length counter.
The frequency converter outputs at the center frequency. The swing
24 Swing frequency pause
function is suspended.
The inverter decelerates and stops, but all operating parameters are
memorized. Such as PLC parameters, swing frequency parameters,
25 Operation pause
PID parameters. After the signal of this terminal disappears, the
inverter will return to the running state before shutdown.
PLC pauses in the process of execution. When it runs again, the
26 PLC status reset inverter can be restored to the initial state of simple PLC through this
terminal.
Operation command switches When the terminal is valid, the operation command is switched to the
27
to keyboard keyboard.
Operation command switches When the terminal is valid, the operation command is switched to
28
to communication communication.
It is forbidden for the inverter to control the torque, and the inverter
29 Torque control inhibition
enters the speed control mode.
The converter is switched between torque control and speed control.
When the terminal is invalid, the inverter operates in the mode
Speed control/torque control
30 defined by (PF-00). If the terminal is valid, it will be switched to
switching
another mode. During operation, it can be switched through the
terminal, and the switch will take effect immediately.
PID is temporarily invalid, the inverter maintains the current output
32 PID pause
frequency, and no longer adjusts the PID of frequency source.

102
Setting
Function Explanation
value
Reverse action direction of
33 When the terminal is effective, the PID function reverses.
PID
When the terminal is valid, the integral regulation function of PID is
34 PID integral pause suspended, but the proportional regulation and differential regulation
function of PID are still valid.
When the PID parameter switching condition is terminal X (PA-13),
35 PID parameter switching and the terminal is invalid, the PID parameters use PA-10 ~ PA-12.
When the terminal is valid, PA-16 ~ PA-18 are used.
When the signal is sent to the frequency converter, the frequency
External fault normally ON converter will report the fault Err43 and deal with the fault according
36
input to the action mode of fault protection (see function code P7-46 for
details).
External fault normally close When the normally closed signal of external fault is sent to the
37
input inverter, the inverter reports the fault err43 and stops.
38 User defined fault 1 When user defined fault 1 and 2 are valid, the frequency converter
alarms Err48 and Err49 respectively. The frequency converter will
39 User defined fault 2 handle according to the action mode selected by fault protection
action selection (P7-47).
Motor parameter selection Two groups of motor parameters can be switched through the two
40
terminal states of terminals.
Switching between main
If the terminal is valid, frequency source A is replaced by preset
41 frequency source A and preset
frequency (P0-10).
frequency
Switching between main
If the terminal is valid, frequency source B is replaced by preset
42 frequency source B and preset
frequency (P0-10).
frequency
Frequency setting active When the terminal is valid, it is allowed to modify the frequency. If it
43
terminal is invalid, it is forbidden to modify the frequency.
When the terminal is valid, the inverter will switch to DC braking
44 DC brake
state directly.
When the terminal is effective, the frequency converter first
45 Deceleration DC braking decelerates to the starting frequency of DC braking, and then
switches to the DC braking state.
When the terminal is effective, the inverter stops at the fastest speed,
and the current is in the upper limit of the set current during the stop
46 Emergency stop
process. This function is used to meet the needs of the inverter to
stop as soon as possible when the system is in emergency.
When keyboard control, the terminal can be used to stop the inverter,
47 External stop terminal 1
which is equivalent to the function of stop key on the keyboard.
In any control mode (panel control, terminal control, communication
48 External stop terminal 2 control), the terminal can be used to slow down the frequency
converter, and the deceleration time is fixed as deceleration time 4.
49 Disable Inversion When the terminal is valid, inverter reverse rotation is prohibited.
50 The running time is cleared When the terminal is valid, the inverter operation time is cleared.

103
Setting
Function Explanation
value
This function needs to be matched and used with the timing
operation (PC-28) and the current operation time (PC-29).
Used to switch between two-wire and three-wire mode.
Switching rule: Switch from two-wire 1 to three wire 1
Two wire / three wire
51 Switch from two-wire 2 to three wire 2
switching
Switch from three wire type 1 to two wire type 1
Switch from 3-wire 2 to 2-wire 2
52 Zero encoder count value Used to clear the encoder count values of U0-53~56.

Four multi-segment command terminals can be combined into 16 states, each of which corresponds to 16
command settings. The details are as follows:
K4 K3 K2 K1 Command setting Parameter
Multi-segment PB-00
OFF OFF OFF OFF
command 0 (PB-16=0)
Multi-segment
OFF OFF OFF ON PB-01
command 1
Multi-segment
OFF OFF ON OFF PB-02
command 2
Multi-segment
OFF OFF ON ON PB-03
command 3
Multi-segment
OFF ON OFF OFF PB-04
command 4
Multi-segment
OFF ON OFF ON PB-05
command 5
Multi-segment
OFF ON ON OFF PB-06
command 6
Multi-segment
OFF ON ON ON PB-07
command 7
Multi-segment
ON OFF OFF OFF PB-08
command 8
Multi-segment
ON OFF OFF ON PB-09
command 9
Multi-segment
ON OFF ON OFF PB-10
command 10
Multi-segment
ON OFF ON ON PB-11
command 11
Multi-segment
ON ON OFF OFF PB-12
command 12
Multi-segment
ON ON OFF ON PB-13
command 13
Multi-segment
ON ON ON OFF PB-14
command 14
Multi-segment
ON ON ON ON PB-15
command 15

104
When the frequency source is multi-speed, 100.0% of the function code PB-00 ~ PB-15 corresponds to the max
output frequency P0-13. In addition to the function of multi-stage speed, the multi-stage instruction can also be
used as the given source of PID, or as the voltage source of VF separation control, so as to meet the needs of
switching between different given values.

Terminal 2 Terminal 1 Acc/Dec time Parameter

OFF OFF Acc/Dec time 1 P0-18, P0-19
OFF ON Acc/Dec time 2 PC-03, PC-04
ON OFF Acc/Dec time 3 PC-05, PC-06
ON ON Acc/Dec time 4 PC-07, PC-08

Parameter Name Function

0: Two-wire mode 1
1: Two-wire mode 2
P2-10 Terminal command mode
2: Three-wire mode 1
3: Three-wire mode 2
This parameter defines four different ways to control the operation of the inverter through the external terminal.
Note: for the convenience of explanation, the following three terminals X1, X2 and X3 of the multifunctional
input terminals X1 ~ X4 are randomly selected as the external terminals. That is to say, the functions of X1, X2
and X3 are selected by setting the values of P2-00 ~ P2-02. See the setting range of P2-00 ~ P2-06 for detailed
function definition.

0: Two-wire mode 1
This mode is the most commonly used two-wire mode. The forward and reverse operation of the motor is
determined by terminals X1 and X2. The function code setting is as follows:

Parameter Name Range Function

P2-10 Terminal command mode 0 Two-wire mode 1
P2-00 X1 function selection 1 Forward run (FWD)
P2-01 X2 function selection 2 Reverse run (REV)

As shown in the figure, in this control mode, when K1 is closed, the inverter runs in forward direction. When
K2 is closed, the inverter runs in reverse.When K1 and K2 are closed or disconnected at the same time, the
inverter stops running.

1: Two-wire mode 2
in this mode, X1 terminal function is enable terminal, while X2 terminal function determines operation
direction. The function code setting is as follows:
Parameter Name Range Function
P2-10 Terminal command mode 1 Two-wire mode 2

105
 P2-00 X1 function selection 1 Operation enable
P2-01 X2 function selection 2 FWD/REV operation direction

As shown in the figure, in the control mode of K1 closed state, K2 opens and the inverter rotates forward, K2
closes and the inverter reverses. K1 is disconnected and the inverter stops.

2: Three-wire mode 1

In this mode X3 is enable terminal, X1 and X2 control the direction.

The function code setting is as follows:
Parameter Name Range Function
P2-10 Terminal command mode 2 Three-wire mode 1
P2-00 X1 function selection 1 Forward run (FWD)
P2-01 X2 function selection 2 Reverse run (REV)
P2-02 X3 function selection 3 Three-wire control mode

As shown in the figure, in the control mode, when SB1 button is closed, press SB2 button, the frequency
converter rotates forward, and then press SB3 button, the frequency converter reverses, SB1 button is
disconnected, and the frequency converter stops. During normal start-up and operation, SB1 button must be
kept closed, SB2 and SB3 button commands will take effect at the closing action edge, and the operation state
of inverter is subject to the last action of the three buttons.

3: Three-wire control mode 2

In this mode, X2 is enable terminal, X1 controls the operation, X3 controls the direction.
The function code setting is as follows:
Parameter Name Range Function
P2-10 Terminal command mode 3 Three-wire mode 2
P2-00 X1 function selection 1 Enable
P2-01 X2 function selection 3 Three-wire control mode

106
 P2-02 X3 function selection 2 Direction

As shown in the figure, in the SB1 button closed state, press the SB2 button, the frequency converter runs, K
opens the frequency converter forward, K closes the frequency converter reverse. When SB1 button is off, the
inverter stops. During normal start-up and operation, SB1 button must be kept closed, and SB2 button command
will take effect at the closing action edge.

Parameter Name Range

P2-11 Terminal UP/DOWN changing rate 0.001Hz/s~50.000Hz/s
It is used to set the speed of frequency change when the terminal up / down adjusts the set frequency, that is, the
change of frequency per second.

Parameter Name Range

P2-12 X filter time 0.000s~1.000s
Set the software filter time of X terminal state. If the input terminal is easy to be disturbed and cause
misoperation, this parameter can be increased to enhance the anti-interference ability. However, the increase of
the filtering time will slow down the response of the X terminal.

Parameter Name Range

P2-13 X1 delay time 0.0s~3600.0s
P2-14 X2 delay time 0.0s~3600.0s
P2-15 X3 delay time 0.0s~3600.0s
It is used to set the delay time of frequency converter when the state of X terminal changes.
At present, only X1, X2 and X3 have the function of setting the delay time.

Parameter Name Content Range

0: Low level valid
X1 terminal valid state setting Ones bit
1: High level valid
0: Low level valid
X2 terminal valid state setting Tens bit
1: High level valid
0: Low level valid
P2-16 X3 terminal valid state setting Hundreds bit
1: High level valid
0: Low level valid
X4 terminal valid state setting Thousands bit
1: High level valid
0: Low level valid
X5 terminal valid state setting Ten thousands bit
1: High level valid
0: High level valid
P2-17 X6 terminal valid state setting Ones bit
1: Low level valid

107
 0: High level valid
X7 terminal valid state setting Tens bit
1: Low level valid
This function code is used to set the effective state of the input terminal of the inverter.

Parameter Name Range

P2-18 AI curve 1 min setting 0.00V~P2-20
AI curve 1 min setting corresponding
P2-19 -100.0%~+100.0%
frequency percentage
P2-20 AI curve 1 max setting P1-02~+10.00V
AI curve 1 max setting
P2-21 -100.0%~+100.0%
corresponding frequency percentage
AI curve parameters are used to set the relationship between analog input voltage and its representative setting
value, as shown in the figure below.
When the analog input is greater than the maximum setting (less than the minimum setting), it is calculated
according to the maximum setting (minimum setting). Two typical settings are provided as follows:

The functions of AI curve 2 (P2-22~P2-25) /AI curve 3 (P2-26~P2-29) are same to AI curve1.

Parameter Name Range

P2-30 AI curve 4 min input 0V~P2-32
AI curve 4 minimum input
P2-31 -100.0%~+100.0%
corresponding setting
P2-32 AI curve 4 inflection point 1 input P2-30~P2-34
AI curve 4 inflection point 1 input
P2-33 -100.0%~+100.0%
corresponding setting
P2-34 AI curve 4 inflection point 2 input P2-32 ~ P2-36
AI curve 4 inflection point 2 input
P2-35 -100.0% ~ +100.0%
corresponding setting
P2-36 AI curve 4 max input P2-34 ~ +10.00V
AI curve 4 max input corresponding
P2-37 -100.0% ~ +100.0%
setting
P2-38 AI curve 5 min input -10.00V ~ P2-40
AI curve 5 minimum input
P2-39 -100.0% ~ +100.0%
corresponding setting
P2-40 AI curve 5 inflection point 1 input P2-38 ~ P2-42
AI curve 5 inflection point 1 input
P2-41 -100.0% ~ +100.0%
corresponding setting

108
 Parameter Name Range
P2-42 AI curve 5 inflection point 2 input P2-40 ~ P2-44
AI curve 5 inflection point 2 input
P2-43 -100.0% ~ +100.0%
corresponding setting
P2-44 AI curve 5 max input P2-42 ~ +10.00V
AI curve 5 max input corresponding
P2-45 -100.0% ~ +100.0%
setting
Curve 4 is determined by four points, which is more flexible.
The voltage/current should meet the requirement: AI min input (P2-30) ＜ AI curve inflection point 1 input
(P2-32) ＜AI curve inflection point 2 input (P2-34) ＜AI max input (P2-36).
Curve 5 please refer to the explanation of curve 4.

Parameter Name Range

Ones bit AI1 curve selection
1 Curve 1 (2 points, refer to P2-18~P2-21)
2 Curve 2 (2 points, refer to P2-22~P2-25)
3 Curve 3 (2 points, refer to P2-26~P2-29)
P2-54 AI curve selection
4 Curve 4 (4 points, refer to P2-30~P2-37)
5 Curve 5 (4 points, refer to P2-38~P2-45)
Tens bit AI2 curve selection, ditto
Hundreds bit AI3 curve selection, ditto
Curve 1, curve 2 and curve 3 are linear relations determined by two coordinate points. Curve 4 and curve 5 are
broken line relations determined by four coordinate points.

Parameter Name Range

AI1 below minimum input setting
Ones bit
selection
AI below minimum input 0 Corresponding minimum input setting
P2-55
setting selection 1 0.0%
AI2 below minimum input setting
Tens bit
selection, ditto

109
 AI3 below minimum input setting
Hundreds bit
selection, ditto
The ones, tens and hundreds bits of the parameter correspond to the analog input AI1, AI2 and AI3 respectively.
If 0 is selected, when AI input is lower than "minimum input", the corresponding setting of the analog quantity
is the "minimum input corresponding setting" (P2-18, P2-22, P2-26) of the curve determined by the parameters.
If 1 is selected, when AI input is lower than the minimum input, the corresponding setting of the analog quantity
is 0.0%.

Parameter Name Range

P2-56 AI1 filter time constant 0.00s~10.00s
P2-57 AI2 filter time constant 0.00s~10.00s
P2-58 AI3 filter time constant 0.00s~10.00s
AI1 filtering time constant is used to set the software filtering time of AI1. When the on-site analog quantity is
easy to be interfered, please increase the filtering time to make the detected analog quantity tend to be stable,
but the larger the filtering time, the slower the response speed of analog quantity detection.

Parameter Name Range

P2-60 AI1 jump point -100%~+100.0%
P2-61 AI1 jump range 0.0%~100.0%
P2-62 AI2 jump point -100%~+100.0%
P2-63 AI2 jump range 0.0%~100.0%
P2-64 AI3 jump point -100%~+100.0%
P2-65 AI3 jump range 0.0%~100.0%
The jump function is to fix the corresponding setting value of the analog quantity to the jump point when the
corresponding setting of the analog quantity changes in the upper and lower intervals of the jump point.
For example: the voltage of analog input AI1 fluctuates up and down at 5.00V, the fluctuation range is 4.90V ~
5.10V, the minimum input of AI1 0.00V corresponds to 0.0%, and the maximum input of AI1 10.00V
corresponds to 100%. Then the detected AI1 corresponding setting fluctuates between 49.0% and 51.0%.
Set AI1 jump point P2-60 to 50.0%, set AI1 jump range P2-61 to 1.0%, then the AI1 input is fixed to 50.0%,
after jump function processing, AI1 is transformed into a stable input, and the fluctuation is eliminated.

Parameter Name Range

P2-66 PULSE min setting 0.00kHz~P2-68
PULSE min setting corresponding
P2-67 -100.0%~+100.0%
frequency percentage
P2-68 PULSE max setting P2-66~50.00kHz
PULSE max setting corresponding
P2-69 -100.0%~+100.0%
frequency percentage
P2-70 PULSE filter time constant 0.00s~10.00s
This group of parameters is used to set the relationship between the X4 pulse frequency and the corresponding
setting. The pulse frequency can only be input into the frequency converter through the X4 terminal. The
application of this group is similar to AI curve 1.

110
4-2-4. Group P3 Output terminal multi-function parameters
Parameter Name Range
0: High speed pulse output
P3-00 Y2 output mode selection
1: Normal terminal output
Y2 terminal can be used as high-speed pulse output terminal or output terminal with collector open circuit. As a
pulse output, the maximum frequency of the output pulse is 50KHz.

Parameter Name Range

P3-01 Y1 output function selection
Y2 (normal terminal) output function
P3-02
selection 0~42 code functions are as follows
P3-04 Relay 1 output function selection
P3-05 Relay 2 output function selection

Setting
Function Explanation
value
0 No output The output terminal has no function
Indicates that the inverter is in operation state, with output
1 Inverter in operation
frequency (can be zero), output ON signal.
2 Fault output (free stop fault) When the inverter fails and stops, the ON signal is output.
Frequency level detection FDT1
3 Refer to PC-18, PC-19 explanation.
output
Frequency level detection FDT2
4 Refer to PC-20, PC-21 explanation.
output
5 Frequency reached Refer to PC-22 explanation.
When the frequency converter runs and the output
Zero speed operation (no output
6 frequency is 0, the ON signal is output. When the frequency
during shutdown)
converter is in the shutdown state, the signal is off.
Zero speed operation 2 (output When the inverter output frequency is 0, the ON signal is
7
during shutdown) output. The signal is also on in the shutdown state.
When the operating frequency reaches the upper frequency,
8 Upper limit frequency arrival
the ON signal is output.
When the operating frequency reaches the lower frequency,
Lower limit frequency arrival (no
9 the ON signal is output. The signal is OFF in the shutdown
output when shutdown)
state.
Before the motor overload protection action, it is judged
according to the threshold of overload warning, and the ON
10 Motor overload forewarning signal is output after exceeding the threshold. Refer to
function code P7-33-P7-41 for setting motor overload
parameters.
The ON signal is output 10s before the overload protection
11 Inverter overload forewarning
of inverter.
12 Communication setting Refer to communication protocol.
When the set frequency exceeds the upper or lower
13 Torque limit
frequency, and the frequency of the inverter also reaches the

111
Setting
Function Explanation
value
upper or lower frequency, the ON signal is output.
15 Frequency 1 arrival output Refer to PC-22, PC-23.
16 Frequency 2 arrival output Refer to PC-24, PC-25.
17 Current 1 arrival output Refer to PC-34, PC-35.
18 Current 2 arrival output Refer to PC-36, PC-37.
When the count value reaches the value set by A0-03, the
19 The set value is reached
ON signal is output.
When the count value reaches the value set by A0-04, the
20 The specified value arrived ON signal is output. The counting function is shown in the
function description of group A0.
When the power supply of the main circuit and control
circuit of the inverter is stable, and the inverter doesn't
21 Ready to run
detect any fault information, and the inverter is in the
operational state, the ON signal is output.
the acquisition value of AI1 is greater than that of AI2, the
22 AI1>AI2
ON signal is output
When the value of analog input AI1 is greater than PC-43
(upper limit of AI1 input protection) or less than PC-42
23 AI1 input overrun
(lower limit of AI1 input protection), the ON signal is
output.
24 Under voltage state output When the inverter is under voltage, it outputs ON signal.
When the accumulated power on time (U0-30) of the
25 Power on time arrived inverter exceeds the time set by PC-30, the ON signal is
output.
When the timing function (PC-26) is valid, the inverter will
26 Timing arrival output ON signal when the running time reaches the set
timing time (PC-28).
When the actual length detected exceeds the length set by
27 Length arrival
A0-00, the ON signal is output.
When the simple PLC completes a cycle, it outputs a pulse
28 Simple PLC cycle completion
signal with a width of 250ms.
When the accumulated operation time P8-10 of the inverter
29 Run time arrival
exceeds the time set by PC-32, the ON signal is output.
30 Reserved Reserved
31 Reserved Reserved
When the operating frequency reaches the lower frequency,
Lower frequency arrival
32 the ON signal is output. The signal is off in the shutdown
(operation related)
state.
Fault output (free shutdown fault
33 and no output when under Fault of free shutdown and no output when under voltage.
voltage)
When the inverter module radiator temperature (P8-19)
34 Module temperature arrival
reaches the set module temperature (PC-47), the ON signal

112
 Setting
Function Explanation
value
is output
When the frequency converter fails, and the fault
Fault output (output only after
35 processing mode is continue to run, the frequency converter
fault shutdown)
alarm output.
Motor temperature acquisition value is greater than P7-37
36 Motor over temperature alarm
value, alarm output
When the inverter is in reverse operation, it outputs ON
37 Speed direction
signal.
38 Load dropping Load suddenly unloaded
39 Software overcurrent output Refer to PC-40, PC-41.
40 Current detection arrival output Refer to PC-38, PC-39.
When the starting time of the inverter exceeds the time set
41 Current run time arrival
by PC-29, the ON signal will be output.
42 Bus voltage reached Refer to PC-65, PC-66

Parameter Name Range

P3-06 Y1 output delay time 0.0~3600.0s
P3-07 Y2 (Normal terminal) output delay time 0.0~3600.0s
P3-09 Relay 1 output delay time 0.0~3600.0s
P3-10 Relay 2 output delay time 0.0~3600.0s
It is used to set the delay time when the state of Y terminal changes.

Parameter Name Range

Ones bit: Y1
Tens bit: Y2
Hundreds bit: reserved
P3-11 Y terminal effective state selection Thousands bit: relay 1
Ten thousand bit: relay 2
0: Positive logic close valid / open invalid
1: Negative logic close invalid/open valid

Parameter Name Range

Y2 (high speed pulse) output function
P3-12
selection 0~13 parameters and functions are shown
P3-13 AO1 output function selection in the table below
P3-14 AO2 output function selection

Setting
Function Explanation
value
0 Operation frequency 0~max output frequency
1 Set frequency 0~ max output frequency
2 Output current 0-2 times motor rated current
Motor output torque (absolute, Percentage
3 0 ~ 2 times motor rated torque
relative to motor)

113
 4 Output power 0~2 times rated power
5 Output voltage 0~1.2 times VFD rated voltage
6 AI1
0V~10V
7 AI2
(or 0~20mA)
8 AI3 (extension card)
9 PULSE input 0.01kHz~50.00KHz
0 ~ Output speed corresponding to
10 Output speed
maximum frequency
11 Communication control output 0.0%~100.0%
12 Counting value 0~max counting value
13 Length 0~max setting length

Parameter Name Range

P3-15 AO1 zero bias coefficient -100.0~+100.0%
P3-16 AO1 gain -10.00~+10.00
P3-17 AO2 zero bias coefficient -100.0~+100.0%
P3-18 AO2 gain -10.00~+10.00
The above function codes are generally used to correct the zero drift of analog output and the deviation of
output amplitude. It can also be used to customize the required AO output curve.
If the bias is represented by b, the gain is represented by k, the actual output is represented by Y, and the
standard output is represented by X, then the actual output is:
Y = kX + b
Among them, 100% of the bias coefficient of AO1 corresponds to 10V (or 20mA), and the standard output
refers to the amount of 0V ~ 10V (or 0mA ~ 20mA) corresponding to the analog output without bias and gain
correction.
For example, if the simulated output content is the operating frequency, and it is desired that the actual output
be 8V (or 16mA) when the frequency is 0, as shown in the following figure, the zero bias b=y-kx=y (when
X=0)=8V, and the zero bias coefficient of 100% corresponds to 10V. Therefore, when b=8V, the corresponding
zero bias coefficient is (8V ÷ 10V) × 100%=80%, and the zero bias coefficient needs to be set to "80%". If
the actual output is 3V (or 6mA) when the frequency is maximum, as shown in the following figure, the gain
K=(Y-b) ÷ X=(actual output - zero bias) ÷ standard output=(3V-8V) ÷ 10V=-0.5, then the gain needs to
be set to "-0.50".

output at 0Hz
Zero bias coefficient =  100 %
max output

114
 Gain =

Parameter Name Range

P3-23 Y2 (high speed pulse) max output frequency 0.01kHz~50.00kHz
When Y2 terminal is selected as pulse output, the function code is used to select the maximum frequency value
of output pulse.

4-2-5. Group P4 Startup brake parameters

Parameter Name Range
0: Direct start
P4-00 Start mode 1: Speed tracking restart
2: Pre-excitation start (AC asynchronous motor)
Note: This parameter needs to be modified in vector control mode (P0-01=1 or 2) (3740 and above versions
support modification in VF mode)

0: Direct start
Suitable for small inertia load
1: Speed tracking restart
It is suitable for the case of instantaneous power loss and restart of large inertia load. At this time, the
corresponding parameters of P4 group should be set correctly.
2: Pre-excitation start (AC asynchronous motor)
It is only effective for AC asynchronous motor, and magnetic field is established before motor is running.
If the pre-excitation time P4-04 is not 0, the dynamic response performance of the motor can be improved by
pre-excitation and then starting.
If the pre-excitation time is set to 0, the inverter cancels the pre-excitation process and starts from the start
frequency.

Parameter Name Range

P4-01 Starting frequency 0.00Hz~10.00Hz
P4-02 Start frequency duration 0.0s~100.0s
Starting DC brake current/Pre-excitation
P4-03 0%~100%
current percentage
DC braking time during startup /
P4-04 0.0s~100.0s
pre-excitation time
If the starting DC braking time is set to 0, the frequency converter starts to run from the starting frequency.
If the starting DC braking time is not 0, the DC braking is performed first, and then run at the starting frequency.
It is suitable for small inertia load, where the motor may rotate when starting.
Starting DC braking is only effective when the starting mode is direct starting. At this time, the inverter starts
DC braking according to the set starting DC braking current, and then starts to run after starting DC braking
time. If the DC braking time is set to 0, it will start directly without DC braking. The greater the DC braking
current is, the greater the braking force is.
If the starting mode is pre-excitation starting of asynchronous motor, the frequency converter first establishes
the magnetic field according to the set pre-excitation current P4-03, and then starts to run after the set
pre-excitation time P4-04. If the pre-excitation time is set to 0, it will start directly without pre-excitation
process.
When the rated current of the motor is less than or equal to 80% of the rated current of the inverter, it is the

115
percentage base value relative to the rated current of the motor. When the motor rated current is greater than
80% of the rated current of the inverter, it is relative to 80% of the rated current of the inverter as the percentage
base value.

Parameter Name Range

P4-05 Starting protection selection 0: No protection 1: With protection
If P4-05 is set to 1, when the frequency converter start-up and stop is set to terminal start-up and stop, the
start-up terminal will be triggered again after power failure and restart.

Parameter Name Range

0: Starting from the shutdown frequency
P4-06 Speed tracking mode 1: Starting from power frequency
2: Starting from maximum output frequency
P4-07 Speed tracking speed 1~100
In order to realize the smooth and shock free starting of the rotating motor. The inverter first judges the speed
and direction of the motor, and then starts the motor with the tracking frequency. There are three ways to track
the speed:
0: Track down from the frequency of power failure, which is usually selected.
1: It can be used when the power frequency is switched, and it can be used when the power is cut off for a long
time.
2: Track down from the maximum frequency, often used by power generating load.
P4-07 is used to set the tracking speed when the speed tracking is restarted. The larger the parameter setting
value is, the faster the tracking speed is. However, too much leads to unreliable tracking effect.

Parameter Name Range

P4-10 Speed tracking closed loop current 30%~200%
The maximum current in the speed tracking process is limited within the set value of "speed tracking current". If
the setting value is too small, the effect of speed tracking will be worse.

Parameter Name Range

0: Linear acceleration and deceleration
P4-19 Acceleration deceleration mode 1: Continuous S-curve acceleration and deceleration
2: Intermittent S-curve acceleration and deceleration
0: Linear acceleration and deceleration
The output frequency increases or decreases linearly. Four kinds of acceleration and deceleration time (P0-18 ~
P0-19, PC-03 ~ PC-08) can be selected through the multi-function input terminal (P2-00 ~ P2-09).

1: Continuous S-curve acceleration and deceleration

When the target frequency is fixed, the output frequency is increased or decreased according to the S curve. It is
suitable for the case of slow start or shutdown.

2: Intermittent S-curve acceleration and deceleration

It is suitable for the real-time change of target frequency and rapid response. The output frequency is increased
or decreased in real time according to S curve. It is suitable for occasions with high comfort requirements and
fast response.

Parameter Name Range

P4-20 S curve starting segment proportion 0.0％~ (100.0％-P4-21)
P4-21 S curve end segment proportion 0.0％~ (100.0％-P4-20)

116
When selecting static S-curve, the sum of parameters P4-20 and P4-21 must be less than or equal to 100%.
In the figure, t1 is the proportion of the beginning segment of S-curve defined by P4-20, t2 is the proportion of
the end segment of S-curve defined by P4-21, and the slope of output frequency change between t1 and t2 is a
fixed value, which is linear acceleration and deceleration. As shown in the figure.

Parameter Name Range

0: Deceleration stop
P4-22 Stop mode
1: Free stop
Starting frequency of DC braking
P4-23 0.00Hz~max output frequency P0-13
during shutdown
DC braking waiting time during
P4-24 0.0s~100.0s
shutdown
Percentage of DC braking current at
P4-25 0%~100%
shutdown
DC brake waiting time during
P4-26 0.0s~100.0s
shutdown
When the shutdown mode is deceleration shutdown, the shutdown shall be carried out according to the set
deceleration time. If the lower limit frequency P0-17 is set, decelerate to P0-17 and then stop freely.
DC braking is suitable for situations where the motor in free running needs to be braked first and then started: it
is suitable for situations where torque needs to be maintained after braking to zero speed, and is not suitable for
large inertia loads or rapid braking. It is not suitable for braking when the motor is running at high speed and
doesn't require a braking resistor.

117
DC braking process: The frequency converter decreases according to the set deceleration time. When the
frequency drops to P4-23, wait for the time set in P4-24, and then brake with the current set in P4-25. The
braking time is P4-26. The braking effect depends on the actual operating conditions. If there is no shutdown
during the shutdown DC braking time, the shutdown state will automatically switch to free shutdown.

4-2-6. Group P5 VF parameters

Parameter Name Range
0 Line VF
1 Multi-point VF
2 Square VF
3 The 1.2nd power VF
4 The 1.4th power VF
P5-00 VF curve setting
6 The 1.6th power VF
8 The 1.8th power VF
9 Reserved
10 VF complete separation mode
11 VF half separation mode
0: Line VF
Suitable for common constant torque load.

1: Multi-point VF
Suitable for dehydrator, centrifuge and other special loads. By setting P5-01 ~ P5-06 parameters, any VF
relation curve can be obtained.

2: Square VF
Suitable for centrifugal loads such as fans and pumps.

3: the 1.2nd power VF||4: the 1.4th power VF||6: the 1.6th power VF||8: the 1.8th power VF
VF relationship curve between line VF and square VF.

10: VF complete separation mode

The output frequency and voltage of the inverter are independent of each other. The output frequency is
determined by the frequency source and the output voltage is determined by P5-09 (VF separated voltage
source).

11: VF half separation mode

In the VF half separation mode, V and F are proportional, but the proportional relationship can be set through
the voltage source P5-09, and the relationship between V and F is also related to the rated voltage and rated
frequency of the motor in group F1.
The relationship between VFD output voltage V and frequency F:

, A is percentage of voltage source input (0~100%).

Parameter Name Range

P5-01 Multi-point VF frequency point F1 0.00Hz~P5-03
P5-02 Multi-point VF voltage point V1 0.0~100.0%
P5-03 Multi-point VF frequency point F2 P5-01~P5-05

118
 P5-04 Multi-point VF voltage point V2 0.0~100.0%
P5-05 Multi-point VF frequency point F3 P5-05~ (motor rated frequency) P1-04
P5-06 Multi-point VF voltage point V3 0.0~100.0%
When P5-00 = 1, the VF curve user-defined multi-point VF curve, as shown in the figure below, the user uses
(V1, F1), (V2, F2), (V3, F3) three-point broken line mode to define the VF curve to adapt to the special load
requirements.

Note: V1 ~ V3: voltage percentage of section 1 ~ 3 of multipoint VF curve. F1 ~ F3: frequency point of section
1 ~ 3 of multipoint VF curve.

Parameter Name Range

0.0% (auto torque boost)
P5-07 Torque boost
0.1%~30.0%
P5-08 Torque boost cutoff frequency 0.00Hz~max output frequency P0-13
Torque boost can improve the low frequency torque characteristics of VF, reduce the torque boost when the load
is light, and increase when the load is heavy and the starting torque is not enough. When the torque boost is too
large, the motor will be over excited, the output current of the inverter will increase, the motor heating will
increase, and the efficiency will decrease.

Parameter Name Range

0 Digital setting (P5-10)
1 AI1
P5-09 The voltage source of VF separation
2 AI2
3 AI3

119
 4 PULSE setting (X4)
5 Multi-segment command
6 Simple PLC
7 PID
8 Communication setting
100.0% corresponding to motor rated voltage
(P1-02, A2-02)
Voltage source digital setting of VF
P5-10 0V~motor rated voltage
separation
VF separation is generally used in induction heating, inverter power supply and torque motor control.
When VF separation control is selected, the output voltage can be set by parameter P5-10, or from analog
quantity, multi-section instruction, PLC, PID or communication. When non digital setting is used, 100% of each
setting corresponds to the rated voltage of the motor. When the percentage of analog output setting is negative,
the absolute value is taken as the effective setting value.

Parameter Name Range

0.0s~1000.0s
P5-11 Voltage acceleration time of VF separation Note: it indicates the time when 0V changes
to the motor rated voltage
0.0s~1000.0s
Voltage deceleration time of VF
P5-12 Note: it indicates the time when 0V changes
separation
to the motor rated voltage
The voltage rise time of VF separation refers to the time required for the output voltage to accelerate from 0 to
the motor rated voltage, as shown in t1 in the figure below.
The voltage drop time of VF separation refers to the time required for the output voltage to decelerate from the
motor rated voltage to 0, as shown in t2 in the figure below.

120
 Parameter Name Range
0: Frequency voltage independently reduced
to 0
P5-13 Stop mode of VF separation
1: When the voltage decreases to zero, the
frequency begins to decrease
0: Frequency voltage independently reduced to 0
The output voltage of VF separation decreases to 0V according to the voltage drop time (P5-12). The output
frequency of VF separation decreases to 0Hz according to deceleration time (P0-19).

1: When the voltage decreases to zero, the frequency begins to decrease

The output voltage of VF separation first decreases to 0V according to the voltage drop time (P5-12), then the
frequency decreases to 0Hz according to the deceleration time (P0-19).

121
 Parameter Name Range
P5-14 VF control slip compensation gain 0%~200%
This parameter is only effective for asynchronous motor, which compensates the motor speed deviation when
the load increases, so that the motor speed can be basically stable when the load changes.

Parameter Name Range

P5-15 Slip compensation time constant 0.1~10.0s
The smaller the response time value of slip compensation is set, the faster the response speed is.

Parameter Name Range

P5-16 VF over excitation gain 0~200
In the process of inverter deceleration, the over excitation gain can inhibit the rise of bus voltage, but the larger
the over excitation gain is, the larger the output current will increase. In the case of braking resistance or small
inertia, which is not easy to produce overvoltage, it can be set to 0.

Parameter Name Range

P5-17 VF oscillation suppression gain 0~100
The gain is selected as small as possible on the premise of effectively suppressing the oscillation, so as to avoid
adverse effects on VF operation. When there is no electrical oscillation, please set the gain to 0. Only when the
motor oscillates obviously, the gain should be increased appropriately. The larger the gain is, the more obvious
the suppression of oscillation is.
When using the function of suppressing oscillation, the parameters of rated current and no-load current should
be accurate, otherwise the effect of VF oscillation suppression is not good.

Parameter Name Range

P5-18 VF oscillation suppression mode 0~4

Parameter Name Range

P5-19 VF over current stall action current 50%~200%
VF over current stall suppression 0: Invalid
P5-20
enable 1: Valid
P5-21 VF over current stall suppression gain 5
VF over current stall action current
P5-22 50%~200%
compensation coefficient
In the high frequency region, the motor drive current is small. Below the rated frequency, the speed of the motor
drops greatly with the same stall current. In order to improve the operation characteristics of the motor, the stall
action current above the rated frequency can be reduced. In some centrifuges with high operation frequency,
several times weak magnetic field and large load inertia are required, this method has a good effect on
acceleration performance.
Transition stall action current over rated frequency = (fs/fn) * k * LimitCur.
fs: running frequency, fn: motor rated frequency, k: P5-22(Current compensation coefficient of double speed
overcurrent stall action), LimitCur: P5-19(overcurrent stall action current).

122
Note:
(1) 150% of over-current stall action current means 1.5 times of rated current of frequency converter.
(2) The carrier frequency of high-power motor is below 2kHz. Due to the increase of pulsating current, the
wave by wave current limiting response precedes the over-current stall to prevent action starting, resulting
in insufficient torque. In this case, please reduce the over-current stall to prevent action current.

Parameter Name Range

P5-23 Overvoltage stall action voltage 200.0V~2000.0V
P5-24 Overvoltage stall suppression enable 0: invalid 1: valid
Overvoltage stall suppression
P5-25 0~100
frequency gain
Over voltage stall suppression voltage
P5-26 0~100
gain
Over voltage stall maximum rise
P5-27 0~50Hz
frequency limit
When the motor speed is higher than the output speed, the motor is in the state of power generation.
In order to suppress the continuous rise of bus voltage, the inverter will adjust the output frequency to consume
more electric energy. The actual deceleration time will be automatically extended to avoid tripping. If the actual
deceleration time can not meet the requirements, the over excitation gain can be appropriately increased.
Group P5 overvoltage stall parameters are valid in VF mode, and stall overcurrent parameters are both valid in
VF and vector mode.
If it is found that the actual acceleration time of the motor is much longer than the acceleration time under
V/F control mode, the following measures can be taken:
(1) If the target frequency is less than 2 times the rated frequency, the over-current stall action current of P5-19
can be increased by 10% each time. If the set value of P5-19 exceeds 170%, it is easy to cause the frequency
inverter to alarm ERR10 (overload).
(2) If the target frequency is 3 times or more than 4 times the rated frequency, during the rapid acceleration
process, Motor stall is likely to occur, which can adjust P5-22 over-current stall action current compensation
coefficient, and the set value is 100%.

If it is found that the actual deceleration time of the motor is much longer than the deceleration time under
V/F control mode, the following measures can be taken:
(1) If there is no braking resistor or energy feedback unit, the set value of P5-16 overexcitation gain can be

123
increased by ± 20 each time. If the increase of overexcitation gain causes motor oscillation overvoltage fault,
please reduce the setting value of overvoltage stall suppression voltage gain P5-26.
(2) If the braking resistor or energy feedback unit is added, and the input voltage level of the inverter is
323~437V, adjust the P7-53 braking starting voltage setting value to 690V, and set P5-16 (overexcitation gain)
to 0. Use shutdown DC braking, and the recommended setting values are: P4-23 (shutdown DC braking starting
frequency) =0.5Hz, P4-25 (shutdown DC braking current percentage) = 50%, P4-26 (shutdown DC braking
time)= 1s.
Note: when using the brake resistor: P5-16 (over excitation gain) is set to 0, otherwise it is easy to cause
excessive current in operation. P5-24 (overvoltage stall enable) is set to 0, otherwise the deceleration time may
be too long.
Parameter Name Range
P5-34 PID shutdown reference voltage 0.0～1000.0v
P5-35 Proportional gain of PID shutdown 0～65535
P5-36 Integral gain of PID shutdown 0～65535
P5-37 Differential gain of PID shutdown 0～65535
P5-38 Reference time for parabolic shutdown 0.0～4200.0s
0: Linear deceleration shutdown
Selection of deceleration and shutdown
P5-39 1: Parabolic deceleration shutdown
methods
2: PID deceleration shutdown
Linear deceleration shutdown: decelerate uniformly according to the set deceleration time.
Parabolic deceleration shutdown: When using parabolic deceleration shutdown, the rate of frequency decrease
will become faster and faster. When the deceleration time is set to be the same as the reference time for
parabolic shutdown, it becomes a straight-line frequency reduction. The longer the reference time for parabolic
shutdown, the slower the frequency decrease in the period before deceleration begins, and the faster the
frequency decrease in the later period.

PID deceleration shutdown: By adjusting the proportional, integral, and derivative related gains during PID
shutdown, the deceleration time can be shortened. It is suitable for situations where large inertia requires rapid
shutdown, and a braking resistor needs to be connected (P5-16 overexcitation gain needs to be set to 0). The
deceleration time needs to be adjusted according to the working conditions, and the deceleration time needs to
be set within 10 seconds. The direction of proportional integral derivative adjustment can be adjusted by first
adjusting the proportional gain of the PID shutdown, adjusting it by 100 each time to achieve a better effect, and
then making fine adjustments. The integral gain of the PID shutdown can be fine tuned, while the differential
gain of the PID shutdown is generally not adjusted.

124
Shutdown performance: Linear deceleration shutdown<parabolic deceleration shutdown<PID deceleration
shutdown.
Shutdown stability: PID deceleration shutdown<parabolic deceleration shutdown<linear deceleration shutdown.
The performance of parabolic shutdown mode is better than that of straight line, and the PID deceleration
shutdown mode is better than parabolic performance, but its stability is worse than parabolic, and PID
deceleration shutdown cannot be used under certain working conditions.
 To use PID deceleration shutdown, it is necessary to turn off overvoltage stall
suppression (P5-20=0) and overcurrent stall suppression (P5-24=0), and adjust the
deceleration time according to the actual working conditions
 The PID reference voltage should be set to be greater than the starting voltage of the
brake pipe (default 690V for P7-52). When using the PID deceleration shutdown mode,
the PID deceleration reference voltage should be set to 690V or above, otherwise it will
have a rapid shutdown effect.
 When using PID deceleration shutdown, set the deceleration time to within 10 seconds.

4-2-7. Group P6 Vector parameters

Parameter Name Range
P6-00 Speed loop proportional gain 1 1~100
P6-01 Speed loop integral time 1 0.01s~10.00s
P6-02 Speed loop proportional gain 2 1~100
P6-03 Speed loop integral time 2 0.01s~10.00s
P6-04 Switching frequency 1 0.00~P6-05
P6-05 Switching frequency 2 P6-04~max output frequency P0-13
Different PI parameters of speed loop can be selected when the inverter operates at different frequencies. When
the operating frequency is less than the switching frequency 1 (P6-04), the PI regulation parameters of the speed
loop are P6-00 and P6-01. When the operating frequency is greater than the switching frequency 2, the PI
regulation parameters of the speed loop are P6-02 and P6-03. The PI parameters of speed loop between
switching frequency 1 and switching frequency 2 are linear switching of two groups of PI parameters, as shown
in the figure below:

By setting the proportional coefficient and integral time of the speed regulator, the speed dynamic response
characteristics of the vector control can be adjusted.
Increasing the proportional gain and decreasing the integration time can accelerate the dynamic response of the
speed loop. Improper setting of PI parameters may lead to excessive speed overshoot. Even when the overshoot
falls back, overvoltage fault occurs.
The recommended adjustment method is as follows:

125
If the factory parameters can not meet the requirements, fine-tuning should be carried out on the basis of the
factory parameters. Firstly, the proportional gain should be increased to ensure that the system doesn't oscillate.
Then, the integration time is reduced to make the system have faster response characteristics and smaller
overshoot.

Parameter Name Range

Ones bit:
P6-06 Speed loop integral attribute 0: invalid
1: valid
P6-07 Vector slip compensation gain 50%~200%
For vector control (P0-01=1 or 2), this parameter can adjust the speed stabilization accuracy of the motor.
For example, when the motor operating frequency is lower than the output frequency, this parameter can be
increased.
For vector control with speed sensor (P0-01=2), this parameter can adjust the output current of inverter under
the same load.
For example, in high-power inverter, if the load capacity is weak, this parameter can be gradually reduced.
Note: In general, it is not necessary to adjust this parameter.

Parameter Name Range

P6-08 SVC speed feedback filter time 0.000s~1.000s
The speed feedback filtering time of SVC takes effect only when P0-01 = 0. Increasing P6-08 can improve the
stability of the motor, but the dynamic response becomes weak. On the contrary, the dynamic response becomes
stronger, but too small will cause the motor vibration. In general, it no needs to adjust.

Parameter Name Range

0 Set by P6-11
1 AI1
2 AI2
3 AI3
Speed control (drive) torque upper
P6-10 4 PULSE setting
limit source
5 Communication setting
6 min(AI1, AI2)
7 max(AI1, AI2)
Full scale of 1~7 corresponds to P6-11
Speed control (drive) torque upper
P6-11 0.0%~200.0%
limit digital setting
In speed control mode, the maximum output torque of the inverter is controlled by the torque upper limit source.
P6-10 is used to select the setting source of torque upper limit. When setting through the analog quantity, pulse
and communication, the corresponding setting 100% corresponds to P6-11, while the 100% of P6-11
corresponds to the rated output current of the inverter.
The setting of AI1, AI2 and AI3 is described in the relevant description of AI curve of group P2 (corresponding
curve is selected through P2-54), and pulse is described in P2-66~P2-70.
When the torque upper limit source is set as communication setting, the torque value is given through the
mapped U4-06.

Parameter Name Range

P6-14 Excitation regulation proportional gain 2400

126
 P6-15 Excitation regulation integral gain 400
P6-16 Torque regulation proportional gain 2400
P6-17 Torque regulation integral gain 400
The PI parameter of vector control current loop can be obtained automatically after the dynamic tuning of
asynchronous motor, which generally doesn't need to be modified.
It should be noted that the integral regulator of the current loop doesn't use the integral time as the dimension,
but directly sets the integral gain.
If the PI gain of current loop is too large, the whole control loop may oscillate. Therefore, when the current
oscillation or torque fluctuation is large, the PI proportional gain or integral gain can be reduced manually.

4-2-8. Group P7 Fault and protection

Parameter Name Fault code
P7-00 Third (last) fault type
P7-01 Second fault type 0~56
P7-02 First fault type
Record the latest three fault types of frequency converter, 0 is no fault. For the possible causes and solutions of
each fault code, please refer to the relevant fault description.

Parameter Name Meaning

P7-03 Frequency of the third fault Frequency of last failure
P7-04 Current of the third fault Current of last failure
P7-05 Bus voltage of the third fault Bus voltage of last failure
The status of digital input terminal in the latest
fault, the order is:

Input terminal state of the third

P7-06
fault
When the input terminal is on, the corresponding
binary bit is 1, and off is 0. The status of all X is
converted to decimal number display.
The status of digital output terminal in the latest
fault, the order is:

Output terminal state of the third

P7-07
fault
When the output terminal is on, the corresponding
binary bit is 1, and off is 0. The status of all Y is
converted to decimal number display.
P7-08 VFD state of the third fault Reserved
P7-09 The time of the third fault Present power on time of the last fault
P7-10 The time of the third fault Present operation time of the last fault
Location information during the Location information during the most recent
P7-11
third (most recent) malfunction malfunction
P7-13 The frequency of the second fault
P7-14 The current of the second fault Same to P7-03~P7-10
P7-15 The bus voltage of the second

127
 fault
P7-16 Input terminal state of the second
fault
P7-17 Output terminal state of the
second fault
P7-18 VFD state of the second fault
P7-19 The time of the second fault
P7-20 The time of the second fault
Location information during the
P7-21
second malfunction
P7-23 Frequency of the first fault
P7-24 Current of the first fault
P7-25 Bus voltage of the first fault
Input terminal state of the first
P7-26
fault
Output terminal state of the first
P7-27
fault Same to P7-03~P7-10
P7-28 VFD state of the first fault
P7-29 The time of the first fault
Running time during the first
P7-30
malfunction
Location information during the
P7-31
first malfunction
Motor overload protection mode 0: Forbidden
P7-33
selection 1: Allowed
P7-34 Motor overload protection gain 0.20~10.00
Motor overload warning
P7-35 50%~100%
coefficient

When P7-33 is set to 0, the motor has no overload protection function, it is recommended to install the heating
relay before the motor.
When P7-33 is set to 1, the inverter has the ability to protect the motor overload. Refer to P7-34 and P7-35 for
protection settings.
In order to protect different load motors effectively, it is necessary to set the parameters according to the
overload capacity of the motor. The inverse time limit curve of motor overload protection is shown in the figure
below.

128
(1) When the running current of the motor reaches 175% times of the rated current of the motor, the motor
overload (Err10) will be reported after continuous running for 2 minutes. When the running current of the motor
reaches 115% of the rated current of the motor, the motor overload (Err10) will be reported after continuous
operation for 80 minutes.
The maximum overload time is 80 minutes and the minimum overload time is 10 seconds.

(2) For example, motor overload protection adjustment: it is required that the motor should operate for 2
minutes under 150% motor current to report overload. According to the motor overload curve diagram, 150% (I)
current is in the current range of 145% (I1) and 155% (I2), 145% of current is overloaded for 6 minutes (T1),
155% of current is overloaded for 4 minutes (T2), so the 150% overload of the rated current for 5 minutes under
the default setting is calculated as follows:
T=T1＋(T2－T1)*(I－I1)/(I2－I1)=4＋(6－4)*(150%－145%)/(155%－145%)=5 minutes
It can be concluded that the motor needs to report overload in 2 minutes under the condition of 150% motor
current. Motor overload protection gain: P7-34=2÷5=0.4
Note: the user needs to set the value of P7-34 correctly according to the actual overload capacity of the motor. If
the parameter is set too large, it is easy to cause the motor overheating damage and the frequency converter
doesn't alarm and protect in time!

Parameter Name Range

0: No temperature sensor
P7-36 Motor temperature sensor type
1: PT100
P7-37 Motor overheat protection threshold 0℃~100℃
P7-38 Motor overheat warning threshold 0℃~100℃
The temperature signal of the motor temperature sensor needs to be connected to the AI3 terminal of card slot B.
The AI3 analog input terminal of VH6 supports PT100 temperature sensor. The motor temperature value is
displayed in U0-40.
When the motor temperature exceeds the motor overheat protection threshold P7-37, the inverter will give an
alarm and deal with it according to the selected fault protection action mode.
When the motor temperature exceeds the motor overheat warning threshold P7-78, the inverter multi-function
digital Y outputs the motor overheat warning ON signal.

129
 Parameter Name Range
Ones bit: input phase lack protection
Tens bit: Contactor closing protection
P7-39 Input phase lack protection selection
0: Forbidden
1: Allowed
Select whether to protect the input phase loss or contactor closing.

Parameter Name Range

P7-40 Output phase lack protection 0: Forbidden 1: Allowed
Choose whether to protect the output phase lack. If 0 is selected, the fault will not be reported when the actual
output phase lack occurs. At this time, the actual current is larger than the current displayed on the panel. There
is a risk. Please use it cautiously.

Parameter Name Range

Power on short circuit to ground
P7-41 0: Invalid 1: Valid
protection function
When the frequency converter is powered on, it can detect whether the motor is short circuited to the ground.
If this function is effective, the UVW end of the inverter will have voltage output for a period of time after
power on.

Parameter Name Range

Action selection of fault relay during
P7-42 0: No action 1: Action
automatic fault reset
If the frequency converter is equipped with automatic fault reset function, fault Y action during automatic fault
reset can be set through P7-42 (P7-42 is only effective for Y terminal).

Parameter Name Range

P7-43 Interval time of automatic fault reset 0.1s~60.0s
This parameter is used as the wait time from the fault occurrence to the automatic reset of the fault.

Parameter Name Range

P7-44 Fault automatic reset times 0~20
This parameter is used as the times of automatic reset after the failure of the frequency converter, and the
frequency converter maintains the failure state after exceeding the set value.

Parameter Name Range

Ones bit: motor overload (Err 10)
0: free stop
1: stop as stop mode
Tens bit: input phase lacking (Err11)
0: free stop
1: stop as stop mode
P7-45 Protection action 1 when fault
Hundreds bit: output phase lacking (Err12)
0: free stop
1: stop as stop mode
Thousands bit: output load drop (Err19)
0: free stop
1: stop as stop mode

130
Parameter Name Range
Ten thousand bit: pole position detection
failed (Err21)
0: free stop
1: stop as stop mode
Ones bit: external fault 1 (Err43)
0: free stop
1: stop as stop mode
Tens bit: communication error (Err44)
0: free stop
1: stop as stop mode
Hundreds bit: EEPROM read write error
(Err45)
0: free stop
P7-46 Protection action 2 when fault
1: stop as stop mode
Thousands bit: operation time reached
(Err46)
0: free stop
1: stop as stop mode
Ten thousand bit: power on time reached
(Err47)
0: free stop
1: stop as stop mode
Ones bit: user defined fault 1 (Err48)
0: free stop
1: stop as stop mode
Tens bit: user defined fault 2 (Err49)
0: free stop
1: stop as stop mode
Hundreds bit: PID feedback lost in operation
(Err50)
P7-47 Protection action 3 when fault 0: free stop
1: stop as stop mode
Thousands bit: speed deviation too large
(Err52)
0: free stop
1: stop as stop mode
Ten thousand bit: motor over speed (Err53)
0: free stop
1: stop as stop mode
Ones bit: motor overheat (Err54)
P7-48 Protection action 4 when fault 0: free stop
1: stop as stop mode

Parameter Name Range

P7-52 Braking start voltage 200.0~2000.0V

131
 P7-53 Braking service rate 0~100
When the bus voltage reaches the P7-52 setting value, the brake resistance starts to work, and the service rate of
the brake resistance is adjusted through P7-53.

Parameter Name Range

P7-55 Over voltage stall gain 0~100
P7-56 Over voltage stall protection voltage 650V~800V

Parameter Name Range

P7-63 Over speed detection value 0.0%~50.0% (max frequency)
P7-64 Over speed detection time 0.0s~60.0s
This function is only effective when the inverter is running with speed sensor vector control.
When the inverter detects that the actual speed of the motor exceeds the maximum frequency, the exceeding
value is greater than the over speed detection value P7-63, and the duration is greater than the over speed
detection time P7-64, the inverter fault alarms Err53 and it shall be handled according to the action mode of
fault protection.
When the over speed detection time is 0.0s, the over speed fault detection is cancelled.

Parameter Name Range

Detection value of excessive speed
P7-65 0.0%~50.0% (max frequency)
deviation
Detection time of excessive speed
P7-66 0.0s~60.0s
deviation
This function is only effective when P0-01=1 or 2.
When the inverter detects that the actual speed of the motor deviates from the set frequency, the deviation is
greater than the detection value P7-65, and the duration is greater than the detection time P7-66, the inverter
fault alarms Err52 and it shall be handled according to the action mode of fault protection.
When the detection time of speed deviation is 0.0s, the fault detection of excessive speed deviation is cancelled.

Parameter Name Range

0: Transient power failure invalid
1: Deceleration in case of instantaneous
Selection of instantaneous stop non-stop
P7-67 power failure
function
2: Deceleration stop in case of instantaneous
power failure
Pause judgement voltage of transient stop
P7-68 80.0%~100.0%
action
Judgment time of instantaneous stop
P7-69 0.0s~30.0s
non-stop voltage rising
Judgement voltage of instantaneous stop
P7-70 60.0%~100.0% (standard bus voltage)
non-stop action
Proportional gain of instantaneous stop
P7-71 0~100
non-stop
Integral coefficient of instantaneous stop
P7-72 0~100
non-stop

132
 Deceleration time of instantaneous stop
P7-73 0~300.0s
non-stop
The purpose of instantaneous stop non-stop is to ensure that when the power supply of the power grid is
abnormal, the motor can decelerate and stop normally, so that the motor can start immediately after the power
supply of the power grid is restored, and it will not stop freely because of the sudden undervoltage fault when
the power supply of the power grid is abnormal. In the large inertia system, it takes a long time for the motor to
stop freely. When the power supply of the power grid is normal, because the motor is still rotating at high speed,
it is easy to cause overload or over-current fault when starting the motor.

4-2-9. Group P8 Keyboard and display

Parameter Name Range
0: Menu switching
1: Forward and reverse switching
P8-00 JOG/REV key function selection
2: Forward jog
3: Reverse jog
The JOG/REV key is a multifunctional key, and its functions can be set through this function code. This key can
be used to switch between shutdown and operation.
0: Menu switching
The display of the three function codes is switched by multi-function keys, corresponding to the parameter
setting of P8-05, and the selected parameters and modified parameters are displayed.
1: Forward and reverse switching
Switch the direction of frequency command through the multi-function key. This function is only valid when the
command source is the command channel of the operation panel.
2: Forward jog
Through the multi-function key to achieve forward jog.
3: Reverse jog
Through the multi-function key to achieve reverse jog.

Parameter Name Range

0: Only in keyboard operation mode, STOP/REST key
P8-01 STOP/REST function shutdown function is effective
1: In any operation mode, the STOP/REST key is effective
0: No operation
1: Restore factory parameters, excluding motor parameters
(in 3730 and above versions, P0-13 and P0-15 Don't restore
factory values)
2: Clear record information
P8-02 Parameter initialization
3: Restore factory parameters (including motor parameters)
4: Backup current user parameters (only supported by LCD
panel)
5: Restore user backup parameters (only supported by LCD
panel)
1. Restore factory settings, excluding motor parameters
After P8-02 is set to 1, except for motor parameters, other functional parameters of inverter are restored to
factory parameters.

133
1. Restore factory parameters, excluding motor parameters and P0-13, P0-15 values (supported by 3730 and
above versions)
After setting P8-02 to 1, most of the frequency converter's functional parameters are restored to the
manufacturer's factory parameters, but the motor parameters and values of P0-13 and P0-15 are not restored.

2. Clear record information

Clear the inverter fault record information, cumulative operation time (P8-10), cumulative power on time
(P8-11), cumulative power consumption (P8-12).

3.Restore factory parameters (including motor parameters)

After setting P8-02=1,most of the functional parameters of the inverter including motor parameters are stored to
the factory parameters. But some parameters such as fault record information, cumulative operation time
(P8-10), cumulative power on time(P8-11), cumulative power consumption (P8-12),module radiator
temperature (P8-19) are not restored.

4.Backup current user parameters (only supported by LCD panel)

Back up the parameters set by user. Back up the settings of all current function parameters.

5. Restore user backup parameters (LCD panel support)

Restore the user parameters previously backed up by setting P8-02=4.
485 communication can be restored to factory settings only after correctly entering the user
password P8-03.

Parameter Name Range

P8-03 User password 0~65535
If any non-zero number is set in P8-03, the password protection function will take effect. The next time you
enter the menu, you must input the password correctly, otherwise you can't view and modify the function
parameters. Please remember the user password.
If P8-03 is set to 00000, the set user password will be cleared and the password protection function will be
invalid.

Parameter Name Range

Ones bit:
0: No display
Personalized parameter mode 1: Display user selected parameters
P8-05
selection Tens bit:
0: No display
1: Display user modified parameters

When P8-05=10, press JOG button to enter --C--, check the parameters modified by user.
To return to the parameter adjustment interface, press JOG button, press ENT in the interface where "-- A --" is
displayed on the panel.

When P8-05=01, press JOG button to enter --U--, check the parameters defined by user. User can select
common parameters through group PE (PE-00~PE-31). Please refer to chapter 3-1-6 for details.

134
When P8-05=10 is set, press, and press ENT on the panel display "-- C --" interface to view the parameters
modified by the user. To return to the parameter adjustment interface, press, and press ENT in the interface
where "-- A --" is displayed on the panel

When P8-05=01, press, and press ENT on the panel display "-- U --" interface to view user-defined parameters.
The user can select common parameters by PE group (PE-00~PE-31).

Parameter Name Range

0: Modifiable
P8-06 Parameter modification attribute
1: Not modifiable
Users can set whether the function code parameters can be modified to prevent the risk of function parameters
being changed by mistake.
If the function code is set to 0, all function codes can be modified. When it is set to 1, all function codes can
only be viewed and cannot be modified.

Parameter Name Range

P8-07 LED operation display parameter 1 0000 ~ FFFF
P8-08 LED operation display parameter 2 0000 ~ FFFF
Bit definition
P8-07

135
 P8-08

Parameter Name Range

LED shutdown display

P8-09
parameter

When in shutdown or operation mode, use the key on the control panel to switch and display multiple status
parameters.

In the running state, there are 32 running state parameters. To display these parameters, their corresponding bits

136
need to be set to 1. After converting this binary number to hexadecimal, set it to P8-07 and P8-08. Similarly, in
the shutdown state, there are 13 shutdown state parameters. To display these parameters, their corresponding
bits need to be set to 1. After converting the binary number to hexadecimal, set it to parameter P8-09.

Parameter Name Range

P8-10 Accumulated running time 0h~65535h
Display the accumulated running time of frequency converter. When the running time reaches the set running
time PC-32, the multi-function digital output function of frequency converter outputs ON signal.

Parameter Name Range

P8-11 Cumulative power on time 0~65535 hours
Display the cumulative power on time of frequency converter since leaving factory.
When this time reaches the set power on time (PC-30), the multi-function digital output function of frequency
converter outputs ON signal.

Parameter Name Range

P8-12 Cumulative power consumption 0~65535 KWh
Display the cumulative power consumption of the inverter so far.

Parameter Name Range

1: G-type (constant torque load model)
P8-13 VFD type display
2: P-type (fan, pump type load models)
This parameter is only for users to view the factory model and cannot be changed.
1: Suitable for constant torque loads with specified rated parameters.
2: Suitable for variable torque loads (fan, pump loads) with specified rated parameters.

Parameter Name Range

P8-14 Product ID -
P8-15 Performance version number -
P8-16 Firmware version -

Parameter Name Range

P8-19 Inverter module radiator temperature 0.0℃~100.0℃
Displays the temperature of IGBT inverter module.

Parameter Name Range

P8-20 Output power factor 00.00%~200.00%
When the output power (U0-06) doesn't correspond to the expected value, the output power can be linearly
corrected by this value.

Parameter Name Range

P8-21 Load speed display factor 0.0001~6.5000
One digits: number of decimal points of U0-16
0: 0 decimal places
P8-22 Load speed display decimal position
1: 1 decimal place
2: 2 decimal places

137
 3: 3 decimal places
Ten digits: number of U0-17 decimal points
1: 1 decimal place
2: 2 decimal places
 Before version 3740
When displaying the load speed, adjust the correspondence between the output frequency of the frequency
converter and the load speed through this parameter.
Individual position:
Used to set the decimal place for displaying load speed, the following example illustrates the calculation
method of load speed:
If the load speed display coefficient P8-21 is 2.0000 and the load speed decimal point P8-22 is 2 (2 decimal
places), when the frequency converter operates at 40.00Hz, the load speed: 40.00 * 2.0000=80.00 (2 decimal
places display).
If the frequency converter is in a shutdown state, the load speed is displayed as the speed corresponding to the
set frequency, that is, the "set load speed". For example, if the frequency is set to 50.00Hz, the load speed in the
shutdown state is 50.00 * 2.0000=100.00 (displayed with 2 decimal places).
For example, if the rated speed of the motor is 1500r/min and the rated frequency is 50HZ, and the load speed
needs to be displayed, P8-22=11 (factory value), P8-21 needs to be modified to 3.0. At this time, U0-16 displays
a load speed of 1500.0.

 3740 and above versions

When displaying load speed, adjust the corresponding relationship between motor speed and load speed through
this parameter.
Individual position:
Used to set the decimal place for displaying load speed, the following example illustrates the calculation
method of load speed:
If the load speed display coefficient P8-21 is 2.0000 and the load speed decimal point P8-22 is 2 (2 decimal
places), when the motor speed U0-66 is 40RPM, the load speed: 40.00 * 2.0000=80.00 (2 decimal places
display).
Ten people:
1: U0-17 and U0-18 are both displayed with one decimal point each.
2: U0-17 and U0-18 are both displayed with 2 decimal points.

4-2-10. Group P9 Communication protocol

Parameter Name Range
0: Modbu-RTU
Serial communication protocol 1: Communication extension card (EtherCAT,
P9-00
selection CANopen)
2: ASCII mode
When P9-00=0, the communication protocol is Modbus RTU. Please refer to Appendix B for communication
introduction.
When P9-00=1, the communication protocol is EtherCAT/CANopen.Please refer to the manual of the
corresponding expansion card.
When P9-00 is set to 2, the communication protocol is in ASCII mode.
EtherCAT communication expansion card supports 12 groups of PDO, which are: the master station (upper
computers) sends data TPDO1~TPDO12, and the mapped function code can be viewed through PE-00~PE-11.

138
The slave station (frequency converter) responds to data RPDO1~RPDO12, and the mapped function code can
be viewed through PE-20~PE-31. Refer to U4 group parameter description for mapping parameter function.
For detailed usage of EtherCAT communication, please refer to the VH6 Variable Frequency EtherCAT
Expansion Card User Manual.

Parameter Name Range

P9-01 Local address 1~247, 0 is broadcast address
Ones bit: MODBUS
0: 300BPS
1: 600BPS
2: 1200BPS
3: 2400BPS
4: 4800BPS
5: 9600BPS
6: 19200BPS
P9-02 Baud rate 7: 38400BPS
8: 57600BPS (supported for versions 3740 and
above)
9: 115200BPS (supported by 3740 and above
versions)
Tens bit: EtherCAT
0：115200BPS
1：208300BPS
2：256000BPS
0: No parity: <8, N, 2>(RTU)
1: Even parity: <8, E, 1>(RTU)
P9-03 MODBUS data format 1~4 2: Odd parity: <8, O, 1>(RTU)
3: No parity: <8, N, 1>(RTU)
4: Even parity: <7, E, 1>(ASCII)
P9-00=1, P9-02 is valid in ten digits. P9-00=0, P9-02 bits are valid. The factory value is 06.
P9-00=2, P9-03=4 Enable ASCII mode.

Parameter Name Range

0.0 s (invalid)
P9-04 Communication timeout
0.1 ~ 60.0s
When the function code is set to 0.0 s, the communication timeout parameter is invalid.
When the function code is set to a valid value, if the interval between one communication and the next exceeds
the communication timeout, the system will report a communication timeout (Err44). Usually, it is set to
invalid.

Parameter Name Range

P9-05 MODBUS response delay 0~20ms
Response delay: it refers to the interval between the end of data receiving of inverter and the sending of data to
upper computer. If the response delay is less than the system processing time, the response delay is subject to
the system processing time. If the response delay is longer than the system processing time, the system will wait
until the response delay time reached, and then send the data to the upper computer.

139
 Parameter Name Range
Communication interruption
P9-06 0.0s~60.0s
detection of expansion card
When the function code is set to 0.0s, the expansion card communication interruption detection parameter is
invalid.
When the function code is set to a valid value, if the communication time between the frequency converter and
the expansion card exceeds the value set by the expansion card communication interruption detection (P9-06),
the system will report a communication timeout (Err44). The default setting is 0.

Parameter Name Range

VB3/VB5/V5 communication Ten bit:
P9-07 control words (supported in versions 0: Disable
3740 and above) 1: Enable
When using VB series frequency converters to control start and stop through modbus rtu communication and
replacing them with VH6 frequency converters, this function needs to be enabled because the bit functions
corresponding to the control words 2000H and 1100H of VH6 and VB series frequency converters are different.
The ten digit setting of P9-07 parameter 1 enables the VH series frequency converter to replace the Modbus
communication command control word function of VB3/VB5/V5/B5N. This allows the VH6 frequency
converter to write 2 to control forward rotation, 3 to control reverse rotation, and 7 to control deceleration and
shutdown in 2000H.

4-2-11. Group PA PID parameters of process control

Parameter Name Range
0: PA-05 setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
PA-01 Setting channel selection 3: AI3
4: PULSE pulse setting (X4)
5: Communication setting
6: Multi-segment command setting
0: AI1
1: AI2
2: AI3
PA-02 Feedback channel selection 3: AI1-AI2
4: AI1+AI2
5: PULSE pulse setting (X4)
6: Communication setting
PA-01 is used to select the target given channel of process PID. PA-02 is used to select the feedback channel of
process PID.
The target quantity for process PID is a relative value, with a range of 0.0% to 100.0%. The feedback quantity
of PID is also a relative quantity, and the goal of PID is to make these two relative quantities the same.

Note: When PA-01 selects 6 (multi segment instruction given), PB-16 (multi segment instruction 0 given mode)
cannot select 5 (PID given).
Parameter Name Range
PA-03 PID feedback filter time 0.00s~30.00s

140
 PA-04 PID output filter time 0.00s~30.00s
PA-03 is used to filter the PID feedback, which is helpful to reduce the influence of the disturbance on the
feedback, but it will lead to the degradation of the response performance of the process closed-loop system.
PA-04 is used to filter the PID output frequency, which will weaken the mutation of the inverter output
frequency, but it will also lead to the degradation of the response performance of the process closed-loop
system.

Parameter Name Range

PA-05 PID value setting 0.0%~100.0%
When PA-01 is set to 0, this parameter needs to set.

Parameter Name Range

PA-06 PID setting change time 0.00s~300.00s
The given change time of PID refers to the time required for the given value of PID to change from 0.0% to
100.0%.
When the given value of PID changes, the given value of PID changes linearly according to the given change
time to reduce the adverse impact of the given mutation on the system.

Parameter Name Range

PA-07 PID reverse cut off frequency 0.00Hz~max output frequency
In some cases, only when the PID output frequency is negative (i.e. inverter reversal), PID can control the
quantitative and feedback quantity to the same state, but the high reverse frequency is not allowed for some
occasions, and PA-07 is used to determine the upper limit of reverse frequency.
When the frequency source is PID, the frequency output range is as follows:
For example: frequency source is pure PID or main + PID
(1) The reverse cutoff frequency is 0 (PA-07=0) or reverse is forbidden (P0-21=1). Output range: lower
frequency to upper frequency (i.e. P0-17~P0-15).
(2) The reverse cut off frequency is not 0 and reverse running is not prohibited (PA-07≠0, P0-21=0). Output
range: - reverse cut off frequency ~ upper limit frequency.

Parameter Name Range

PA-08 PID deviation limit 0.0%~100.0%
When the deviation between the given quantity and the feedback quantity of PID is less than PA-08, the PID
stops adjusting. In this way, the output frequency is stable when the deviation between given and feedback is
small, which is very effective for some closed-loop control situations.

Parameter Name Range

PA-09 PID differential limiting 0.00%~100.00%
In PID regulator, the function of differential is sensitive and easy to cause system oscillation. Therefore, the
function of PID differential is generally limited to a small range. PA-09 is used to set the output range of PID
differential.

Parameter Name Range

PA-10 Proportional gain P 0.0~100.0
PA-11 Integral time I 0.01s~10.00s
PA-12 Differential time D 0.000s~10.000s

141
Proportional gain P:
It determines the regulation intensity of the whole PID regulator. The greater the P is, the greater the regulation
intensity is. The parameter 100.0 means that when the deviation between the PID feedback quantity and the
given quantity is 100.0%, the adjustment amplitude of the PID regulator to the output frequency command is
the maximum frequency.
Integral time I:
Determine the intensity of integral regulation of PID regulator. The shorter the integration time, the greater the
adjustment intensity. The integral time means that when the deviation between PID feedback and given quantity
is 100.0%, the integral regulator continuously adjusts the time and the adjustment quantity reaches the
maximum frequency.
Differential time D:
Determine the strength of PID regulator deviation change rate. The longer the differential time is, the stronger
the regulation is. Differential time means that when the feedback value changes by 100.0% in this time, the
adjustment value of differential regulator is the maximum frequency.

Parameter Name Range

0: Don't switch
1: Switch through X terminal
2:Switch automatically according to
PA-13 PID parameter switching condition
deviation
3:Switch automatically according to the
operation frequency
PA-14 PID parameter switching deviation 1 0.0%~PA-15
PA-15 PID parameter switching deviation 2 PA-14~100.0%
In some applications, a group of PID parameters can not meet the needs of the whole operation process, so
different PID parameters need to be used in different situations. The parameters can be switched through the X
terminal (function 35) of the multi-function terminal, or according to the deviation.
(1) Switch through multi-function terminal X
When switching through the function 35 of the multi-function terminal, the terminal signal off corresponds to
the first group of PID parameters, and the terminal signal ON corresponds to the second group of PID
parameters.
(2) Switch automatically according to deviation
When the absolute value of deviation between given and feedback is less than PID parameter switching
deviation 1 (PA-14), the first group of PID parameters is selected for PID parameters. When the absolute value
of deviation between given and feedback is greater than PID switching deviation 2 (PA-15), the second group of
PID parameters is selected. When the deviation between given and feedback is between switching deviation 1
and switching deviation 2, PID parameters are linear interpolation values of two groups of PID parameters, as
shown in the figure below.

142
 Parameter Name Range
PA-16 Proportional gain P2 0.0~100.0
PA-17 Integral time I2 0.01s~10.00s
PA-18 Differential time D2 0.000s~10.000s
Same to PA-10~PA-12, the second set of PID parameters.

Parameter Name Range

PA-19 PID action direction 0: positive action 1: negative action
Positive action: when the feedback signal of PID is less than the given quantity, the output frequency of
frequency converter rises. Such as winding tension control occasions.
Negative action: when the feedback signal of PID is less than the given quantity, the output frequency of
inverter decreases. Such as unwinding tension control occasions.
The function is affected by the reverse action direction of the multi-function terminal PID, which needs
attention in use.

Parameter Name Range

PA-20 PID given feedback range 0~65535
PID given feedback range is a dimensionless unit, used for PID given display U0-14 and PID feedback display
U0-15.
The relative value of the given feedback of PID is 100.0%, corresponding to the given feedback range PA-20.
For example, if PA-20 is set to 2000, when PID is given 100.0%, U0-14 is 2000.

Parameter Name Range

PID maximum deviation between two
PA-21 0.00%~100.00%
outputs
PID minimum deviation between two
PA-22 0.00%~100.00%
outputs

Parameter Name Range

PA-23 PID initial value 0.0%~100.0%
PA-24 PID initial value holding time 0.00s~500.00s
When the VFD is started, PID output is fixed to PID initial value PA-23, and PID doesn't start closed-loop
adjustment operation until the initial value of PID is maintained for PA-24. The following figure shows the
function diagram of the initial PID value.

143
 Parameter Name Range
PID operation mode (whether to operate 0: Not operate when shutdown
PA-25
when shutdown) 1: Operate when shutdown
It is used to select whether the PID continues to calculate in PID shutdown state. In general application, PID
should stop operation in shutdown state.

Parameter Name Range

Ones bit: integral separation
0: invalid
1: valid
PA-26 PID integral attribute Tens bit: whether to stop integration after
output to limit value
0: continue to integral
1: Stop integral
Integral separation:
If the integral separation is set to be effective, when the X terminal integral pause (function 34) is effective, the
integral of PID stops operation, and at this time, only the proportional and differential functions of PID are
effective.
When the integral separation is invalid, the integral separation is invalid no matter whether the multi-function
digital DI is valid or not.
Whether to stop integration after output reached limit value:
After the PID operation output reaches the maximum or minimum value, you can choose whether to stop the
integral action. If stop integral is selected, PID integral calculation will stop at this time, which may help to
reduce PID overshoot.

Parameter Name Range

0.0%: not judge the feedback lost
PA-27 PID feedback lost detection value
0.1%~100.0％
PA-28 PID feedback lost detection time 0.0s~30.0s
This function code is used to judge whether PID feedback is lost.
When the PID feedback value is less than the feedback loss detection value PA-27 and the duration exceeds the
PID feedback loss detection time PA-28, the VFD will alarm the fault Err50.

144
4-2-12. Group PB Multi-speed and simple PLC
Parameter Name Range
PB-00 Multi-segment command 0 -100.0% ~ +100.0%
PB-01 Multi-segment command 1 -100.0% ~ +100.0%
PB-02 Multi-segment command 2 -100.0% ~ +100.0%
PB-03 Multi-segment command 3 -100.0% ~ +100.0%
PB-04 Multi-segment command 4 -100.0% ~ +100.0%
PB-05 Multi-segment command 5 -100.0% ~ +100.0%
PB-06 Multi-segment command 6 -100.0% ~ +100.0%
PB-07 Multi-segment command 7 -100.0% ~ +100.0%
PB-08 Multi-segment command 8 -100.0% ~ +100.0%
PB-09 Multi-segment command 9 -100.0% ~ +100.0%
PB-10 Multi-segment command 10 -100.0% ~ +100.0%
PB-11 Multi-segment command 11 -100.0% ~ +100.0%
PB-12 Multi-segment command 12 -100.0% ~ +100.0%
PB-13 Multi-segment command 13 -100.0% ~ +100.0%
PB-14 Multi-segment command 14 -100.0% ~ +100.0%
PB-15 Multi-segment command 15 -100.0% ~ +100.0%
0: PB-00 setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
PB-16 Multi-segment 0 command setting mode 3: AI3
4: Pulse
5: PID setting
6: Preset frequency P0-10
According to the different states of multi-function digital X, the multi-segment instruction needs to be switched
and selected. For details, please refer to the relevant instructions of group P2.

Parameter Name Range

PB-17 Simple PLC segment 0 operation time 0.0~6500.0s(h)
PB-18 Simple PLC segment 0 acc/dec time 0~3
PB-19 Simple PLC segment 1 operation time 0.0~6500.0s(h)
PB-20 Simple PLC segment 1 acc/dec time 0~3
PB-21 Simple PLC segment 2 operation time 0.0~6500.0s(h)
PB-22 Simple PLC segment 2 acc/dec time 0~3
PB-23 Simple PLC segment 3 operation time 0.0~6500.0s(h)
PB-24 Simple PLC segment 3 acc/dec time 0~3
PB-25 Simple PLC segment 4 operation time 0.0~6500.0s(h)
PB-26 Simple PLC segment 4 acc/dec time 0~3
PB-27 Simple PLC segment 5 operation time 0.0~6500.0s(h)
PB-28 Simple PLC segment 5 acc/dec time 0~3
PB-29 Simple PLC segment 6 operation time 0.0~6500.0s(h)
PB-30 Simple PLC segment 6 acc/dec time 0~3
PB-31 Simple PLC segment 7 operation time 0.0~6500.0s(h)
PB-32 Simple PLC segment 7 acc/dec time 0~3

145
 Parameter Name Range
PB-33 Simple PLC segment 8 operation time 0.0~6500.0s(h)
PB-34 Simple PLC segment 8 acc/dec time 0~3
PB-35 Simple PLC segment 9 operation time 0.0~6500.0s(h)
PB-36 Simple PLC segment 9 acc/dec time 0~3
PB-37 Simple PLC segment 10 operation time 0.0~6500.0s(h)
PB-38 Simple PLC segment 10 acc/dec time 0~3
PB-39 Simple PLC segment 11 operation time 0.0~6500.0s(h)
PB-40 Simple PLC segment 11 acc/dec time 0~3
PB-41 Simple PLC segment 12 operation time 0.0~6500.0s(h)
PB-42 Simple PLC segment 12 acc/dec time 0~3
PB-43 Simple PLC segment 13 operation time 0.0~6500.0s(h)
PB-44 Simple PLC segment 13 acc/dec time 0~3
PB-45 Simple PLC segment 14 operation time 0.0~6500.0s(h)
PB-46 Simple PLC segment 14 acc/dec time 0~3
PB-47 Simple PLC segment 15 operation time 0.0~6500.0s(h)
PB-48 Simple PLC segment 15 acc/dec time 0~3
0: Stop at the end of single operation
1: Keep the final value at the end of
PB-49 Simple PLC operation mode
single operation
2: Cycle all the time

Simple PLC function has two functions: as a frequency source or as a voltage source of VF separation.
When simple PLC is used as frequency source, the positive and negative values of PB-00 ~ PB-15 determine
the operation direction. If the value is negative, it means that the inverter runs in the opposite direction.
As a frequency source, PLC has three operation modes, but as a VF voltage source, it has no such mode. Among
them:
0: Stop at the end of single operation
The inverter stops automatically after completing a single cycle and needs to give the operation command again
to start.
1: Keep the final value at the end of single operation
After completing a single cycle, the frequency and direction of the last section will be maintained automatically.
2: Cycle all the time
After the inverter completes one cycle, it will start the next cycle automatically until there is a stop command.
The figure below is the schematic diagram of simple PLC as frequency source. When simple PLC is used as
frequency source, the positive and negative values of PB-00 ~ PB-15 determine the operation direction. If the
value is negative, it means that the inverter runs in the opposite direction.

146
 Parameter Name Range
0: second
PB-50 Simple PLC operation time unit
1: hour

Parameter Name Range

Ones bit: power-off memory
0: not memory
Simple PLC power-off memory 1: memory
PB-51
selection Tens bit: shutdown memory
0: not memory
1: memory
PLC power down memory refers to memorizing the operation stage and frequency of PLC before power down,
and continuing to run from the memory stage when next power on. If no memory is selected, the PLC process
will be restarted every time when the power is on.
PLC shutdown memory is to record the previous PLC operation stage and frequency during shutdown, and
continue to run from the memory stage during the next operation. If no memory is selected, the PLC process
will be restarted every time.

4-2-13. Group PC Auxiliary function

Parameter Name Range
PC-00 Jog frequency 0.00Hz~P0-13
PC-01 Jog acceleration time 0.0s~6500.0s
PC-02 Jog deceleration time 0.0s~6500.0s
Define the given frequency and acceleration and deceleration time of inverter when jogging.
During jog operation, the start mode is fixed as direct start mode (P4-00 = 0), and the stop mode is fixed as
deceleration stop mode (P4-22 = 0).

Parameter Name Range

PC-03 Acceleration time 2 0. 1s~6500.0s
PC-04 Deceleration time 2 0. 1s~6500.0s

147
 PC-05 Acceleration time 3 0. 1s~6500.0s
PC-06 Deceleration time 3 0. 1s~6500.0s
PC-07 Acceleration time 4 0. 1s~6500.0s
PC-08 Deceleration time 4 0. 1s~6500.0s
VH6 provided four groups of acceleration and deceleration time, which are P0-18/P0-19 and above parameters.

Parameter Name Range

0: 1s
PC-09 The unit of acc/dec time 1: 0.1s
2: 0.01s
PC-09 is used to set the unit of acceleration and deceleration time for four groups.

Parameter Name Range

0: max output frequency P0-13
PC-10 The base frequency of acc/dec time 1: setting frequency
2: 50Hz
The acceleration and deceleration time is the time accelerating from 0 to the frequency set by PC-10. If PC-10 is
1, the acceleration of the motor changes.

Parameter Name Range

Switching frequency point between
PC-11 acceleration time 1 and acceleration 0.00Hz~max output frequency
time 2
Switching frequency point between
PC-12 deceleration time 1 and deceleration 0.00Hz~ max output frequency
time 2
When controlling motor 1, you can choose different acceleration and deceleration time.
Note: when using this function, the multi-function terminal function cannot select the acceleration and
deceleration time switching.

Parameter Name Range

PC-13 Jump frequency 1 0.00Hz~max output frequency
PC-14 Jump frequency 2 0.00Hz~max output frequency
PC-15 Jump frequency range 0.00Hz~max output frequency
When the set frequency is within the range of jumping frequency, the actual running frequency will run at the
jumping frequency close to the set frequency. By setting the jumping frequency, the inverter can avoid the
mechanical resonance point of the load.
VH6 can set two jump frequency points. If both jump frequencies are set to 0, the jump frequency function will
be cancelled.
Please refer to the figure below for the principle of jump frequency and jump frequency amplitude.

148
 Parameter Name Range
Whether the jump frequency is
0: Invalid
PC-16 effective during acceleration and
1: Valid
deceleration
Set whether the jump frequency is effective during acceleration and deceleration.

Parameter Name Range

The frequency reached detection
PC-17 0.00~100% (max output frequency )
range
When the operation frequency of the frequency converter is in a certain range of the target frequency, the
multi-function Y terminal of the inverter outputs ON signal.
This parameter is used to set the detection range of frequency, which is the percentage relative to the maximum
frequency. The figure below is the schematic diagram of frequency arrival.

149
 Parameter Name Range
Frequency detection value (FDT1
PC-18 0.00Hz~max output frequency
voltage level)
Frequency detection hysteresis value
PC-19 0.0%~100.0% (FDT1 level)
(FDT1 voltage level)
When the operating frequency is higher than the frequency detection value, the inverter multi-function output Y
outputs ON signal, and when the frequency is lower than the detection value, the Y terminal output ON signal is
cancelled.
The above parameters are used to set the detection value of output frequency and the hysteresis value of output
action release. Where PC-19 is the percentage of the hysteresis frequency relative to the frequency detection
value PC-18.

Parameter Name Range

Frequency detection value (FDT2
PC-20 0.00Hz~max output frequency
voltage level)
Frequency detection hysteresis value
PC-21 0.0%~100.0% (max output frequency)
(FDT2 voltage level)
The frequency detection function is the same as that of FDT1. Please refer to the relevant description of
function code PC-18 and PC-19.

Parameter Name Range

PC-22 Frequency reached detection value 1 0.00Hz~ max output frequency
PC-23 Frequency reached detection 1 range 0.0%~100.0% (max output frequency)
PC-24 Frequency reached detection value 2 0.00Hz~ max output frequency
PC-25 Frequency reached detection 2 range 0.0%~100.0% (max output frequency)
When the output frequency of the frequency converter is within the positive and negative detection range of
frequency detection value, the multi-function Y outputs the ON signal.
VH6 provides two groups of frequency reached detection parameters, setting frequency value and frequency
detection range respectively. The figure below is the schematic diagram of this function.

150
 Parameter Name Range
PC-26 Timing function selection 0: Invalid 1: Valid
PC-28 Setting operation time 0.0Min~6500.0Min
PC-29 Present operation reached time 0.0Min~6500.0Min
When PC-26 = 1, the timing function is turned on, the current running time U0-31 is greater than the value set
by PC-28, the inverter stops running, and Y outputs ON signal by assigning function code 26 to Y terminal.
The value of current time U0-31 is greater than the value set by PC-29. By assigning function code 41 to Y
terminal, Y outputs ON signal, but the inverter will not stop running.

Parameter Name Range

PC-30 Setting power on reached time 0~6500.0h
PC-32 Setting operation reached time 0~6500.0h
When the accumulated operation time of P8-10 is greater than the set operation arrival time of PC-32, the
frequency converter will stop operation. By assigning function code 29 to the Y terminal, the Y terminal will
output ON signal.
When the cumulative power on time of P8-11 is greater than the power on arrival time set by PC-30, the
inverter will stop running. By assigning function code 25 to the Y terminal, the Y terminal will output ON
signal.

Parameter Name Range

PC-34 Current reached detection value 1 0.0%~300.0% (motor rated current)
PC-35 Current reached detection 1 range 0.0%~300.0% (motor rated current)
PC-36 Current reached detection value 2 0.0%~300.0% (motor rated current)
PC-37 Current reached detection 2 range 0.0%~300.0% (motor rated current)
When the output current of the frequency converter is within the set positive and negative detection width of
current arrival, the multi-function Y outputs ON signal.
VH6 provides two groups of arrival current and detection width parameters. The following figure is the function
diagram.

Parameter Name Range

PC-38 Zero current detection value 0.0%~300.0% (motor rated current)
PC-39 Zero current detection delay time 0.01s~600.00s

151
When the output current of the inverter is less than or equal to the zero current detection level and the duration
exceeds the zero current detection delay time, the Y terminal of the inverter outputs ON signal.

Parameter Name Range

0：0.0% (not detect)
PC-40 Software overcurrent point
1：0.1%~300.0% (motor rated current)
Software overcurrent detection delay
PC-41 0.00s~600.00s
time
When the output current of the frequency converter is greater than or exceeds the limit detection point, and the
duration exceeds the software over-current point detection delay time, the Y terminal of the frequency converter
outputs ON signal.

Parameter Name Range

PC-42 AI1 input voltage lower limit 0.00V~PC-43
PC-43 AI1 input voltage upper limit PC-42~10.50V
When the value of analog input AI1 is greater than PC-43, or AI1 input is less than PC-42, Y terminal of
frequency converter outputs "AI1 input overrun" ON signal, which is used to indicate whether the input voltage
of AI1 is within the set range.

Parameter Name Range

540~810V (380V models)
PC-44 Over voltage point
200~400V (220V models)
It is used to set the voltage value of inverter overvoltage fault. The factory value of 380V voltage level inverter
overvoltage point is 810V, and the factory value of 220V voltage level inverter overvoltage point is 400V.

Parameter Name Range

200~537V (380V models)
PC-45 Under voltage point
200~400V (220V models)
It is used to set the voltage value of the inverter under voltage fault Err08. The factory value of the 380 V
voltage level inverter is 350 V, and the factory value of the 220 V voltage level inverter is 200 V.

Parameter Name Range

0: Run at lower limit frequency
Operation action when the frequency
PC-46 1: Stop
is lower than lower limit frequency
2: Run at zero speed

Parameter Name Range

PC-47 Module temperature reached 0~100℃
When the inverter radiator temperature reaches the temperature, the inverter Y terminal outputs the "module
temperature reaches" ON signal.

Parameter Name Range

0: The fan runs during operation
PC-48 Fan control
1: The fan is running all the time
It is used to select the action mode of the cooling fan. When 0 is selected, the fan runs in the running state of the
inverter. When the radiator temperature is higher than 40 ℃, the fan runs. When the radiator temperature is
lower than 40 ℃, the fan doesn't run.

152
When it is selected as 1, the fan will run after power on.

Parameter Name Range

PC-49 Droop control 0.00Hz~10.00Hz
The droop rate allows a small speed difference between the master station and the slave station, thus avoiding
conflicts between them. The default value for this parameter is 0.
Only when the master and slave adopt the speed control mode, the droop rate needs to be adjusted. For each
transmission process, the appropriate droop rate needs to be gradually found in practice. It is suggested that the
PC-49 should not be set too large, otherwise the steady-state speed will drop obviously when the load is large.
The droop rate must be set for both the master and slave.
Droop speed = Synchronization frequency× output torque × droop rate ÷ 10
Eg.: PC-49 = 1.00, Synchronization frequency=50Hz, output torque=50%, then
Droop speed = 50Hz×50%×1.00÷10=2.5Hz
VFD actual frequency = 50Hz – 2.5Hz = 47.5Hz

Parameter Name Range

PC-50 Terminal jog run priority 0: Invalid 1: Valid
This parameter is used to set whether the terminal jog function has the highest priority.
When PC-50=1, regardless of the command source, as long as the jog terminal of function 4 or 5 is selected, the
frequency converter will interrupt the current running command and execute the jog running command.

Parameter Name Range

1: Optimization mode 1
PC-51 SVC optimization selection
2: Optimization mode 2
The SVC optimization mode of asynchronous motor, it doesn't need to be adjusted generally.

Parameter Name Range

0: No compensation
PC-52 Dead area compensation mode
1: Compensation mode 1

Parameter Name Range

0: Asynchronous Modulation
PC-54 Modulation mode
1: Synchronous modulation
It is only effective for VF control.
Synchronous modulation means that the carrier frequency changes linearly with the output frequency
transformation to ensure that the ratio (carrier wave ratio) remains unchanged. It is generally used when the
output frequency is higher, which is conducive to the quality of output voltage. When the output frequency is
lower (below 100Hz), generally synchronous modulation is not needed, because the ratio of carrier frequency to
output frequency is higher, and the advantage of asynchronous modulation is more obvious.
When the operating frequency is higher than 85Hz, the synchronous modulation will take effect, and the
asynchronous modulation mode is adopted below this frequency.

Parameter Name Range

DPWM switching upper limit
PC-55 5.00Hz~max output frequency
frequency
It is only effective for VF control. Generally, it doesn't need to be modified.

153
The modulation mode of asynchronous motor is determined by the VF wave generation mode. When the value
is lower than PC-55, the switching loss of inverter is large, but the current ripple is small. When it is larger than
PC-55, it is opposite, but it is easy to cause unstable operation of motor at high frequency.
When VF control operation is unstable, please refer to parameter P5-17. For inverter loss and temperature rise,
please refer to PC-67.

Parameter Name Range

0: Random PWM invalid
PC-56 Random PWM
1~10: PWM carrier frequency random depth
When the random PWM depth is set to 0, the random PWM is invalid.
By adjusting the random PWM depth, the monotonous and harsh sound of the motor can be softened and the
external electromagnetic interference can be reduced.

Parameter Name Range

Dormancy frequency PC-59~max output
PC-57 Wake up frequency
frequency P0-13
PC-58 Wake up delay time 0.0s~6500.0s
PC-59 Dormancy frequency 0.00Hz~wake up frequency PC-57
PC-60 Dormancy delay time 0.0s~6500.0s

This set of parameters is used to realize the dormancy and wake-up function in water supply application.
During the operation of the inverter, when the set frequency is less than or equal to Dormancy frequency
(PC-59), after the delay time(PC-60), the inverter enters the dormancy state and stops automatically.
If the inverter is in dormancy state and the current operation command is valid, when the set frequency is
greater than or equal to the wake-up frequency(PC-57), the inverter starts to restart after the Wake up delay
time(PC-58).
In general, please set the wake-up frequency to be greater than or equal to the dormancy frequency. Set the
wake-up frequency and dormancy frequency to 0.00Hz, then the dormancy and wake-up functions are invalid.
Note: When the dormancy function is enabled, if the frequency source uses PID, it is necessary to select the
operation when the PID stops (PA-25 = 1).

154
 Parameter Name Range
Wave by wave current limiting
PC-61 0: Not enable 1: Enable
enable
The fast current limiting function can minimize the over-current fault of the inverter and ensure the
uninterrupted operation of the inverter.
If the frequency converter is in the fast current limiting state for a long time, the frequency converter may be
damaged by overheating, which is not allowed. Therefore, when the frequency converter is in the fast current
limiting state for a long time, it will give an alarm, indicating that the frequency converter is overloaded and
needs to be shut down.

Parameter Name Range

PC-62 Overmodulation coefficient 100～110
It is used to set the current detection compensation of frequency converter. If the setting is too large, the control
performance may be degraded. Generally, it doesn't need to be modified.

Parameter Name Range

PC-65 Bus voltage reached value Unit: 0.1V
PC-66 The bus voltage reached hysteresis value Unit: 0.1V
When the bus voltage reaches (PC-65-PC-66~PC-65+PC66), the Y terminal outputs ON signal by assigning
function code 42 to Y terminal.

Parameter Name Range

PC-67 Carrier frequency 0.5K~16.0K
By adjusting the carrier frequency of the inverter, the noise of the motor can be reduced, the resonance point of
the mechanical system can be avoided, the line leakage current to the ground and the interference of the inverter
can be reduced. When the carrier frequency is high, the motor loss and the motor temperature rising decrease,
but the inverter loss increases, the inverter temperature rising increases, and the interference increases.
If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory value, the temperature rising of the inverter radiator will be
increased. At this time, the user needs to use the inverter derating.

Parameter Name Range

The carrier frequency is adjusted 0 No
PC-68
with temperature 1 Yes
When PC-68 is 0, the carrier of frequency converter is determined by the set value and will not change during
operation.
When PC-68 is 1, when the operating process of the inverter detects that the temperature of its radiator is high,
the carrier frequency will be automatically reduced to reduce the temperature rising of the converter. When the
temperature of the radiator is detected to be low, the carrier frequency will automatically return to the set value.

Parameter Name Range

Encoder position count display
0: HEX
PC-70 mode (supported by 3720 and
1: DEC
above)
0: None
PC-71 Clear encoder position count
1: Clear (Single valid)

155
PC-70: This function code determines the display mode of U0-53~U0-56 encoder position counting.
Set to 0: display as hexadecimal number. Set to 1: display as decimal number.
PC-71: This function code is set to 1 (only valid once, that is, the rising edge is valid), and U0-53~U0-56 are
cleared to 0.

Parameter Name Range

0:Don't use external linear speed
1:AI1
2: AI2
PC-72 External linear speed given source
3:AI3
4: PULSE pulse setting
5: Communication setting
Maximum allowable update deviation of main
PC-73 0.00%～10.00%
frequency
PC-74 Allowed update interval of main frequency 0.00s~200.00s
PC-75 Differential time of external linear speed change 0.00s~50.00s
PC-76 External linear speed change 0.00Hz~50.00Hz
When used on wire drawing machine and winding machine, the following parameters can be set.
P0-03 set to 10 (Specific mode for wire drawing and winding), P0-04 set to 8 (PID setting), P0-05 set to 01
(Calculation results of main and auxiliary frequency sources).

The control mode is as follows:

the main frequency is roughly adjusted, the auxiliary frequency is precisely regulated by PID.
Final output frequency=Main frequency+Auxiliary frequency.
PC-73~PC-74 control the update interval and value of the main frequency. If the external linear speed changes
too much (judged by PC-75~PC-76), the auxiliary frequency will not work, and the main frequency will directly
control the winding in the form of a certain proportion of synchronous changes with the linear speed (suitable
for the control of acceleration and deceleration stages).

PC-72: If PC-72 is set to 0, it means that it doesn't use external linear velocity. If it is set to non-0, select the
external linear velocity setting source.
PC-73: It means that when the deviation between PID setting and feedback is less than the deviation set by
PC-73, the main frequency will be allowed to be updated.
PC-74: When the deviation between PID given and feedback is less than the deviation set by PC-73, the main
frequency is updated every PC-74 time interval.
PC-75~PC-76: judge the linear velocity change of the external silk thread.
PC-75: Unit time of external linear speed change.
PC-76: change of external linear speed in unit time, unit: 0.01Hz. If the external linear speed change is greater
than the value set by PC-76, the auxiliary frequency will not work, and the main frequency will change
synchronously with the linear speed in a certain proportion.

The current frequency change can be viewed through U0-23 and U0-24. When the feedback value is equal to
the target frequency, U0-23 is the same as the current operating frequency of the inverter, and U0-24 is 0. When
the feedback value is less than the target frequency, U0-23 value remains unchanged, and U0-24 increases.
When the feedback value is greater than the target frequency, the U0-23 value remains unchanged and the
U0-24 value decreases.

156
4-2-14. Group PE User optional parameters
Parameter Name Range
PE-00 User optional parameters 0
PE-01 User optional parameters 1
PE-02 User optional parameters 2
PE-03 User optional parameters 3
PE-04 User optional parameters 4
PE-05 User optional parameters 5
PE-06 User optional parameters 6
PE-07 User optional parameters 7
PE-08 User optional parameters 8
PE-09 User optional parameters 9
PE-10 User optional parameters 10
PE-11 User optional parameters 11
PE-12 User optional parameters 12
PE-13 User optional parameters 13
P0.00 ~ PF.xx
PE-14 User optional parameters 14
A0.00 ~ A2.xx
PE-15 User optional parameters 15
A9.00 ~ Ad.xx
PE-16 User optional parameters 16
U0.00 ~ U0.xx
PE-17 User optional parameters 17
U4.00 ~ U5.xx
PE-18 User optional parameters 18
PE-19 User optional parameters 19
PE-20 User optional parameters 20
PE-21 User optional parameters 21
PE-22 User optional parameters 22
PE-23 User optional parameters 23
PE-24 User optional parameters 24
PE-25 User optional parameters 25
PE-26 User optional parameters 26
PE-27 User optional parameters 27
PE-28 User optional parameters 28
PE-29 User optional parameters 29
PE-30 User optional parameters 30
PE-31 User optional parameters 31
This group of function codes is the user-defined parameter group (P8-00 is set to 0 and P8-05 is set to 11, used
together).
Users can select the required parameters to be summarized into PE group in all VH6 function codes, which can
be used as user-defined parameters to facilitate the operation of viewing and changing.
PE group provides up to 32 user-defined parameters. When entering user-defined parameter mode, the display
function code is defined by PE-00~PE-31, and the sequence is consistent with PE group function code.
This parameter array can map some discontinuous parameters into PE parameters. When the upper computer
PLC reads the parameters of the converter, it can read all the discontinuous parameters through one instruction,
which can simplify the PLC communication instruction and improve the communication efficiency.

157
4-2-15. Group PF Torque control(Firmware versions below 3720)
Parameter Name Range
0: Speed control
PF-00 Torque control
1: Torque control
It is used to select the control mode of frequency converter: speed control or torque control, which cannot be
switched during the operation of inverter.
The X terminal of VH6 has a function related to torque control: torque control inhibition (function 29).
When the speed control / torque control switching terminal is invalid, the control mode is determined by PF-00.
If the speed control / torque control switching is effective, the control mode is equivalent to the reverse value of
PF-00.

Parameter Name Range

0: Digital setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: PULSE
PF-01 Upper limit source of driver torque
5: Communication setting
6: min(AI1, AI2)
7: max(AI1, AI2)
(the full scale of option 1-7 correspond to
PF-02 digital setting)
PF-02 Driver torque upper limit -200.0%~200.0%
PF-01 is used to select the torque setting source. There are eight torque setting modes.
The torque setting adopts relative value, and 100.0% corresponds to the rated torque of the motor. The setting
range is - 200.0% ~ 200.0%, indicating that the maximum torque of the inverter is twice the rated torque of the
inverter.
When the torque is set to be positive, the inverter runs forward.
When the torque is set to be negative, the inverter runs reverse.
The torque setting sources are described as follows:
0: Digital setting (PF-02)
The target torque directly uses the PF-02 setting value.
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
When AI is used as the frequency setting, voltage/current input correspond to 100.0% of the setting.It refers to
the percentage of relative torque digital setting PF-02.The input voltage values of AI and the corresponding
relationship curve with the target torque can be freely selected by the user through P2-54.
VH6 provides five groups corresponding relationship curves, among which three groups of curves are linear
relationships (2-point corresponding relationship), and two groups of curves are broken lines with 4-point
corresponding relationship. Users can set them through Group P2 parameter.
4: Pulse pulse (X4)
The target torque is given by terminal X4 high speed pulse.
Given signal specification of pulse: voltage range 9V-30V, frequency range 0kHz-500kHz. Pulse setting can
only be input from the multifunction input terminal X4.
The relationship between input pulse frequency and corresponding setting of terminal X4 is set through

158
P2-66-P2-69. The corresponding relationship is the linear correspondence of 2 points. The pulse input
corresponds to the percentage of PF-02.
5: Communication given
The target torque is given by the communication mode.
When MODBUS is used for communication, the data is given by the host computer through the communication
address H1000, and the data format is data with 2 decimal places.
H1105 provides torque (supported by 3730 and later versions), which refers to the percentage of PF-02 set
relative to the torque number. The setting range is 0~1000, and the data format is data with one decimal point,
unit:%. For example, the upper limit of driving torque PF-02=100%, H1105 provides 500, indicating that the
torque is set to 100% * 50%=50%. Reverse can be set with negative values through PF-02 or by adding
negative values to H1000.

Parameter Name Range

Torque control forward direction max
PF-03 0.00Hz~max output frequency
frequency
Torque control reverse direction max
PF-04 0.00Hz~ max output frequency
frequency
It is used to set the forward or reverse maximum operating frequency of inverter under torque control mode.
The acceleration and deceleration time of upper frequency limit is set in PC-07 (acceleration) / PC-08
(deceleration).
When the inverter is in torque control, if the load torque is less than the motor output torque, the motor speed
will continue to rise, in order to prevent the mechanical system from galloping accidents, we must limit the
maximum speed of the motor in torque control.
If the maximum frequency of torque control needs to be dynamically changed continuously, it can be realized
by controlling the upper limit frequency.

Parameter Name Range

PF-05 Torque acceleration time 0.00s~650.00s
PF-06 Torque deceleration time 0.00s~650.00s
Under the torque control mode, the difference between the output torque and the load torque determines the
speed change rate of the motor and the load. The motor speed may change rapidly, causing noise or mechanical
stress too much. By setting the torque control acceleration and deceleration time, the motor speed can change
smoothly.
In the torque control of small torque starting, it is not recommended to set the torque acceleration and
deceleration time. If the torque acceleration and deceleration time is set, it is suggested to increase the speed
filter coefficient properly. When torque quick response is needed, torque control acceleration and deceleration
time is set to 0.00s.
For example, two motors in hard connection drive the same load. In order to ensure the load distribution evenly,
one inverter is set as the main machine, and the speed control mode is adopted, the other is slave and torque
control is adopted. The actual output torque of the host machine is the torque command of the slave. At this time,
the torque of the slave needs to follow the host quickly, Then the acceleration and deceleration time of torque
control of slave is 0.00s.

4-2-16. Group PF Torque control(Firmware versions 3720 and above)

Parameter Name Range
0: Speed control
PF-00 Torque control
1: Torque control

159
It is used to select the control mode of inverter: speed control or torque control, which cannot be switched
during the operation of inverter.
The X terminal of VH6 has a function related to torque control: torque control inhibition (function 29).
When the speed control / torque control switching terminal is invalid, the control mode is determined by PF-00.
If the speed control / torque control switching is effective, the control mode is equivalent to the reverse value of
PF-00.
Parameter Name Range
0: Digital setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
PF-01 Upper limit source of driver torque 4: PULSE
5: Communication setting
6: min(AI1, AI2)
7: max(AI1, AI2)
(the full scale of option 0~7 correspond to PF-02
digital setting)
PF-02 Driver torque upper limit -200.0%~200.0%
PF-01 is used to select the torque setting source, and there are 8 torque setting methods.
The torque setting adopts relative value, and 100.0% corresponds to the rated torque of the motor. The setting
range is -200.0% - 200.0%, indicating that the maximum torque of the inverter is twice the rated torque of the
inverter.
When the torque is given as positive, the inverter operates in positive.
When the torque is given as negative, the inverter operates in reverse.
The torque setting sources are described as follows:
0: Digital setting (PF-02)
It refers to that the target torque directly uses the PF-02 set value.
2: AI
When AI is used as the frequency setting, voltage/current input correspond to 100.0% of the setting.It refers to
the percentage of relative torque digital setting PF-02.The input voltage values of AI and the corresponding
relationship curve with the target torque can be freely selected by the user through P2-54.
VH6 provides five groups corresponding relationship curves, among which three groups of curves are linear
relationships (2-point corresponding relationship), and two groups of curves are broken lines with 4-point
corresponding relationship. Users can set them through Group P2 parameter.
5: Communication setting
The target torque is given by the communication mode.
When MODBUS is used for communication, the data is given by the host computer through the communication
address H1000, and the data format is data with 2 decimal places.
Parameter Name Range
0: Digital setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
Torque control forward maximum frequency 4: PULSE
PF-03
source 5: Communication setting
6: min(AI1, AI2)
7: max(AI1, AI2)
(the full scale of option 0~7 correspond to
P0-13 digital setting)

160
 Parameter Name Range
PF-04 Torque control forward maximum frequency 0.00Hz~max output frequency
It is used to set the maximum forward or reverse operating frequency of the inverter under torque control mode.
The acceleration and deceleration time of the upper frequency limit is set in PC-07 (acceleration) /PC-08
(deceleration).
When the inverter is in torque control, if the load torque is less than the motor output torque, the motor speed
will continue to rise. In order to prevent the mechanical system from speeding and other accidents, it is
necessary to limit the maximum speed of the motor during torque control.
If it is necessary to dynamically and continuously change the maximum frequency of torque control, it can be
achieved by controlling the upper limit frequency.

Parameter Name Range

0: Digital setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
Torque control reverse maximum 4: PULSE
PF-05
frequency source 5: Communication setting
6: min(AI1, AI2)
7: max(AI1, AI2)
(the full scale of option 0~7 correspond to P0-13
digital setting)
Torque control reverse maximum
PF-06 0.00Hz~max output frequency
frequency
Under the torque control mode, the difference between the motor output torque and the load torque determines
the speed change rate of the motor and the load. The motor speed may change rapidly, causing problems such as
noise or excessive mechanical stress. By setting the acceleration and deceleration time of torque control, the
motor speed can change smoothly.

Parameter Name Range

PF-07 Torque acceleration time 0.00s～650.00s
PF-08 Torque deceleration time 0.00s～650.00s
In the torque control of small torque starting, it is not recommended to set the torque acceleration and
deceleration time. If the torque acceleration and deceleration time is set, it is suggested to increase the speed
filter coefficient properly. When torque quick response is needed, torque control acceleration and deceleration
time is set to 0.00s.
For example, two motors in hard connection drive the same load. In order to ensure the load distribution evenly,
one inverter is set as the master, and the speed control mode is adopted, the other is slave and torque control is
adopted. The actual output torque of the master is the torque command of the slave. At this time, the torque of
the slave needs to follow the master quickly, then the acceleration and deceleration time of torque control of
slave is 0.00s.

4-2-17. Group A0 Textile

Parameter Name Range
A0-00 Setting length 0m~65535m
A0-01 Actual length 0m~65535m
A0-02 Pulse per meter 0.1~6553.5
The above parameters are used for fixed length control.

161
In the application, it is necessary to set the corresponding input terminal function as "length counting input"
(function 22). When the pulse frequency is high, the X4 port must be used. The actual length A0-01 can be
calculated by dividing the number of pulses sampled by terminals and A0-02. When the actual length is greater
than the set length A0-00, the multi-function digital Y outputs the "length reached" ON signal. In the process of
fixed length control, the length reset operation (function 23) can be carried out through the multi-function X
terminal.

Parameter Name Range

A0-03 Setting counting value 1~65535
A0-04 Specified counting value 1~65535
In application, the corresponding input terminal function should be set to "counter input" (function 20), and X4
port must be used when the pulse frequency is high.
When the count value reaches the set count value A0-03, the multi-function terminal Y outputs the "set count
value arrival" ON signal, and then the counter stops counting.
When the count value reaches the specified count value A0-04, the multi-function terminal Y outputs the
"specified count value arrival" ON signal, and the counter continues to count until the counter stops counting
when the "set count value" reached.
Counter reset operation (function 21) can be performed through multi-functional X terminal.

Parameter Name Range

0: Relative to center frequency
A0-05 Swing frequency setting mode
1: Relative to the max frequency
This parameter is used to determine the reference value of swing.
0: relative to the center frequency (P0-03 frequency source), variable swing range system. The swing varies
with the center frequency (set frequency).
1: relative to the max output frequency (P0-13) is a constant swing range system with fixed swing range.

Parameter Name Range

A0-06 Swing frequency amplitude 0.0%~100.0%

162
 A0-07 Jump frequency amplitude 0.0%~50.0%
A0-08 Swing frequency period 0.1s~3000.0s
Triangular rise time of swing
A0-09 0.1%~100.0%
frequency

A0-06 swing amplitude AW:

When setting swing range relative to center frequency (A0-05 = 0), AW = frequency source P0-03 × amplitude
A0-06. When setting swing range relative to maximum output frequency (A0-05 = 1), AW = max output
frequency P0-13 × swing range PB-21.
A0-08 swing period: the time value of a complete swing period.
A0-07 jump frequency amplitude:
The jump frequency amplitude is the frequency percentage of the jump frequency relative to the swing range
when the swing frequency is running, that is: jump frequency = AW × jump frequency amplitude A0-07.
If the swing is relative to the center frequency (A0-05 = 0), the jump frequency is a changing value. If the swing
is relative to the max output frequency (A0-05 = 1), the jump frequency is a fixed value. The swing operating
frequency is constrained by the upper and lower limit frequencies.
A0-09 triangle wave rise time coefficient: it is the time percentage of triangle wave rise time relative to swing
period A0-08.
Triangle wave rise time (s) = swing period A0-08 × rise time coefficient of triangular wave A0-09.
Triangle wave falling time (s) = swing period A0-08 × (1 - triangular wave rise time coefficient A0-09).

4-2-18. Group A1 Virtual IO

Parameter Name Range
A1-00 Function selection of virtual X1 terminal 0-52 (see P2 group physics X input

163
 A1-01 Function selection of virtual X2 terminal selection)
A1-02 Function selection of virtual X3 terminal
A1-03 Function selection of virtual X4 terminal
A1-04 Function selection of virtual X5 terminal
Ones bit: virtual X1
0: Whether it is valid is determined by the
state of virtual terminal Y1
1: Is the A1-06 setting valid
A1-05 Virtual X terminal effective state source
Tens bit: virtual X2
Hundreds bit: virtual X3
Thousands bit: virtual X4
Ten thousands bit: virtual X5
Ones bit: virtual X1
0: invalid
1: valid
Tens bit: virtual X1
A1-06 Virtual X terminal status setting
Tens bit: virtual X2
Hundreds bit: virtual X3
Thousands bit: virtual X4
Ten thousands bit: virtual X5
Different from ordinary digital input terminal, virtual X can be set in two ways, and can be selected through
A1-05.
When X state is determined by the state of corresponding virtual Y, whether X is valid depends on whether Y
output is valid or invalid, and X is uniquely bound to Yx (x is 1 ~ 5).
When virtual X terminal status is set by function code, the status of virtual input terminal is determined by
binary bit of function code A1-06. The following is an example of how to use the virtual X terminal.

Example 1: When virtual Y state is selected to determine virtual X state, to complete the following functions:
when AI1 input exceeds the upper and lower limits, the frequency converter will give an alarm and shut down.
The following setting methods can be adopted:
Set the function of virtual X as "user defined fault 1" (A1-00 = 38).
The virtual X terminal effective state mode is determined by virtual Y (A1-05 = xxx0). Set the output function
of virtual Y1 as "AI1 input exceeds the upper and lower limits" (A1-11 = 23).
When the AI1 input exceeds the upper and lower limits, the virtual Y1 output is in the ON state. At this time, the
virtual X1 input terminal state is valid. The virtual X1 of the frequency converter receives the user-defined fault
1, and the frequency converter will alarm Err48 and shut down.

Example 2: When the function code A1-06 is selected to set the virtual X1 state, the following functions are
completed: after the inverter is powered on, it will automatically enter the operation state. The following setting
method can be adopted:
Set the function of virtual X1 to "forward running" (A1-00=1).
Set the valid status mode of virtual X1 terminal as function code (A1-05=xxx1).
Set the virtual X1 terminal status to be valid (A1-06=xxx1). Set the command source to terminal control
(P0-02=1).
Set the start protection to "unprotected" (P4-05=0).
After the inverter power on initialization is completed, it is detected that virtual X1 is effective, and the terminal
is forward running, which is equivalent to the frequency converter receiving a terminal forward running

164
command, and the inverter will start to run forward.

Parameter Name Range

Function selection of AI1 terminal as
A1-07
X terminal
Same to the function settings of X terminal
Function selection of AI2 terminal as
A1-08
X terminal
Ones bit: AI1
Selection of effective mode when AI 0: High level valid
A1-10
is used as X terminal 1: Low level valid
Tens bit: AI2
This group of function codes is used to use AI as X. When AI is used as X, if AI input voltage is greater than 7V,
AI terminal status is high level. If AI input voltage is lower than 3V, AI terminal status is low level. There is
hysteresis between 3V and 7V.
A1-10 is used to determine whether the AI high level is valid or the AI low level is valid when AI is X.

Parameter Name Range

A1-11 Virtual Y1 output function selection
A1-12 Virtual Y2 output function selection
0: Connect with physical Xx inside
A1-13 Virtual Y3 output function selection
1~42: same to physical Y output
A1-14 Virtual Y4 output function selection
A1-15 Virtual Y5 output function selection
A1-16 Virtual Y1 output delay time 0.0s~3600.0s
A1-17 Virtual Y2 output delay time 0.0s~3600.0s
A1-18 Virtual Y3 output delay time 0.0s~3600.0s
A1-19 Virtual Y4 output delay time 0.0s~3600.0s
A1-20 Virtual Y5 output delay time 0.0s~3600.0s
Ones bit: Virtual Y1
0: Positive logic
1: Negative logic
Virtual Y terminal effective state
A1-21 Tens bit: virtual Y2
selection
Hundreds bit: virtual Y3
Thousands bit: virtual Y4
Ten thousands bit: virtual Y5
Virtual digital output function is similar to Y output function of control board. It can be used to cooperate with
virtual digital input X to realize some simple logic control.
When the output function of virtual Y is selected as 0, the output states of virtual Y1 ~ Y5 are determined by the
input states of physical X1 ~ X5 on the control board. At this time, virtual Y corresponds to physical X.
When the virtual Y output function is not 0, the function setting and use method of virtual YI are the same as
those of P3 group Y output. Please refer to the description of P3 group Y output.

4-2-19. Group A2 Second motor parameters

VH6 provides two sets of motor control parameters, which can set motor nameplate parameters, encoder
parameters and VF vector performance parameters respectively.
Group A2 function code corresponds to motor 2. All parameters and application methods of group A2 are the
same as those of motor 1.

165
Parameter Name Range
0: Common asynchronous motor
A2-00 Motor type selection
1: Synchronous motor
A2-01 Motor rated power 0.1kW~650.0kW
A2-02 Motor rated voltage 1V~1200V
0.01A~655.35A (VFD power ≤55kW)
A2-03 Motor rated current
0.1A~6553.5A (VFD power >55kW)
A2-04 Motor rated frequency 0.01Hz~max output frequency
A2-05 Motor rated speed 1rpm~65535rpm
Asynchronous motor stator 0.001Ω~65.535Ω (VFD power ≤55kW)
A2-06
resistance 0.0001Ω~6.5535Ω (VFD power >55kW)
Asynchronous motor rotor 0.001Ω~65.535Ω (VFD power ≤55kW)
A2-07
resistance 0.0001Ω~6.5535Ω (VFD power >55kW)
Leakage inductance of 0.01mH~655.35mH (VFD power ≤55kW)
A2-08
asynchronous motor 0.001mH~65.535mH (VFD power >55kW)
asynchronous motor mutual 0.01mH~655.35mH (VFD power ≤55kW)
A2-09
inductance 0.001mH~65.535mH (VFD power >55kW)
asynchronous motor current 0.01A~P1-03 (VFD power ≤55kW)
A2-10
without load 0.1A~P1-03 (VFD power >55kW)
0: ABZ incremental encoder
A2-25 Encoder type
1: Resolver
A2-26 Encoder pulse per rotate 1~65535
A2-27 Encoder mounting angle 0.0~359.9°
Encoder phase order/main
0: Forward direction
A2-28 direction. only ABZ
1: Reverse direction
incremental encoder
A2-32 Polar logarithm of rotation 1~65535
Speed feedback PG 0.0~10.0 (0.0: speed feedback disconnection detection
A2-33
disconnection detection time ineffective)
Ones bit:
0: No operation
1: Static self learning 1(part of parameters)
Motor 2 parameter 2: Motor rotation self-learning
A2-35
self-learning 3: Static self learning 2 (part of parameters)
Tens bit:
0: Asynchronous motor
1: Synchronous motor
0: VF control
A2-36 Motor 2 control mode 1: No speed sensor vector control (SVC)
2: With speed sensor vector control (FVC)
0: same to first motor
1: acceleration and deceleration time 1
Motor 2 acc/dec time
A2-37 2: acceleration and deceleration time 2
selection
3: acceleration and deceleration time 3
4: acceleration and deceleration time 4

166
 Parameter Name Range
0.0%: Automatic torque boost
A2-38 Motor 2 torque boost
0.1%~30.0%
Motor 2 oscillation
A2-40 0~100
suppression gain
A2-41 Speed loop proportion gain 1 1~100
A2-42 Speed loop integral time 1 0.01s~10.00s
A2-43 Speed loop proportion gain 2 1~100
A2-44 Speed loop integral time 2 0.01s~10.00s
A2-45 Switching frequency 1 0.00~A2-46
A2-46 Switching frequency 2 A2-45~max output frequency (P0-13)
Ones bit: integral separation
A2-47 Speed loop integral property 0: invalid
1: valid
A2-48 Slip gain of vector control 50%~200%
SVC speed feedback filter
A2-49 0.000s~1.000s
time
0: Parameter setting (P6-11)
1: AI1
2: AI2
Torque upper limit source 3: AI3
A2-51
under speed control mode 4: PULSE setting
5: Communication setting
6: min(AI1,AI2)
7: max(AI1,AI2)
Digital setting of torque upper
A2-52 0.0%~200.0%
limit in speed control mode
Proportional gain of
A2-55 0~60000
excitation regulation
Integral gain of excitation
A2-56 0~60000
regulation
Torque regulation
A2-57 0~60000
proportional gain
Integral gain of torque
A2-58 0~60000
regulation

4-2-20. Group A4 Password countdown lock (supported by 3720 and above versions)
Parameter Name Range
A4-00 Parameter group access verification 0～65000
A4-01 Parameter group lock password 0～65000
A4-02 Total power on time before locking 0～7200
A4-03 Remaining time of power on locking 0～7200
On the A4-00 password verification input interface, enter 0. At this point, A4-01 is 0, indicating successful
verification. You can view the settings for other parameters in the A4 group.
Set A4-01 and A4-02, for example, A4-01=12345, A4-02=3, A4-03 (read-only parameter) automatically

167
becomes 3, and the countdown function is turned on. As long as the total power on time before locking is set to
A4-02, the countdown function will be activated.
When the remaining locking time is 0, an ERR-56 fault is reported. And the fault cannot be eliminated. After
powering on again, immediately sound the alarm. Cannot start. When entering Group A4 again, you need to
enter the password you previously set to access it. After setting A4-02 to 0, the fault can be eliminated by
pressing the STOP button on the panel.
Notes:
1. Group A4 parameters cannot be written in communication
2. A4-01 cannot be read by communication
3. A4 group parameters cannot be initialized
4. Err56 cannot be cleared when A4-02 > 0

4-2-21. Group A9 Communication address mapping (supported by 3720 and above versions)

Parameter Name Setting range

0: Communication mapping
function doesn't take effect
A9-00 Communication address mapping selection
1: Communication mapping
function takes effect
A9-01 Communication address mapping primitive 1 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-02 Communication address mapping primitive 2 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-03 Communication address mapping primitive 3 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-04 Communication address mapping primitive 4 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-05 Communication address mapping primitive 5 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-06 Communication address mapping primitive 6 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-07 Communication address mapping primitive 7 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-08 Communication address mapping primitive 8 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-09 Communication address mapping primitive 9 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-10 Communication address mapping primitive 10 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-11 Communication address mapping primitive 11 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-12 Communication address mapping primitive 12 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-13 Communication address mapping primitive 13 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-14 Communication address mapping primitive 14 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-15 Communication address mapping image 1 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-16 Communication address mapping image 2 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-17 Communication address mapping image 3 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-18 Communication address mapping image 4 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-19 Communication address mapping image 5 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-20 Communication address mapping image 6 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-21 Communication address mapping image 7 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-22 Communication address mapping image 8 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-23 Communication address mapping image 9 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-24 Communication address mapping image 10 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-25 Communication address mapping image 11 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-26 Communication address mapping image 12 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-27 Communication address mapping image 13 0x0000~0xFFFF

168
 A9-28 Communication address mapping image 14 0x0000~0xFFFF
A9-29 Reserve
This set of communication address mapping parameters is used together with Modbus communication , which is
applicable to the situation that the original inverter has been discontinued or needs to be replaced, and the PLC
program cannot be modified.
For example, the frequency communication address of the Xinje VB5N frequency converter is H2001, and the
communication address of VH6 is H1000. Without changing the slave address in the control system, the VH6
frequency converter supports communication address mapping function and can perform normal
communication. If communication control commands are used, it is necessary to understand whether the
corresponding BIT bit meanings correspond. For example, VB5N gives a command to write A to
communication address 2000H as a fault reset command, and VH6 gives a command to write 7 to
communication address 1100H as a fault reset command. The specific explanation is as follows:
When the A9-00 parameter is set to 1 and the communication mapping function is enabled, data can only be
read and written through the mapping addresses set in A9-01~A9-14. If the communication address in the data
frame doesn't match the address values set in A9-01~A9-14, the frequency converter will report a
communication address error in the reply frame, resulting in abnormal communication control.
For example: The original control system requires communication start stop and a given frequency. The
communication frequency address is 0x2000, and the communication start stop control address is 0x2001.
A9-00 is set to 1, A9-01 is set to 0x2000, A9-02 is set to 0x2001, A9-15 is set to 0x1000 (communication
frequency address of this inverter), and A9-16 is set to 0x1100 (start stop control address of this inverter). At
this point, it is possible to control the corresponding address of the frequency converter without changing the
control system program.
Write 50.00Hz data frame: 01 06 20 00 27 10 97 36.
Start stop frequency converter data frame: 01 06 20 01 00 01 12 0A.

4-2-22. Group AD AIAO correction parameters

Parameter Name Range
AD-00 AI1 measured voltage 1 0.500V~4.000V
AD-01 AI1 display voltage 1 0.500V~4.000V
AD-02 AI1 measured voltage 2 6.000V~9.999V
AD-03 AI1 display voltage 2 6.000V~9.999V
AD-04 AI2 measured voltage 1 0.500V~4.000V
AD-05 AI2 display voltage 1 0.500V~4.000V
AD-06 AI2 measured voltage 2 6.000V~9.999V
AD-07 AI2 display voltage 2 6.000V~9.999V
AD-08 AI3 measured voltage 1 -9.999V~9.999V
AD-09 AI3 display voltage 1 -9.999V~9.999V
AD-10 AI3 measured voltage 2 -9.999V~9.999V
AD-11 AI3 display voltage 2 -9.999V~9.999V
This group of function codes is used to correct the analog input AI to eliminate the influence of bias and gain of
the analog input.
This group of function parameters have been corrected before leaving the factory, and when the factory value is
restored, it will return to the factory corrected value. Generally, there is no need for correction in the application
site.
The measured voltage refers to the actual voltage measured by the multimeter and other measuring instruments,

169
and the displayed voltage refers to the voltage display value sampled by the frequency converter. See the
voltage (U0-26, U0-27, U0-28) before AI correction of U0 group.
When correcting, input two voltage values at each AI input port, and input the values measured by the
multimeter and the values read by U0 group into the above function code, then the inverter will automatically
correct the AI bias and gain.
For the case that the user given voltage and the actual sampling voltage of the converter don't match, the field
correction method can be adopted to make the sampling value of the converter consistent with the expected
value. Taking AI1 as an example, the field correction method is as follows:
Given AI1 voltage signal (about 2V)
The actual measurement of AI1 voltage value is saved in AD-00, U0-26 is saved in AD-01.
Given AI1 voltage signal (about 8V)
The actual measurement of AI1 voltage value is saved in AD-02, U0-26 is saved in AD-03.
When correcting AI2 and AI3, the actual sampling voltage viewing positions are U0-27 and U0-28 respectively.
For AI1 and AI2, 2V and 8V are recommended as the correction points, and for AI3, -8V and 8V points are
recommended as the correction points.

Parameter Name Range

AD-12 AO1 target voltage 1 0.500V~4.000V
AD-13 AO1 measured voltage 1 0.500~4.000V
AD-14 AO1 target voltage 2 6.000V~9.999V
AD-15 AO1 measured voltage 2 6.000V~9.999V
AD-16 AO2 target voltage 1 0.500V~4.000V
AD-17 AO2 measured voltage 1 0.500~4.000V
AD-18 AO2 target voltage 2 6.000V~9.999V
AD-19 AO2 measured voltage 2 6.000V~9.999V
This group of function codes is used to correct the AO of analog output to eliminate the influence of bias and
gain of analog output.
This group of function parameters have been corrected before leaving the factory, and when the factory value is
restored, it will return to the factory corrected value. Generally, there is no need for correction in the application
site.

4-2-23. Group U0 Monitor parameters

Parameter Name Min unit
U0-00 Operation frequency (Hz) 0.01Hz
U0-01 Setting frequency (Hz) 0.01Hz
U0-02 Bus voltage (V) 0.1V
U0-03 Output current (A) 0.01A
U0-04 Output voltage (V) 1V
U0-05 Output torque (%) Percentage output value of motor rated torque 0.1%
U0-06 Output power (kW) 0.1kW
Monitor the frequency, bus voltage, current, torque, and output power parameters of the frequency converter
during operation.

Parameter Name Min unit

U0-07 X input state 1
Displays the current X terminal input status value. DX corresponds to the virtual X terminal state. After

170
hexadecimal conversion to binary data, each bit corresponds to an X input signal. 1 indicates that the input is a
high-level signal, and 0 indicates that the input is a low-level signal. The corresponding relationship between
each bit and input terminal is as follows:

Parameter Name Min unit

U0-08 Y output state 0x0000～0x03FF
Displays the current Y terminal output status value. After hexadecimal conversion to binary data, each bit
corresponds to an output signal. 1 indicates that the input is a high-level signal, and 0 indicates that the input is
a low-level signal. The corresponding relationship between each bit and input terminal is as follows:

Parameter Name Min unit

U0-09 AI1 voltage (V)/current (mA) 0.00V～10.57V /0.00mA～20.00mA
U0-10 AI2 voltage (V)/current (mA) 0.00V～10.57V /0.00mA～20.00mA

171
 Parameter Name Min unit
U0-11 AI3 voltage (V)/current (mA) 0.00V～10.57V /0.00mA～20.00mA
When the input is analog voltage or analog current, the displayed values of the monitoring parameters are all
voltage values, and the current value is the displayed value multiplied by 2.
Example: AI1 inputs 5V analog voltage, U0-09 should display 5V, AI2 inputs 10MA analog current, U0-10
displays 5, and the calculated analog current is 10mA.

Parameter Name Min unit

U0-12 PULSE input frequency 0.00kHz～50.00KHz
U0-13 PULSE input frequency (Hz) 0～65535Hz
Display the high-speed pulse sampling frequency of X4 terminal.

Parameter Name Min unit

U0-14 PID setting 0～65535
U0-15 PID feedback 0～65535
PID setting = PID setting (percentage) *PA-20
PID feedback = PID feedback (percentage) *PA-20

Parameter Name Min unit

U0-16 Load speed display 0～65535
The set load speed is displayed during shutdown and the running load speed is displayed during operation. The
value displayed by the parameter can be adjusted according to P8-21 and P8-22. See Group P8 parameter
description for details.

Parameter Name Min unit

U0-17 Feedback speed (Hz) -600.00Hz～600.00Hz
Display the given frequency.
Greater than 320.00Hz, the decimal point becomes one digit.

Parameter Name Min unit

U0-18 Actual encoder feedback speed (Hz) -600.00Hz～600.00Hz
Display the actual encoder feedback motor speed, unit: Hz.

Parameter Name Min unit

U0-19 Line speed 0~65535m/Min
Display X4 high-speed pulse sampling line speed, which is calculated from the actual number of sampling
pulses per minute and A0-02 function code.

Parameter Name Min unit

U0-20 PLC stage 0～15
When using the simple PLC function, monitor the current number of operating segments, parameter PB group
parameter settings.

Parameter Name Min unit

U0-21 Count value 0～65535
U0-22 Length value 0～65535
When using the inverter counting and length fixing functions to view the count value and length value received

172
by the sent frequency converter. Refer to A0 group parameter description.

Parameter Name Min unit

0.01～maximum output
U0-23 Main frequency A display
frequency Hz
0.01～maximum output
U0-24 Auxiliary frequency B display
frequency Hz
Display the set values of main and auxiliary frequency.

Parameter Name Min unit

U0-25 Communication setting -100.00%～100.00%
Display the value written in the H1000 through modbus communication.

Parameter Name Min unit

0.000V/0.01mA～
U0-26 AI1 voltage(V) before calibration
10.570V/20.000mA
0.000V/0.01mA～
U0-27 AI2 voltage(V)/current (mA) before calibration
10.570V/20.000mA
0.000V/0.01mA～
U0-28 AI3 voltage(V) before calibration
10.570V/20.000mA
Display the actual value of analog input sampling voltage / current.
The actually used voltage / current has been linearly corrected to make the deviation between the sampled
voltage / current and the actual input voltage / current smaller.
Monitor U0-09, U0-10, U0-11 for the actually used correction voltage / current.

Parameter Name Min unit

U0-29 Remaining running time 0.0Min～6500.0Min
Display the remaining running time when the timing function is running. Refer to PC group timing function
parameter settings.

Parameter Name Min unit

U0-30 Present power on time 0～65000Min
U0-31 Present operation time 0～6500.0Min
Display the power on time and running time of this power on. This parameter is not memorized when power is
off.

Parameter Name Min unit

U0-33 Present fault 1～56
The current fault code is displayed.

Parameter Name Min unit

U0-35 Target torque (%) -200.0%～200.0%
U0-36 Torque upper limit -200.0%～200.0%
When PF-01 selects 0, U0-35 is the same value with PF-02.
In torque mode, display the current torque value.
In speed mode, display the given torque upper limit value.

173
 Parameter Name Min unit
U0-37 Synchronous motor rotor position 0.1～360.0°
Displays the current position of the synchronous motor rotor.

Parameter Name Min unit

U0-38 Rotary transformer position 0～4095
U0-39 ABZ position 1～65535
Display the current position signal of rotary transformer.
The display encoder displays the AB phase pulse count of the current ABZ or UVW encoder.

Parameter Name Min unit

U0-41 Power factor angle -
Display the current operating power factor angle.

Parameter Name Min unit

U0-42 Setting frequency (%) -100.00%～100.00%
U0-43 Operation frequency (%) -100.00%～100.00%
The current setting frequency and operating frequency are displayed, and 100.00% corresponds to the maximum
frequency of the inverter P0-13.

Parameter Name Min unit

0~Rated voltage of
U0-44 VF separate target voltage
motor V
0~Rated voltage of
U0-45 VF separate output voltage
motor V
Display the target output voltage and current actual output voltage when running in VF separation state. Refer
to Group P5 VF separation parameter settings.

Parameter Name Min unit

U0-46 Z signal counter 0～65535
Displays the Z-phase pulse count of the current ABZ or UVW encoder.
It can help detect whether the encoder is installed normally.
When the encoder rotates one circle in the forward direction, the value of U0-46 increases by 1.
When the encoder rotates one circle in the reverse direction, the value of U0-46 decreases by 1.

Parameter Name Min unit

0: motor 1
U0-47 Motor serial number
1: motor 2
Display the current motor parameter selection.

Parameter Name Min unit

U0-53 Encoder feedback value 1 0x0000～0xFFFF
U0-54 Encoder feedback value 2 0x0000～0xFFFF
U0-55 Encoder feedback value 3 0x0000～0xFFFF
U0-56 Encoder feedback value 4 0x0000～0xFFFF

174
PC-70 set to 0: display as hexadecimal number. set to 1: display as decimal number
Hex: U0-53~U0-56 form INT64 data. U0-53 is high bit and U0-56 is low bit.
For example, data: 0xFF1A2B3C4D5E6F, U0-53=H.00FF, U0-54= H.1A2B, U0-55= H.3C4D, U0-56 =H.5E6F.
Dec: Display range:±1016 -1. U0-53 is high bit and U0-56 is low bit.
There are 5-digit 7-segment LED digital tubes on the inverter operation panel.The highest bit is sign bit.
If it is a positive number, the sign bit doesn't display.
If it is a negative number, the sign bit displayed “-”.
For example, data: -112233445667788, U0-53 displays “-1122”, U0-54 displays “-3344”, U0-55 displays “-
5566”, and U0-56 displays “-7788”.
When PC-71 is set to 1 (only valid once, that is, the rising edge is valid), U0-53~U0-56 will be cleared to 0.

Parameter Name Min unit

Cumulative operation time of frequency converter (supported
U0-65 0～3600s
by 3720 and above versions)
When U0-65 reaches 3600s, U0-65 will be cleared, and P8-10 adds 1h.

Parameter Name Min unit

Speed/RPM
corresponding to 0 to
U0-66 Motor speed (supported by 3720 and above versions)
maximum output
frequency
U0-67 Communication expansion card model -
Display the frequency conversion operation status, with the displayed value converted from hexadecimal to
binary. After converting hexadecimal to binary data, each bit corresponds to an output signal. A value of 1
indicates that the input is a high-level signal, and a value of 0 indicates that the input is a low-level signal. The
correspondence between each bit and the input terminal is shown in the table above.

Parameter Name Min unit

U0-68 Communication expansion card version -
Versions below 3720:
Bit0: Running status
Bit1: Running direction
Bit2: Fault
3720 and above
versions:
Bit0:
Running/Shutdown
U0-69 Communication expansion card VFD state Bit1: Forward/Reverse
Bit2:Is there a
malfunction
Bit3:Frequency Arrival
Bit4: Reserved
Bit5: Reserved
Bit6: Reserved
Bit7: Reserved
Bit8~Bit15:Fault codes

175
Display the frequency conversion operation status, with the displayed value converted from hexadecimal to
binary. After converting hexadecimal to binary data, each bit corresponds to an output signal. A value of 1
indicates that the input is a high-level signal, and a value of 0 indicates that the input is a low-level signal. The
correspondence between each bit and the input terminal is shown in the table above.
Fault meaning explanation: U0-69=H.2C04, hexadecimal 2C converted to decimal is 44, representing the
current fault code ERR44, hexadecimal 04 converted to binary is 100, representing the current fault state.

Parameter Name Min unit

U0-70 Communication feedback motor speed /0.01Hz unit: 0.01Hz
Display the motor speed fed back by communication, unit:0.01 Hz.

Parameter Name Min unit

0~Rated speed of
U0-71 Communication feedback motor speed /RPM
motor
Display the motor speed fed back by communication, unit: rpm.

Parameter Name Min unit

U0-72 Special current display for communication card -
U0-73 Communication card error status -
U0-74 Motor actual output torque -200.00%～200.00%
The output torque is based on the rated current of the inverter, and the maximum value corresponds to P6-11
and PF-02.

Parameter Name Min unit

U0-75 Fault code 1~56
Bit0:
Shutdown/Running
Bit1: Normal operation
(non jog, tuned)
Bit2: Jogging Run
Bit3: Tune Run
Bit4: Run jog
Bit5~Bit6：
0: Constant speed
1: Acceleration
U0-76 Operation status word 2: Slow down
Bit7: PLC operation
Bit8: PID running
Bit9: Torque Control
Bit10: Set frequency
direction
0: Positive direction
1: In the opposite
direction
Bit11: Current
frequency running

176
 Parameter Name Min unit
direction
0: Positive direction
1: In the opposite
direction
Bit12: Reverse flag in
progress
0: There is currently no
reverse
1: Reverse in progress
Bit13: Reverse the final
frequency setting
0: Positive direction
1: In the opposite
direction
Bit14~Bit15: Reserved

4-2-24. Group U4 Communication monitoring parameters

Parameter Name Unit
Speed command (Communication
U4-00 0.01%
frequency setting value)
Bit Description
1: Forward command
2: Reverse command
Communication control command 3: Jog forward command
U4-01 4: Jog reverse command
word BIT0~BIT7
5: Decelerate and shut down
according to the shutdown mode
function code.
6: Free shutdown

177
 Parameter Name Unit
7: Fault reset
Fault code sent by expansion
BIT8~BIT15
card fault
U4-02 Communication control DO -
U4-03 Communication control FMP -
U4-04 Communication control AO1 -
U4-05 Communication control AO2 -
Torque command (Communication
U4-06 0.01%
torque setting value)
Speed command (communication
U4-07 1RMP
frequency setting value)
U4-08 Expansion card model -
U4-09 Expansion card version number -
U4-10 Expansion card error status -
The fixed TPDO parameters U4-00, U4-01, U4-08, U4-09, U4-10, U4-03, and U4-06 are the TPDO parameters
mapped by the EtherCAT communication expansion card. These 7 parameters cannot be freely configured by
the user and correspond to TPDO1~TPDO7, respectively. The original data written by the main station can be
viewed through the corresponding function codes of the U4 group of frequency converters.
The RPDO parameters are fixed at U0-67, U0-68, U0-69, U0-70, U0-74, U0-00, U0-55, and U0-56, which
correspond to RPDO1 to RPDO8 for the EtherCAT communication expansion card mapping. They cannot be
freely configured by the user. The original data sent by the slave station can be viewed through the U-group
function code corresponding to the frequency converter. The last four parameters can be freely configured by
the user on the upper computer, such as RPDO9~RPDO12 configured as U0-53 to U0-56 encoder position
counting.

TPDO parameters:
Mapping Written
Parameter Name Range
parameters parameters
Speed command
(communication
PE-00 U4-00 Unit: 0.01%
frequency setting
value)
Bit Description
1: Forward command
2: Reverse command
3: Jog forward command
4: Jog reverse command
Communication BIT0~
TPDO1~ 5: Slow down and stop
PE-01 U4-01 control command BIT7
TPDO7 according to the stop mode
word
function code.
6: Free shutdown
7: Fault reset
BIT8~ Fault code sent by
BIT15 expansion card fault
Expansion card
PE-02 U4-08 -
model
Expansion card
PE-03 U4-09 -
version number

178
 Mapping Written
Parameter Name Range
parameters parameters
Expansion card
PE-04 U4-10 -
error status
Communication
PE-05 U4-03 -
control FMP
Torque command
(Communication
PE-06 U4-06 Unit: 0.01%
torque setting
value)
TPDO8~
Cannot be configured
TPDO12

RPDO parameters
Mapping Read
Parameter Name Range
parameters parameters
Communication expansion card
RPDO1 PE-20 U0-67 Unit：0.01%
model
Communication expansion card
RPDO2 PE-21 U0-68
version
Bit0:
Shutdown/Running
Bit1: Forward/Reverse
Bit2: Is there a
malfunction
Communication expansion card
RPDO3 PE-22 U0-69 Bit3: Frequency Arrival
VFD state
Bit4: Reserved
Bit5: Reserved
Bit6: Reserved
Bit7: Reserved
Bit8~Bit15: Fault codes
RPDO4 PE-23 U0-70 Motor feedback speed 1 Unit: 0.1Hz
RPDO5 PE-24 U0-74 output torque Unit: 0.0%
RPDO6 PE-25 U0-00 Operation frequency Unit: 0.01%
RPDO7 PE-26 U0-55 Encoder position high
RPDO8 PE-27 U0-56 Encoder position low
RPDO9~RPDO12 Users can freely configure
EtherCAT communication mode can give speed command and torque command.
U4-00 is speed command, unit: 0.01%.
U4-06 is torque command, unit: 0.01%.
Parameter setting table in speed mode:
Parameter Name Setting value
P0-02 Operation command channel selection 2: Communication
P0-03 Main frequency source A selection 6: Communication setting
P6-10 Speed control (drive) torque upper limit source 5: Communication setting

179
 P9-00 Serial communication protocol selection 1: Extension card
P9-02 Communication baud rate 6: 115200 BPS
PF-00 Torque control 0: Speed control
In the speed control mode, the speed command is given through U4-00 mapped by TPDO. If the upper limit
value of driving torque is modified through TPDO in speed mode, P6-10 can be set to 5, and the torque value is
given through mapped U4-06.

Parameter setting table in torque mode:

Parameter Name Setting value
1: No speed sensor vector
First motor control mode(torque mode is only valid in control (SVC)
P0-01
vector control mode) 2: With speed sensor vector
control (FVC)
P0-02 Operation command channel selection 2: Communication
P0-03 Main frequency source A selection 6: Communication setting
P9-00 Serial communication protocol selection 1: Extension card
P9-02 Communication baud rate 6: 115200BPS
PF-00 Torque control 1: Torque control
PF-01 Upper limit source of driver torque 5: Communication setting
PF-03 Torque control forward direction max frequency source 5: Communication setting
PF-05 Torque control reverse direction max frequency source 5: Communication setting
In the torque control mode, the torque command is given by U4-06 mapped by TPDO. If the forward / reverse
maximum frequency value is modified by TPDO in the torque mode, PF-03/PF-05 can be set to 5, and the
frequency value is given by mapped U4-00.

180
5. EMC
5-1. EMC compliant installation guidelines
The output of the inverter is PWM wave, which will produce electromagnetic noise when it works. In order to
reduce the interference of the inverter to the outside world, this section introduces the installation method of
EMC in noise suppression, field wiring, grounding, leakage current, power filter use and so on.

5-1-1. Noise suppression

 Noise type
The noise generated by the operation of the frequency converter may affect the nearby instruments and
equipment. The degree of influence is related to the control system of the frequency converter, the anti-noise
ability of the equipment, the wiring environment, the safe distance, the grounding method and other factors. The
types of noise include: electrostatic induction, circuit transmission, space transmission, electromagnetic
induction, etc.

 Basic countermeasures for noise suppression

Noise
propagation Solution
path
When the grounding wire of peripheral equipment and the wiring of frequency converter form a
② closed loop, the leakage current of the inverter grounding wire will cause the equipment to
misbehave. At this time, if the equipment is not grounded, it will reduce the misoperation.
When the power supply of peripheral equipment and the power supply of frequency converter
share the same system, the noise generated by the frequency converter propagates against the
③ power line, which will disturb other equipment in the same system. The following measures can
be taken to suppress the noise: installing electromagnetic noise filter at the input end of the
frequency converter. Use isolation transformer or power filter to isolate other equipment.
(1) Equipment and signal lines that are easy to be disturbed should be installed as far away from
④⑤⑥
the frequency converter as possible. The signal line should use shielded wire, the shielding layer

181
 should be single ended grounding, and should be as far away from the inverter and its input and
output lines as possible. If the signal wire must intersect with the strong current cable, the two
should be kept orthogonal.
(2) High frequency noise filters (ferrite common mode choke) are installed at the root of the
input and output sides of the inverter, which can effectively suppress the RF interference of the
power line.
(3) The motor cable should be placed in the barrier with larger thickness, such as in the pipe
with thickness (more than 2mm) or embedded in the cement tank. The power line is sheathed in
the metal pipe and grounded with the shielded wire (the motor cable adopts 4-core cable, one of
which is grounded on the inverter side and the other side is connected to the motor shell).
Avoid parallel wiring or binding of strong and weak current wires. It should be far away from
the installation equipment of frequency converter as far as possible, and its wiring should be far
away from the input and output lines of frequency converter. Shielded wire is used for signal
①⑦⑧
line and power line. For the equipment with strong electric field or magnetic field, pay attention
to the relative installation position with frequency converter, and keep the distance and
orthogonality.

5-1-2. Field wiring and grounding

1. The cable (U, V, W terminal outgoing line) from the frequency converter to the motor should avoid parallel
wiring with the power line (R, S, T or L, N terminal input line) as far as possible. Keep a distance of more than
30cm.
2. The three motor wires of inverter output U, V and W terminals shall be placed in metal tube or metal wiring
slot.
3. The control signal line shall be shielded cable, and the shielding layer shall be connected with the PE end of
the frequency converter, and the single end grounding near the side of the frequency converter.
4. The PE end grounding cable of frequency converter shall not borrow the grounding wire of other equipment,
but must be directly connected with the ground.
5. The control signal line shall not be parallel to the strong current cable (R, S, T or L, N and U, V, W) for short
distance wiring, and shall not be bundled together. The distance above 20 ~ 60 cm (related to the strong current)
shall be maintained. If you want to intersect, you should cross each other vertically, as shown in the figure
below.

Power cable

Signal cable
6. Weak current grounding wires such as control signals and sensors must be grounded independently from
strong current grounding wires.
7. It is forbidden to connect other devices on the power input terminal (R, S, T or L, N) of frequency converter.

182
6. Model and dimension
6-1. VH6 series VFD electrical specification
Device Input power Input current Output current Matched
Voltage level VFD model
code capacity (KVA) (A) (A) motor (kW)
VH6-43P7-B 5.9 11 9 3.7
X1 VH6-45P5-B 8.9 14.6 13.0 5.5
VH6-47P5-B 11.0 20.5 17.0 7.5
VH6-4011-B 17.0 26.0 25.0 11.0
X2
VH6-4015-B 21.0 35.0 32.0 15.0
VH6-4018-B 24.0 38.5 37.0 18.5
X3 VH6-4022-B 30.0 46.5 45.0 22.0
VH6-4030-B 40.0 62.0 60.0 30.0
VH6-4037-B 63.0 69.0 75.0 37.0
X4 VH6-4045-B 81.0 89.0 90.0 45.0
VH6-4055-B 97.0 106.0 110.0 55.0
Three phase VH6-4075-B 127 139 152 75
380V X5 VH6-4090-B 150 164 176 90
50Hz/60Hz VH6-4110-B 179 196 210 110
VH6-4132 220 240 253 132
X6
VH6-4160 263 287 304 160
VH6-4185 293 343 360 185
X7 VH6-4200 334 365 377 200
VH6-4220 375 410 426 220
VH6-4250 404 441 465 250
X8
VH6-4280 453 495 520 280
VH6-4315 517 565 585 315
VH6-4355 565 617 650 355
X9
VH6-4400 629 687 725 400
VH6-4450 716 782 820 450

183
6-2. VH6 series VFD dimension
 VH6-43P7-B//VH6-45P5-B/VH6-47P5-B Unit: mm
110

202

55 14

MENU/ESC
JOG/REV

ENT/DATA

STOP
RUN REST
305

290

1.安装、运行前请务必阅读使用说明书,否则会有电击危险！
2.在通电状态下和切断电源15分钟以内，请勿拆下盖板！
3.进行维护、检查及接线时，请在切断输入侧和输出侧电源后，等待15分钟，
15 min 待电源指示灯彻底熄灭后开始作业。

184
 VH6-4011-B/VH6-4015-B Unit: mm

1.安装、运行前请务必阅读使用说明书,否则会有电击危险！
2.在通电状态下和切断电源15分钟以内，请勿拆下盖板！
3.进行维护、检查及接线时，请在切断输入侧和输出侧电源后，等待15分钟，
15 min 待电源指示灯彻底熄灭后开始作业。

150
228

120 27
11

MENU/ESC
JOG/REV

ENT/DATA

STOP
RUN REST
350

334
335

 VH6-4018-B/VH6-4022-B/VH6-4030-B Unit: mm

1.安装、运行前请务必阅读使用说明书,否则会有电击危险！
2.在通电状态下和切断电源15分钟以内，请勿拆下盖板！
3.进行维护、检查及接线时，请在切断输入侧和输出侧电源后，等待15分钟，
15 min 待电源指示灯彻底熄灭后开始作业。

150
228
120 27
11

MENU/ESC
JOG/REV

ENT/DATA

STOP
RUN REST
401
417
402

185
 VH6-4037-B/VH6-4045-B/VH6-4055-B Unit: mm

287.9
235.6
10

213.9
11

188
∅108
∅1
490
510

0
∅1

 VH6-4075-B/VH6-4090-B/VH6-4110-B Unit：mm

306
276.5
229 R5
12
11

R9
655
705

683

Ø25 R5

35 240
260.5
290

186
 VH6-4132/VH6-4160 Unit:mm
371 400
9

915
890
9
320

 VH6-4185/VH6-4200/VH6-4220 Unit:mm

300
553.5
240
13 524
1025

1065

1015
1135

187
 VH6-4250/VH6-4280 Unit: mm

330 590
235
13 560.5

1162.5

1186.5
1240
1310

250

 VH6-4315/VH6-4355/VH6-4400/VH6-4450 Unit: mm

340 597
240
13 567.5
1280

1345

1295
1415

200

188
 Dimension drawing of operation panel mounting bracket

The gray area is the hollowed out part, and the middle hollowed out area is 84.6 × 101.5mm. The diameter of
the four corner hollowed out area is 4.34 circle, and M4 screws and nuts are put in to fix the bracket on the
panel.

6-3. Accessories selection guide

6-3-1. Accessories functions
Name Functions
Cable A device for transmitting electrical signals
To prevent electric shock and the short circuit to ground which may cause leakage current fire
Circuit (Please select leakage circuit breaker for inverter device and with function of suppressing high
breaker harmonic. Rated sensitive current of circuit breaker shall be more than 30mA for one frequency
converter.)
In order to effectively cut off the input power of the inverter in case of system failure, an
AC contactor electromagnetic contactor is installed on the input side to control the on-off of the main circuit
power supply, so as to ensure safety.
Input reactor It is suitable for improving the power factor of the input side of the inverter and restraining the
DC reactor high-order harmonic current.
To suppress the electromagnetic interference of the inverter transmitted to the public power grid
Input filter through the input power line, please install it as close to the input terminal side of the inverter as
possible.
It mainly plays the role of overload protection. When the input current of the frequency
Fuse converter rises to a certain height and heat, the fuse itself will fuse to cut off the current, which
can protect the safe operation of the frequency converter.
Braking The regenerative energy of motor is consumed by resistor or resistor unit to shorten deceleration
resistor time and avoid over-voltage alarm of frequency converter.
Suppress the interference generated from the output side wiring of the inverter. Please install it
Output filter
close to the output terminal of frequency converter.
It is used to extend the effective transmission distance of the frequency converter and effectively
Output choke suppress the instantaneous high voltage generated when the IGBT module of the frequency
converter is switched.

189
6-3-2. Cable selection

Power cable
 The size of input power cable and motor cable shall comply with local regulations.
 The input power cable and motor cable must be able to withstand the corresponding load current.
 The maximum rated temperature margin of motor cable under continuous working condition should not be
lower than 70℃.
 The conductivity of PE grounding conductor is the same as that of phase conductor.
 For EMC requirements, please refer to the chapter "EMC".
 In order to meet the EMC requirements of CE, symmetrical shielded motor cable must be used.
 Four core cable can be used for input cable, but shielded symmetrical cable is recommended. Compared
with four core cable, using symmetrical shielded cable can reduce the loss of motor cable and
electromagnetic radiation.

Note: If the conductivity of the shielding layer of the motor cable cannot meet the requirements, a separate PE
conductor must be used.

In order to protect the conductor, when the shielding wire and the phase conductor are made of the same
material, the cross-sectional area of the shielding wire must be the same as that of the phase conductor, so as to
reduce the grounding resistance and improve the impedance continuity.
In order to effectively suppress the emission and conduction of radio frequency interference, the conductivity of
the shielding wire must be at least 1/10 of that of the phase conductor. For copper or aluminum shielding, this
requirement is very easy to meet. The minimum requirements of inverter motor cable are shown in the figure
below. The cable contains a spiral copper strip. The tighter the shielding layer is, the better, because the tighter
it is, the more effectively it can suppress the electromagnetic interference radiation.

Control cable
All analog control cables and cables used for frequency input must use shielded cables. The analog signal cable
uses twisted pair shielded cable. Each signal uses a separate pair of shielded twisted pairs. Don't use the same

190
ground wire for different analog signals.
For low-voltage digital signal, it is better to choose double layer shielded cable, but single shielded or
unshielded twisted pair can also be used, but for frequency signal, shielded cable must be used.

Relay cables need to be shielded with metal braid.

The keyboard needs to use network cable. For the electromagnetic environment, it is recommended to use
shielded network wire.
Note:
(1) Analog and digital signals are routed separately using different cables.
(2) Before connecting the input power cable of the inverter, check the insulation of the input power cable
according to the local regulations.

Recommended cable size (mm²) Terminal Tightening

VFD model screw torque
RST/UVW Ground cable Brake resistor Control circuit specifications (N.M)
VH6-43P7-B 3*1.5 1.5 1.5 0.75 M4 1.2
VH6-45P5-B 3*4 2.5 2.5 0.75 M4 1.2
VH6-47P5-B 3*6 2.5 4 0.75 M4 1.2
VH6-4011-B 3*6 4 4 0.75 M5 2.3
VH6-4015-B 3*6 4 4 0.75 M5 2.3
VH6-4018-B 3*10 10 10 1.0 M6 2.5
VH6-4022-B 3*16 10 10 1.0 M6 2.5
VH6-4030-B 3*25 16 25 1.0 M6 2.5
VH6-4045-B 3*35 16 16 2.0 M8 8
VH6-4055-B 3*50 25 25 2.0 M8 8
VH6-4075-B 3*50 25 50 2.0 M10 20
VH6-4090-B 3*70 35 70 2.0 M10 20
VH6-4110-B 3*100 50 100 2.0 M10 20
VH6-4132 3*100 50 100 2.0 M10 20
VH6-4132 3*100 50 100 2.0 M10 20
VH6-4160 3*100 50 100 2.0 M10 20
VH6-4185 3*150 50 100 2.0 M12 36
VH6-4200 3*150 50 100 2.0 M12 36
VH6-4220 3*150 50 100 2.0 M12 36
VH6-4250 3*185 70 150 2.0 M16 90
VH6-4280 3*185 70 150 2.0 M16 90

191
 VH6-4315 3*200 100 150 2.0 M16 90
VH6-4355 3*250 100 200 2.0 M16 90
VH6-4400 3*300 100 250 2.0 M16 90
VH6-4450 3*300 100 250 2.0 M16 90
Note:
(1) The data and models recommended in the table are for reference only.
(2) The premise of cable selection: the ambient temperature is 40 degrees under steady-state conditions, the
connection distance is below 100m and with the rated current.
Cable wiring
The routing of motor cable must be far away from the routing of other cables. The motor cables of several
inverters can be run side by side. It is suggested that the motor cable, input power cable and control cable
should be distributed in different trunking. The reason to avoid the side-by-side routing of other cables and
motor cables is that the du/dt output from the inverter will increase the electromagnetic interference to other
cables.
If the control cable and the power cable must be crossed, the angle between the control cable and the power
cable must be 90 degrees.
The cable trunking must be well connected and well grounded. Aluminum trunking can make local
equipotential.

Insulation inspection
Before operation, please check the insulation of motor and motor cable
(1) Make sure that the motor cable is connected to the motor, and then remove the motor from the output
terminal UVW of the inverter.
(2) Use a 500VDC megger to measure the insulation resistance between each phase conductor and the
protective grounding conductor. For the insulation resistance of the motor, please refer to the motor
manufacturer's instructions.
(3) If the inside of the motor is wet, the insulation resistance will decrease. If moisture is suspected, dry the
motor and measure again.

192
6-3-3. Selection guidance of circuit breaker, contactor and fuse
 In order to prevent the overload from damaging the inverter, it is necessary to add a fuse at the incoming
end.
 A manually operated power short circuit device (MCCB) needs to be installed between AC power supply
and frequency converter. The circuit breaker equipment must be able to be locked in the cut off position to
facilitate installation and maintenance. The capacity of the circuit breaker is generally 1.5-2 times of the
rated current of the inverter.
 In order to effectively cut off the input power of frequency converter in case of system failure, AC
contactor can be installed on the input side to control the on-off of main circuit power supply, so as to
ensure safety.
VFD rated current Rated current of
VFD model Breaker (A) Fuse (A)
(A) contactor (A)
VH6-43P7-B 11 16 18 20
VH6-45P5-B 20 20 18 2.5
VH6-47P5-B 32 32 25 4.0
VH6-4011-B 40 40 32 4.0
VH6-4015-B 50 50 38 6.0
VH6-4018-B 50 50 40 10
VH6-4022-B 63 63 50 10
VH6-4030-B 100 100 65 16
VH6-4037-B 69 100 80 125
VH6-4045-B 89 160 95 150
VH6-4055-B 106 160 115 200
VH6-4075-B 150 250 250 250
VH6-4090-B 176 250 330 275
VH6-4110-B 210 350 330 350
VH6-4132 253 300 400 400
VH6-4160 304 350 400 400
VH6-4185 360 400 500 500
VH6-4200 377 500 630 630
VH6-4220 426 500 630 630
VH6-4250 465 630 800 800
VH6-4280 520 630 800 800
VH6-4315 585 800 1000 1000
VH6-4355 650 800 1000 1000
VH6-4400 725 1000 1200 1200
VH6-4450 820 1000 1200 1200
Note: The parameters of the options in the table are ideal values, which can be adjusted according to the actual
situation, but try not to be lower than the parameters in the table.

6-3-4. Reactor selection guide

 In order to prevent the instantaneous large current from flowing into the input power circuit and damaging
the rectifier components when the power grid is under high voltage input, AC reactor should be connected
to the input side, which can also improve the power factor of the input side.
 When the distance between the inverter and the motor is more than 50 meters, the leakage current is large

193
 due to the parasitic capacitance effect of the long cable to the ground, and the inverter is prone to
over-current protection. At the same time, in order to avoid the insulation damage of the motor, the output
reactor must be added for compensation. When a frequency converter is equipped with multiple motors,
the sum of the cable length of each motor is considered as the total length of the motor cable. When the
total length is greater than 50m, the output reactor must be added at the output side of the frequency
converter.
 VH6 series frequency converters with power of 18.5kw and above have built-in DC reactors. DC reactor
can improve the power factor, avoid the damage of rectifier bridge caused by excessive input current of
frequency converter due to large capacity transformer, and avoid the damage of rectifier circuit caused by
grid voltage mutation or harmonic caused by phase controlled load.

VFD model VFD rated current (A) Input reactor Output reactor
VH6-43P7-B 11 ACLSG-15A/4.4V OCLSG-15A/4.4V
VH6-45P5-B 20 ACLSG-15A/4.4V OCLSG-15A/4.4V
VH6-47P5-B 32 ACLSG-20A/4.4V OCLSG-20A/4.4V
VH6-4011-B 40 ACLSG-30A/4.4V OCLSG-30A/4.4V
VH6-4015-B 50 ACLSG-40A/4.4V OCLSG-40A/4.4V
VH6-4018-B 50 ACLSG-45A/4.4V OCLSG-45A/4.4V
VH6-4022-B 63 ACLSG-60A/4.4V OCLSG-60A/4.4V
VH6-4030-B 100 ACLSG-75A/4.4V OCLSG-75A/4.4V
VH6-4037-B 69 ACLSG-90A/4.4V OCLSG-90A/2.2V
VH6-4045-B 89 ACLSG-110A/4.4V OCLSG-110A/2.2V
VH6-4055-B 106 ACLSG-150A/4.4V OCLSG-150A/2.2V
VH6-4075-B 150 ACLSG-180A/4.4V OCLSG-180A/2.2V
VH6-4090-B 176 ACLSG-215A/4.4V OCLSG-215A/2.2V
VH6-4110-B 210 ACLSG-250A/4.4V OCLSG-250A/2.2V
VH6-4132 253 ACLSG-300A/4.4V OCLSG-300A/2.2V
VH6-4160 304 ACLSG-350A/4.4V OCLSG-350A/2.2V
VH6-4185 360 ACLSG-400A/4.4V OCLSG-400A/2.2V
VH6-4200 377 ACLSG-500A/4.4V OCLSG-500A/2.2V
VH6-4220 426 ACLSG-500A/4.4V OCLSG-500A/2.2V
VH6-4250 465 ACLSG-550A/4.4V OCLSG-550A/2.2V
VH6-4280 520 ACLSG-600A/4.4V OCLSG-600A/2.2V
VH6-4315 585 ACLSG-650A/4.4V OCLSG-650A/2.2V
VH6-4355 650 ACLSG-700A/4.4V OCLSG-700A/2.2V
VH6-4400 725 ACLSG-800A/4.4V OCLSG-800A/2.2V
VH6-4450 820 ACLSG-950A/4.4V OCLSG-950A/2.2V

Note: The above options are of Zhengtai brand. Users can purchase them according to the model.

6-3-5. Brake resistor selection

When the inverter is slow down with large inertia load or needs to slow down rapidly, the motor will be in
power generation state. The load energy will be transmitted to the DC link of the converter through the inverter
bridge, which causes the voltage rise of the converter bus. When the value exceeds a certain value, the
frequency converter will report an over-voltage alarm. In order to prevent this phenomenon, the brake
components must be configured.

194
 1. The design, installation, commissioning and operation of the equipment must be carried out by
trained and qualified professionals.
2. In the process of work, all the provisions in the "warning" must be observed, otherwise serious
personal injury or heavy property loss may be caused.
3. Non professional construction personnel are not allowed to conduct wiring, otherwise the
circuit of frequency converter or brake options will be damaged.
4. Before connecting the brake resistor to the inverter, please read the instruction manual of the
brake resistor / brake unit carefully.
5. Don't connect the brake resistor to terminals other than PB and P +, and don't connect the brake
unit to terminals other than P+ and P-. Otherwise, the brake circuit and frequency converter may
be damaged and fire may be caused.
As shown in the wiring diagram, please connect the inverter with the braking resistance. If the
wiring is wrong, the inverter or other equipment may be damaged.

Brake resistor selection

When braking, the regenerative energy of the motor is almost all consumed on the braking resistance.
According to the formula:
U × U / R = Pb
U --- Braking voltage of system stable braking (different system U values are different, the default braking
voltage of VH6 series inverter is 700V, which can be adjusted through P7-59),
Pb ---Braking power.
Brake resistor power selection
Theoretically, the power of the braking resistor is the same as that of the braking power, but considering that the
derating is A. According to the formula:
A × Pr = Pb × D
A --- Generally, the value is about 50%,
Pr --- Resistor power,
D --- Braking frequency, that is, the proportion of regeneration process in the whole working process

Note: Value A is the derating coefficient of the braking resistance. A lower value A can ensure that the braking
resistance will not overheat. Users can appropriately increase value A when the braking is good, but it is better
not to exceed 50%, otherwise there will be the risk of fire caused by overheated resistance.

Typical braking frequency value

Unwinding and Accidental General

Common applications Elevator Centrifuge
winding braking load occasions
Braking frequency value 20% ~30% 20 ~30% 50%~60% 5% 10%

Brake resistor models

Recommended brake resistor specifications

VFD model Braking unit Brake resistor
Brake resistor (Ω) Brake resistor power (W)
quantity
VH6-43P7-B Built-in ≥150 800 1
VH6-45P5-B Built-in ≥100 1200 1
VH6-47P5-B Built-in ≥75 1600 1
VH6-4011-B Built-in ≥50 2400 1

195
 Recommended brake resistor specifications
VFD model Braking unit Brake resistor
Brake resistor (Ω) Brake resistor power (W)
quantity
VH6-4015-B Built-in ≥40 3000 1
VH6-4018-B Built-in ≥32 3750 1
VH6-4022-B Built-in ≥27 4500 1
VH6-4030-B Built-in ≥20 6000 1
VH6-4037-B Built-in ≥16 7000 1
VH6-4045-B Built-in ≥13 9000 1
VH6-4055-B Built-in ≥10.5 11000 1
VH6-4075-B Built-in ≥7.5 15000 1
VH6-4090-B Built-in ≥7.5 18000 1
VH6-4110-B Built-in ≥7.5 22000 1
VH6-4132 External ≥4 30000 1
VH6-4160 External ≥4 30000 1
VH6-4185 External ≥3 40000 1
VH6-4200 External ≥3 40000 1
VH6-4220 External ≥3 40000 1
VH6-4250 External ≥2 60000 1
VH6-4280 External ≥2 60000 1
VH6-4315 External ≥2 60000 1
VH6-4355 External ≥3 40000 2
VH6-4400 External ≥3 40000 2
VH6-4450 External ≥2 60000 2
Note:
(1) The values in the table are guidance data. Users can choose different resistance values and power
according to the actual situation (but the resistance value must not be less than the recommended value in
the table, and the power can be larger). The selection of braking resistance needs to be determined
according to the power generated by the motor in the practical application system, which is related to the
system inertia, deceleration time, energy of potential energy load, etc, customers need to choose according
to the actual situation. The greater the inertia of the system, the shorter the deceleration time and the more
frequent the braking, the greater the power and the smaller the resistance value of the braking resistor.
(2) The brake resistance cable shall be shielded cable.
(3) All resistors must be installed in a well ventilated place.
(4) It is suggested that the material of brake resistor accessories should be flame retardant, and the surface
temperature of the resistor is very high. Even the temperature of the air flowing out of the resistance can be
as high as several hundred degrees, so the material must be prevented from contacting with the resistance.
(5) The brake resistor must be connected to the PB and P + terminals, and the brake unit must be connected to
the P+ and P- terminals. As shown in the figure below:

196
197
7. Fault and solution
7-1. Fault alarm and solution
When the inverter is abnormal, the LED tube will display the function code and its content of the corresponding
fault, the fault relay will act, and the inverter will stop output. In case of fault, if the motor is rotating, it will
stop freely until it stops rotating. The possible fault types of frequency converter are shown in the table. When
the frequency converter fails, the user should first check according to the table, and record the failure
phenomenon in detail. If you need technical service, please contact our after-sales service and technical support
department or our agents.
Code Name Reason Solution
Err00 None
1. There is grounding or short circuit in the 1. Remove peripheral faults
output circuit of frequency converter 2. Tuning of motor parameters
2. The control mode is vector control 3. Increase acceleration time
without parameter tuning 4. Adjust the manual lifting torque or
3. The acceleration time is too short VF curve
Acceleration 4. Improper manual torque lifting or VF 5. Adjust the voltage to the normal
Err01
over current curve range
5. The voltage is low 6. Select speed tracking start or wait
6. Start the rotating motor until the motor stops
7. Sudden loading during acceleration 7. Cancel sudden loading
8. The selection of frequency converter is 8. Choose the frequency converter with
too small higher power level
1. There is grounding or short circuit in the 1. Remove peripheral faults
output circuit of frequency converter 2. Tuning of motor parameters
2. The control mode is vector control 3. Increase deceleration time
without parameter tuning 4. Adjust the voltage to the normal
Deceleration
Err02 3. The deceleration time is too short range
over current
4. The voltage is low 5. Cancel sudden loading
5. Sudden loading during deceleration 6. Add brake unit and resistor
6. There is no additional brake unit and
brake resistor
1. There is grounding or short circuit in the 1. Remove peripheral faults
output circuit of frequency converter 2. Tuning of motor parameters
2. The control mode is vector control 3. Adjust the voltage to the normal
Constant speed without parameter tuning range
Err03
over current 3. The voltage is low 4. Cancel sudden loading
4. Is there sudden load in operation 5. Choose the frequency converter with
5. The selection of frequency converter is higher power level
too small
1. High input voltage 1. Adjust the voltage to the normal
2. There is external force to drive the motor range
Acceleration during acceleration 2. Cancel additional force or add brake
Err04
overvoltage 3. Acceleration time too short resistor
4. There is no additional brake unit and 3. Increase acceleration time
brake resistor 4. Add brake unit and resistor
Deceleration 1. High input voltage 1. Adjust the voltage to the normal
Err05
overvoltage 2. There is external force to drive the motor range

198
Code Name Reason Solution
during deceleration 2. Cancel additional force or add brake
3. The deceleration time is too short resistor
4. There is no additional brake unit and 3. Increase deceleration time
brake resistor 4. Add brake unit and resistor
1. Adjust the voltage to the normal
1. High input voltage
Constant speed range
Err06 2. In the process of operation, there is
over voltage 2. Cancel additional force or add brake
external force to drive the motor
resistor
1. Adjust the voltage to the normal
Buffer resistance 1. Unstable supply voltage
Err07 range
overload fault 2. The main control board is abnormal
2. Contact us
1. Instantaneous power failure 1. Reset fault
2. The input voltage of frequency converter 2. Adjust the voltage to the normal
is not in the range of specification range
requirements 3. Contact us
Err08 Under voltage 3. Abnormal bus voltage
4. Abnormal rectifier bridge and buffer
resistance
5. Abnormal drive board
6. Abnormal control board
1. Whether the load is too large or the motor 1. Reduce the load and check the motor
stalls and mechanical condition
Err09 VFD overload
2. The selection of frequency converter is 2. Choose the frequency converter with
too small higher power level
1. Is the setting of motor protection 1. Set this parameter correctly
parameters appropriate 2. Reduce the load and check the motor
2. Whether the load is too large or the motor and mechanical condition
Err10 Motor overload
stalls 3. Choose the frequency converter with
3. The selection of frequency converter is higher power level
too small
1. Abnormal three-phase input power supply 1. Check and eliminate problems in
2. Abnormal drive board peripheral circuit
Err11 Input lack phase
3. Abnormal lightning protection board 2. Contact us
4. The main control board is abnormal
1. The lead from inverter to motor is 1. Remove peripheral faults
abnormal 2. Check whether the three-phase
Output lack 2. The three-phase output of inverter is winding of the motor is normal and
Err12
phase unbalanced when the motor is running remove the fault
3. Abnormal drive board 3. Contact us
4. Module is abnormal
1. The ambient temperature is too high 1. Reduce the ambient temperature
2. Air duct blocked 2. Clean the air duct
Overheated
Err13 3. The fan is damaged 3. Replace the fan
radiator / module
4. Module thermistor damaged 4. Replace the thermistor
5. Inverter module damaged 5. Replace inverter module
1. Replace the drive board or power
1. Abnormal drive board and power supply
Err14 Contactor fault board
2. The contactor is abnormal
2. Replace the contactor
Current detection 1. Check the Hall device 1. Replace Hall element
Err15
fault 2. Abnormal drive board 2. Replace the drive plate

199
Code Name Reason Solution
1. Set the motor parameters correctly
1. The motor parameters are not set
Motor tuning according to the name plate
Err16 according to the nameplate
fault 2. Check the lead from inverter to
2. Parameter tuning process timeout
motor
1. Encoder model mismatch 1. Set encoder type correctly
2. Encoder connection error 2. Remove circuit fault
Err17 Code disk failure
3. Encoder damaged 3. Change encoder
4. Abnormal PG card 4. Replace PG card
Short circuit fault
Err18 of motor to Motor short circuit to ground Replace motor or cable
ground
Confirm whether the load is separated
or whether the P7-61 and P7-62
Err19 Load drop VFD operation current is lower than P7-61
parameter settings conform to the
actual operating conditions
1. Whether the load is too large or the motor 1. Reduce the load and check the motor
Wave by wave
stalls and mechanical condition
Err20 current limiting
2. The selection of frequency converter is 2. Choose the frequency converter with
fault
too small higher power level
Re-determine the motor parameters,
Pole position The deviation between the motor
Err21 focusing on whether the motor rated
detection failed parameters and the actual value is too large
current is too small
1.Increase acceleration and
Brake resistance
Err23 Output current too high deceleration time
short circuit
2. Reduce the load
1. Excessive load 1. Reduce the load
Err26 SVC stall fault
2. Torque limit too small (P6-11) 2. Increase torque limit
1. Input the signal of external fault through
multi-function terminal X
Err43 External fault Reset and run again
2. Input external fault signal through virtual
Y function
1. The upper computer is not working 1. Check the upper computer wiring
properly 2. Check the communication cable
Communication
Err44 2. The communication cable is abnormal 3. Setting communication parameters
(timeout) fault
3. Communication parameter P9 group is correctly
set incorrectly
EEPROM read
Err45 EEPROM chip damaged Replace the main circuit board
write error
Operation time The accumulated running time reaches the Use the parameter initialization
Err46
arrival set value function to clear the record information
Power on time The accumulated power on time reaches the Use the parameter initialization
Err47
arrival set value function to clear the record information
1. Input user-defined fault 1 signal through
User defined multi-function terminal X
Err48 Reset and run again
fault 1 2. Input user defined fault 1 signal through
virtual IO function
1. Input user-defined fault 2 signal through
User defined multi-function terminal X
Err49 Reset and run again
fault 2 2. Input user defined fault 2 signal through
virtual IO function

200
 Code Name Reason Solution
PID feedback PID feedback is less than PA-27 setting Check PID feedback signal or set
Err50
lost in operation value PA-27 to an appropriate value
In the process of inverter operation, change
Switch motor in Switch the motor after the frequency
Err51 the current motor selection through the
operation converter stops
terminal
1. Setting encoder parameters correctly
2. Check whether the machine is
1. Encoder parameter setting incorrect
Speed offset too abnormal
Err52 2. Motor blocked
large 3. Check whether the wiring between
3. Incorrect UVW wiring
frequency converter and motor is
abnormal
1. Incorrect setting of encoding parameters 1. Setting encoder parameters correctly
Motor overspeed 2. The motor is not tuned 2. Tuning correctly
Err53
fault 3. Unreasonable setting of motor over speed 3. Set reasonable parameters according
detection parameters P7-63 and P7-64 to the actual situation
1. Check the wiring of temperature
sensor
Motor overheat 1. Loose wiring of temperature sensor
Err54 2. Reduce the carrier wave or take
fault 2. Motor temperature too high
other measures to dissipate the motor
heat.
1. Check the temperature sensor wiring
Motor
1. The temperature sensor wiring is loose and eliminate the fault
Err55 overtemperature
2. Motor temperature is too high 2. Reduce the carrier frequency or take
fault
other measures to cool the motor
Power on lock When the usage time arrives, please
Err56 Power on time arrival
time reached enter the password in A4-00.

7-2. Fault record query

This series of inverter records the fault codes and operation parameters of the inverter for the last three times.
Querying these information is helpful to find out the cause of the fault. All fault information is saved in P7
group parameters. Please refer to the keyboard operation method to enter P7 group parameters to check the
information.

7-3. Fault reset

In case of a failure of the inverter, to resume normal operation, you can select any of the following operations:
(1) When the fault code is displayed, press stop after confirming that it can be reset.
(2) Set any terminal of X1-X4 to reset stop input for external fault, and then disconnect from com terminal after
closing.
(3) Cut off the power supply.
Note:
(1) Before reset, the reason of the fault must be thoroughly identified and eliminated, otherwise, the permanent
damage of the frequency converter may be caused.
(2) If the fault cannot be reset, check the reason, and the continuous reset will damage the inverter.
(3) When overload and overheating protection acts, it shall be reset 5 minutes later.

201
7-4. VFD common fault analysis of frequency converter

7-4-1. Motor not rotate

202
7-4-2. Motor vibration

7-4-3. Over voltage

203
7-4-4. Motor overheat

204
7-4-5. Over current

205
7-4-6. VFD overheat

206
7-4-7. The motor stalls during acceleration and deceleration

7-4-8. Under voltage

207
8. Maintenance
8-1 Maintenance
The change of the operating environment of the inverter, such as the influence of temperature, humidity, smoke,
etc., and aging of the internal components of the converter, may lead to various faults of the inverter. Therefore,
the inverter must be checked daily during storage and use, and regular maintenance should be carried out.

8-1-1. Routine maintenance

When the frequency converter is turned on normally, please confirm the following items:
(1) Whether the motor has abnormal sound and vibration.
(2) Whether the frequency converter and motor have abnormal heating.
(3) Whether the ambient temperature is too high.
(4) Whether the load ammeter is the same as usual.
(5) Check whether the cooling fan of frequency converter operates normally.

8-2. Regular maintenance

8-2-1. Regular maintenance

When the frequency converter is regularly maintained and inspected, it is necessary to cut off the power supply,
and the inspection can only be carried out after the monitor is not displayed and the power indicator of the main
circuit is off. The inspection contents are shown in the table below.
Item Contents Solution
Screw of main circuit
terminal and control Whether the screws are loose Tighten with a screwdriver
circuit terminal
Blow off with 4 ~ 6kgcm2 dry compressed
Heat sink Whether there is dust
air
Blow off with 4 ~ 6kgcm2 dry compressed
PCB board Whether there is dust
air
Whether there is abnormal
sound and vibration, and the
Cooling fan Replace the fan
accumulated operation time is
up to 20000 hours
Blow off with 4 ~ 6kgcm2 dry compressed
Power element Whether there is dust
air
Aluminum Whether discoloration, odor, Replace the Aluminum electrolytic
electrolytic capacitor blistering capacitor

8-2-2. Regular maintenance

In order to make the inverter work normally for a long time, regular maintenance must be carried out according
to the service life of the internal electronic components of the inverter. The service life of electronic components

208
of frequency converter is different because of its different environment and conditions. As shown in the table
below, the maintenance period of frequency converter is only for users' reference.
Component name Standard replacement years
Cooling fan 2~3 years
Electrolytic capacitor 4~5 years
PCB board 5~8 years
Fuse 10 years

The service conditions for the replacement time of the above inverter components are as follows:
(1) Ambient temperature: annual average 30℃.
(2) Load factor: below 80%.
(3) Running time: less than 12 hours per day.

8-3. Warranty of frequency converter

The company will provide warranty service in case of the following conditions:

(1) The warranty scope only refers to the inverter body.

(2) In normal use, if the inverter fails or is damaged within 15 months, the company is responsible for the
warranty. reasonable maintenance fee will be charged for more than 15 months.
(3) Within 15 months, a certain maintenance fee shall also be charged in case of the following situations:
 Failure to follow the operation steps in the instruction manual will cause damage to the frequency
converter.
 Frequency converter damage caused by flood, fire, abnormal voltage, etc.
 Frequency converter damage caused by wrong connection cable, etc.
 Damage caused by using frequency converter for abnormal functions.
(4) The service fee shall be calculated according to the actual cost. If there is a contract, it shall be handled
according to the principle of contract priority.

209
Appendix
Appendix A. Extension card
VH6 series frequency converter can support abundant fieldbus and encoder types by connecting abundant
expansion cards. This chapter describes the installation and use of each expansion card.

Slot C
Slot A
Fieldbus
Standard IO card:
communication card:
VH6-A100
VH6-CN100
VH6-CC100
VH6-CC100

Slot D
Slot B PG card:
Standard IO card: VH6-DM100
VH6-B100 VH6-DM200

Appendix A-1. Extension card functions

Model Name Functions Suitable VFD
4 digital inputs, 1 digital output, 2 analog inputs, 1
VH6-A100 Standard IO card All series
analog output, 1 relay, RS485 communication
3 digital inputs, 1 digital output, 1 analog input, 1
VH6-B100 Extension IO card All series
analog output, 1 relay
CANopen
VH6-CN100 Support standard CANopen protocol All series
communication card
EtherCAT
VH6-CC100 Support standard EtherCAT protocol All series
communication card
It supports differential, NPN collector and push-pull
Multi-function coding signal input, and also supports 0-63 times
VH6-DM100 All series
incremental PG card frequency division output. The frequency division
signal supports differential and NPN collector
Simple incremental Support differential, NPN collector, push-pull coding
VH6-DM200 All series
PG card signal input, not support frequency division output
Appendix A-2. Extension card installation

Note:
(1) There will be an ABCD letter mark under each card slot of the inverter to identify the card slot type, which
corresponds to the ABCD on the expansion card. Only when the letters on the expansion card and under
the card slot of the inverter are the same, can they be installed and used normally.
(2) Each card slot has an anti misinsertion mechanism, and the expansion that doesn't match the card slot
cannot be installed normally.
(3) The screw post directly below the expansion card is used to ground the expansion card.

Appendix A-3. IO extension card

Appendix A-3-1. VH6-A100 (slot A IO card)

(1) Overview
VH6-A100 is slot A extension card which is installed when out of factory. Its IO function and points can meet
the general field use. It has 1 channel RS485 communication, 2 channels AI, 1 channel AO, 4 channels bipolar
input, 1 channel YT and 1 channel YR.
(2) VH6-A100 specifications
Type Terminal Name Function
Power supply 24V-0V +24V power supply Supply 24V power supply for input terminal X. max
 Type Terminal Name Function
output current 200mA.
X terminal power supply 24V, not for external use.
Supply +10V power supply, max output current 20mA.
10V-GND +10V power supply Generally used for external potentiometer speed
regulation.
When using an internal power source to drive the X
terminal:
COM and 24V short circuited to form NPN input.
COM is short circuited to 0V to form PNP input.

When using an external power source to drive the X

Power input
COM terminal:
terminal
NPN type input connection, COM connected to 24V+power
supply, and disconnected from the 24V terminal of the
inverter body.
PNP type input connection, COM connected to power
supply 0V, and disconnected from the 0V terminal of the
inverter body.
X1 Input terminal 1 Optocoupler isolation input. Compatible with bipolar
input.
X2 Input terminal 2
Input impedance: R = 2kΩ.
Digital input X3 Input terminal 3 The input voltage range is 9 ~ 30V.
terminal
In addition to the characteristics of X1-X3, it can also be
X4 Input terminal 4 used as a high-speed pulse input channel.
The highest frequency is 50 kHz.
Open collector output.
Digital output Digital output
Y1 Output voltage range: 0-24V.
terminal terminal 1
Output current range: 0-50mA.
Programmable defined as multi-function relay output
terminal.
Relay output TA-TC: normally close. TA-TB: normally open
TA1 TB1 TC1 Relay 1
terminal Contactor capacity
AC250V/2A (COSΦ=1).
DC30V/1A.
Analog
Input AI/Output AO
input/output GND Used in conjunction with AI/AO
Common Terminal
common terminal
AI1-GND Analog input AI1 Input voltage range: 0~10V (input impedance: 22KΩ).
Analog input Input current range: 0~20mA (input impedance: 500Ω).
AI2-GND Analog input AI2 Select voltage / current input by DIP switch.
Voltage output range: 0~10V.
Analog output AO1-GND Analog output AO1 Current output range: 0~20mA.
Select voltage / current output by DIP switch.
Communication 485+, 485- RS485 port Standard RS485 port. Use twisted pair or shielded wire.
DIP switch S1 AI1 OFF = 0-10V , ON = 0-20mA default is OFF
 Type Terminal Name Function
S2 AI2 OFF = 0-10V , ON = 0-20mA default is OFF
S3 AO1 OFF = 0-10V , ON = 0-20mA default is OFF

Appendix A-3-2. VH6-B100 (Slot B IO card)

(1) Overview
VH6-B100 is the expansion card of slot B, which can be used when the function or number of IO card of slot A
doesn't meet the field demand. It has 1 AI, 1 AO, 3 bipolar inputs, 1 YT and 1 YR.
(2) VH6-B100 specifications
Type Terminal Name Function
Supply 24V power supply for input terminal X. max
24V-0V +24V power supply output current 200mA. X terminal power supply 24V,
not for external use.
10V-GND +10V power supply Supply +10V power supply, max output current 50mA.
When using the internal power supply to drive the X
terminal:
COM and 24V are short circuited to form NPN input.
COM and 0V are short circuited to form PNP input.
Power supply
When using the external 24V power supply to drive the
COM Power input terminal X terminal:
NPN type input connection, COM connected to
24V+power supply, and disconnected from the 24V
terminal of the inverter body.
PNP type input connection, COM connected to power
supply 0V, and disconnected from the 0V terminal of
the inverter body.
X5 Input terminal 5 Optocoupler isolation input.
Digital input Compatible with bipolar input.
X6 Input terminal 6
terminal Input impedance: R = 2kΩ.
X7 Input terminal 7 The input voltage range is 9 ~ 30V.
Open collector output.
Digital output Digital output Output voltage range: 0-24V.
Y2
terminal terminal 2 Output current range: 0-50mA.
Can be high speed pulse output 50KHz.
Programmable defined as multi-function relay output
terminal.
TA-TB: normally open. TA-TC: normally close
Relay output
TA2 TB2 TC2 Relay 2 Contactor capacity
terminal
AC250V/2A (COSΦ=1).
AC250V/1A (COSΦ=0.4).
DC30V/1A.
Input voltage range: -10~10V.
Analog input AI3-GND Analog input AI3
Support PT100.
 Type Terminal Name Function
Select the voltage/PT100 through the DIP switch.
Voltage output range: 0~10V.
Analog output AO2-GND Analog output AO2 Current output range: 0~20mA.
Select voltage / current output by DIP switch.
S1 AI3 OFF = -10-10V, ON =PT100 default is OFF
DIP switch
S2 AO2 OFF = 0-10V, ON = 0-20mA default is OFF

Appendix A-4. Communication extension card

Appendix A-4-1. VH6-CC100 (EtheCAT communication card)

(1) Overview
EtherCAT is an open architecture Fieldbus System Based on Ethernet. It sets a new standard for the real-time
performance and topology flexibility of the system. At the same time, it also meets or even reduces the cost of
fieldbus. VH6-CC100 is an expansion card specially designed for EtherCAT protocol by XINJE company,
which is suitable for VH6 inverter. XINJE VH6 series inverter can be connected to the international standard
EtherCAT network and exist as a slave station with this card.
(2) Pin definitions
VH6-CC100 extension card has 2 RJ45 ports, the pin definitions are as the following:
Terminal Name Function
1 TX A+ Data send +
2 TX A- Data send -
3 RX A+ Data receive +
4 - -
5 - -
6 RX A- Data receive -
7 - -
8 - -

Appendix A-4-2. VH6-CN100 (CANopen communication card)

(1) Overview
CANopen conforms to CANopen application layer protocol of CAN Fieldbus international standard.
VH6-CN100 is an expansion card specially designed for CANopen protocol by XINJE company, which is
especially suitable for XINJE VH6 series inverter. Through this card, XINJE VH6 series inverter can be
connected to CANopen network of international standard and exist as a slave station.
(2) Pin definition
VH6-CN100 has two RJ45 ports, the pin definitions are shown as follow:
Terminal Name Function
1 CAN_H Connect to CANbus +
2 CAN_L Connect to CANbus -
3 CGND Connect to the ground of CAN
4~10 - -
(3) DIP switch
ON: connect 120Ω terminal resistance
OFF: Don't connect 120Ω terminal resistance

Appendix A-5. Encoder extension card

Appendix A-5-1. VH6-DM100 (multi-function incremental PG card)(Under development)

(1) Overview
VH6-DM100 is used for the feedback of motor speed and direction detection signal by frequency converter, so
as to achieve more accurate control of motor speed, direction and torque by frequency converter. It has
differential, push-pull, collector signal input, differential, collector frequency division signal output, encoder
input signal has optocoupler isolation, strong anti-interference ability.
(2) VH6-DM100 specifications
Type Specification
Encoder input type NPN collector, push-pull, differential
PG card frequency division output type Differential, NPN collector
Encoder power supply 5V/200MA
Encoder input frequency NPN collector 200KHz, differential 500KHz
Frequency division multiples Realization of 1 ~ 63 times with 6-bit dial switch
Cable specification 16~26AWG
Encoder signal input interface DB15 female port
Encoder frequency division output interface DB15 female port
(3) Pin definition
CN1 encoder signal input CN2 encoder frequency division output
Pin Definition Pin Definition Pin Definition Pin Definition
1 A+ 9 - 1 OA+ 9 Z
2 A- 10 Z- 2 OA- 10 OZ-
3 B+ 11 - 3 OB+ 11 -
4 B- 12 - 4 OB- 12 -
5 Z+ 13 - 5 OZ+ 13 -
6 0V 14 - 6 COM 14 -
7 5V power 15 - 7 A 15 -
8 GND 8 B
(4) LED status
VH6-DM100 expansion card has two LED lights to display the current expansion card status, and its functions
are shown in the table below:
LED Status Function
Always
LED1 PG card system normal
ON
PG card operation
Always
light green PG card system is abnormal, stop working
OFF
LED2 Always Encoder signal is very stable, no interference problem, no external
Encoder input OFF interference, and the speed is stable
 LED Status Function
LED red 2Hz The encoder signal is slightly unstable, the external interference is small or
flashing the motor is in the process of acceleration and deceleration
Always The encoder signal is seriously unstable, the external interference is great,
ON or the motor is in the process of acceleration and deceleration very fast
(5) VH6-DM100 frequency division output DIP switch S1-S6 definitions:
Division
S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 Value
factor
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 No output
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 1 0 2 2
0 0 0 0 1 1 3 3
0 0 0 1 0 0 4 4
.........
1 1 1 1 1 0 62 62
1 1 1 1 1 1 63 63
1: ON 0: OFF, default status is OFF.
(6) VH6-DM100 digital filter DIP switch S7-S8 definitions:
S8 S7 Function
0 0 Filter level 1
0 1 Filter level 2
1 0 Filter level 3
1 1 Filter level 4
1: ON 0: OFF, default status is OFF.
(7) PG card wiring:
VH6-DM100 PG card has two 10-core cables when out of factory, which is convenient for users to connect the
field encoder signal and PG card.

The user needs to define the signal pin connection of encoder according to the following core color and pin
number:
CN1 encoder signal input
Pin Color Function Pin Color Function
1 Yellow A+ 7 White 5V power supply
2 Yellow black A- 8 Gray -
3 Green B+ 9 Gray black -
4 Green black B- 10 Blue black Z-
 CN1 encoder signal input
Pin Color Function Pin Color Function
Wide face of
5 Blue Z+ Shield Shield
iron shell
6 White black 0V

CN2 encoder frequency division signal output

Pin Color Function Pin Color Function
1 Yellow OA+ 7 White OA
2 Yellow black OA- 8 Gray OB
3 Green OB+ 9 Gray black OZ
4 Green black OB- 10 Blue black 0Z-
Wide face of
5 Blue OZ+ Shield Shield
iron shell
6 White black COM

Appendix A-5-2. VH6-DM200 (simple incremental PG card)

(1) Overview
VH6-DM200 is used to feedback the motor speed and direction detection signal by the inverter to achieve the
inverter to control the motor speed, direction and torque more accurately. It supports the input of collector signal
of differential, push-pull and NPN type. The encoder input signal has optocoupler isolation and strong
anti-interference capability.
(2) VH6-DM200 specifications
Type Specification
Encoder input type NPN collector, push-pull, differential
Encoder power supply 5V/200MA, 12V/100MA
Encoder input frequency NPN collector 200KHz, differential 500KHz
Cable specification 16 - 26AWG
Encoder input interface DB15 female port
Frequency division Not support
(3) Pin definition
CN1 encoder signal input
Pin Name Description
1 A+ Encoder differential input A signal positive
2 A- Encoder differential input A signal negative
3 B+ Encoder differential input B signal positive
4 B- Encoder differential input B signal negative
5 Z+ Encoder differential input Z signal positive
6 GND Encoder power supply ground
7 +5V /+12V power supply Encoder 5V power supply
8 COM Collector input common terminal
9 - -
10 Z- Encoder differential input Z signal negative
Users should pay attention to the following when using PG card:

(1) Power supply mode of encoder

Common encoders have 5V ,12V and 24V power supply modes.
1 If the encoder is powered by DC5V power supply:

Users can directly use PG card power supply or external switch power supply for power supply. When the
collector (single ended) 5V connection is used, pins 7 and 8 must be short circuited (if the PG hardware version
is V1.1, it can be skipped and the dip switch can be turned to the 5V end). Connect the power supply of the
encoder to pin 7 of CN1, and connect the GND of the encoder to pin 6 of CN1. When using differential 5V
connection, connect the power supply of the encoder to pin 7 of CN1 and the GND to pin 6 of CN1.
2 If the encoder is powered by a DC 24V power supply, the 5V power supply of the PG card cannot meet the
power supply requirements. Users need to use an external DC 24V switch power supply to power the encoder,
or use the 24V power supply on the A card of the inverter body to power it.
If the hardware version of the PG card is V1.0 and the collector (single ended) or differential 24V connection
method is used, the power line of the encoder needs to be connected to the 24V of the external power supply,
the GND of the encoder and the 6th pin of CN1 need to be connected to the -24V (GND) of the external power
supply, and the 24V of the power supply needs to be connected to the 8th pin.
If the hardware version of the PG card is V1.1 and the collector (single ended) or differential 24V connection
method is used, the power line of the encoder needs to be connected to the 24V external power supply, the GND
of the encoder and pin 6 of CN1 need to be connected to the -24V (GND) external power supply, and the dip
switch needs to be turned to the 12V terminal.
3 When using an external power supply to power the encoder, connect the power supply 0V to the PG card

0V.
(2) Introduction to the connection mode between collector and differential encoder and PG card
1 Differential type connection: connect the output signal of encoder to A+,A-,B+,B-,Z+,Z- of PG card

respectively.
2 Collector (single ended) type connection: connect the output signal of the encoder to A-, B-, Z-.

3 If the encoder has no Z-phase signal, Don't connect.

4 The differential 5V encoder connection is the same for PG card versions V1.0 and V1.1.

(3) Introduction to the method of improving the anti-interference of PG card due to great on-site
interference
Method ①: connect one end of the shielding layer with the PE of the frequency converter.
Method ②: separate the encoder signal cable from the power cable.

If the PG hardware version is V1.1 and there are+5V and+12V dip codes on the PG
card, the corresponding voltage value dip code can be selected based on the encoder
power supply voltage, and pins 7 and 8 Don't need to be short circuited.

(4) PG card wiring

VH6-DM200 PG card has one 10-core cable when out of factory, which is convenient for users to connect the
field encoder signal and PG card.

The user needs to define and connect the encoder signal pins according to the following core color and pin
number:
CN1 encoder signal input
Pin Color Function Pin Color Function
1 Yellow A+ 7 White 5V/12V power supply
 CN1 encoder signal input
Pin Color Function Pin Color Function
2 Yellow black A- 8 Gray COM
3 Green B+ 9 Gray black -
4 Green black B- 10 Blue black Z-
Wide face of
5 Blue Z+ Shield Shield
iron shell
6 White black GND
Appendix B. Communication protocol

Appendix B-1. Communication protocol overview

VH6 series frequency converter provides the general RS485 communication interface in industrial control to
users. The communication protocol adopts MODBUS standard communication protocol. The converter can be
used as slave and communicate with the upper computer with the same communication interface and the same
communication protocol (such as PLC controller and PC) to realize centralized monitoring of the frequency
converter. In addition, the user can also use a frequency converter as the master, and connect several frequency
converters of our company as slave through RS485, in order to realize the multi-machine linkage of the
frequency converter. The remote control keyboard can also be connected through the communication port to
realize the remote operation of the frequency converter by users.
The Modbus communication protocol of this converter supports RTU and ASCII modes. The following is a
detailed description of the communication protocol of the inverter.

Appendix B-2. Communication protocol explanation

Appendix B-2-1. Communication protocol mode

The inverter can be used as the master or slave in RS485 network. When used as the master, it can control other
frequency converters of our company to realize multi-level linkage. When it is used as slave, PC or PLC can be
used as the master to control the inverter. The specific communication mode is as follows:
(1) The frequency converter is slave, and the master-slave point-to-point communication is adopted. When the
master uses the broadcast address to send commands, the slave doesn't respond.
(2) As the master, the frequency converter sends commands to the slave using broadcast address, and the slave
doesn't respond.
(3) Users can set the local address, baud rate and data format of the converter by keyboard or serial
communication.
(4) The slave reports the current fault information in the last reply frame to the master.

Appendix B-2-2. Communication port

The communication is RS485 interface, asynchronous serial, half duplex transmission. The default data format
is: 1 start bit, 8 data bits and 1 stop bit.
The default baud rate is 19200bps. Please refer to P9 group parameters for communication parameter settings.

Appendix B-3. Modbus-RTU protocol

Appendix B-3-1. Character structure

 RTU (1－8－2, no parity)
Start 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Stop Stop
bit bit bit

 RTU (1－8－1, odd parity)

Start 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Odd Stop
bit parity bit
 RTU (1－8－1, even parity)
Start 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Even Stop
bit parity bit

 RTU (1－8－1, no parity)

Start 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Stop
bit bit

 ASCII (1－7－1, even parity)

Appendix B-3-2. Communication data structure

(1) Data structure

 RTU mode
START Keep no input signal at least 10ms
Address Communication address: 8-bit binary address
Function Function code: 8-bit binary address
DATA（n-1） Data content: N*8-bit data, N<=8, max 8 bytes
……………
DATA 0
CRC CHK Low CRC parity
CRC CHK High 16-bit CRC parity code is composed of two 8-bit binary
END Keep no IO signal at least 10ms
 ASCII mode
1 character:
START
Keep no input signal greater than or equal to 10ms
Communication address: ASCII characters containing 2
Address
hexadecimal characters
Function code: ASCII character containing 2 hexadecimal
Function
characters
DATA（n-1） Data content: N * 8-bit data, N<=7, maximum 7 data bits
……………
DATA 0
One LRC checksum consisting of two hexadecimal ASCII
LRC CHK
characters
2-character CR, LF
END
Maintain no incoming or outgoing signal for at least 10ms
(2) Communication address
00H: all frequency converter (broadcast)
01H: communicate with 01 address inverter.
0FH: communication with 15 address inverter.
10H: communication with 16 address inverter. And so on... , up to 254 (FEH).
(3) Function code and data
Function code Explanation
Read the contents of registers, read multiple registers, but not more than 12
03H
at a time, each time can only read the same group of data
06H Write data into the register
08H Loop detection

(1) Function code 03H: read register

For example, read the register address 7000H (operation frequency).
RTU mode:
Format of inquiry information Format of response information
Address 01H Address 01H
Function code 03H Function code 03H
70H
Register address Byte number 02H
00H
00H 00H
Register quantity Data contents
01H 00H
CRC CHECK Low 9EH CRC CHECK Low B8H
CRC CHECK High CAH CRC CHECK High 44H

(2) Function code 06H: write into the register

For example, write 50.00Hz in the inverter address 1000H.
RTU mode:
Format of inquiry information Format of response information
Address 01H Address 01H
Function code 06H Function code 06H
10H 10H
Register address Register address
00H 00H
27H 27H
Data contents Data contents
10H 10H
CRC CHECK Low 97H CRC CHECK Low 97H
CRC CHECK High 36H CRC CHECK High 36H

(3) Function code 10H: write multi-group data to the register(supported by 3730 and above versions)
For example, write 1 to H0001(P0-01) and write 2 to H0002(P0-02) .
RTU mode:
Format of inquiry information Format of response information
Address 01H Address 01H
Function code 10H Function code 10H
00H 00H
Register code Register address
01H 01H
00H 00H
Register quantity Register quantity
02H 02H
04H(2*Register
Byte quantity CRC CHECK Low 10H
quantity)
Data 1 content high 00H CRC CHECK High 08H
 Data 1 content low 01H
Data 2 content high 00H
Data 2 content low 02H
CRC CHECK Low E2H
CRC CHECK High 62H

(4) Command code: 08H communication loop test (Not currently supported)
This command is used to test whether the communication between the master control equipment and the
inverter is normal. The frequency converter will return the received data to the main control equipment.
RTU mode:
Format of inquiry information Format of response information
Address 01H Address 01H
Function code 08H Function code 08H
01H 01H
02H 02H
Contents Contents
03H 03H
04H 04H
CRC CHECK Low 41H CRC CHECK Low 41H
CRC CHECK High 04H CRC CHECK High 04H
(4) Parity code
RTU mode: double byte hexadecimal number.
The CRC domain is two bytes, containing 16-bit binary values. It is added to the message after calculation by
the sender. The high byte of CRC is the last byte of the sending message. The receiving device recalculates the
CRC of the received message and compares it with the value in the received CRC domain. If the two values are
different, the received message has an error, discards the message frame, and doesn't respond to it. The next
frame data will be received.
The LRC field is a byte containing an 8-bit binary value. The LRC value is calculated by the transmitting device
and placed in the message frame. The receiving device calculates the LRC during the process of receiving the
message and compares it with the value in the LRC field of the received message. If the two values are not
equal, it indicates an error. LRC verification is relatively simple and is used in the ASCII protocol to detect the
content of the message field except for the starting colon and ending carriage return line number.
In ASCII mode, each 8-bit byte is split into two ASCII characters for transmission. For example, the
hexadecimal number 0x03 is split into ASCII characters "0" and "3" for transmission, corresponding to ASCII
codes 0x30 and 0x33 (binary transmission 00110000 and 00110011). The number of characters sent is twice that
of RTU. In RTU mode, each byte can transmit one hexadecimal character, such as the hexadecimal number
0x33, directly sent as hexadecimal 0x33 (binary 00110011), with a transmission efficiency twice that of ASCII
mode.
For example, reading the content of register address 7000H (operating frequency).
RTU mode data transmission: 01 03 70 00 01 9E CA
Sending data in ASCII mode: 3A 30 31 33 37 30 30 30 30 30 30 31 38 42 0D 0A (01 03 70 00 00 01 8B)

(5) Common ASCII code correspondence table

Binary Decimal Hex Char Binary Decimal Hex Char
0000 1101 13 0D CR (Enter) 0011 1000 56 38 8
LF (line
0000 1010 10 0A 00111001 57 39 9
break)
0011 0000 48 30 0 0011 1010 58 3A ：
0011 0001 49 31 1 0100 0001 65 41 A
0011 0010 50 32 2 0100 0010 66 42 B
0011 0011 51 33 3 0100 0011 67 43 C
0011 0100 52 34 4 0100 0100 68 44 D
0011 0101 53 35 5 0100 0101 69 45 E
0011 0110 54 36 6 0100 0110 70 46 F
0011 0111 55 37 7

Appendix B-3-3. Communication protocol parameter address

(1) The communication address of the function code parameter is shown in the table below. The high position
is the group number and the low position is the parameter serial number.
Parameter group Power off memory address Power off no memory address
P0~PF 0x0000~0x0FFF 0x3000~0x3FFF
A0~AF 0xA000~0xAFFF 0x4000~0x4FFF
U0 0x7000~0x70xx
 When reading function code data through the communication
For group P and group A function code data, the upper 16 bits of the communication address are the group
number, and the lower 16 bits are the serial number of the function code in the function group.
For example, P0-16, communication address is 0x0010, 00 represents the function parameter of group P0, and
10 represents the hexadecimal data format of 16.
A0-15, communication address is 0xA00F, A0 represents A0 group function parameter, 0F represents
hexadecimal data format of 15.

 When writing function code data through the communication

For group P function code data, the upper 16 bits of its communication address are divided into 0x0000 ~
0x0FFF or 0x3000 ~ 0x3FFF according to whether it is written into EPPROM. The lower 16 bits are directly
the serial number of the function code in the function group, for example:
Write function parameters P0-16:
When it is not necessary to be written in EPPROM, its communication address is 0x3010.
When it is necessary to be written in EPPROM, its communication address is 0x0010.

For group A function code, its communication address high 16 bits can be divided into 0xA000 ~ 0x0FFF or
0x4000 ~ 0x4FFF according to whether it is written into EPPROM. The lower 16 bits are the serial number of
the function code in the function group,
for example:
Write function parameter A0-15:
When it is not necessary to be written in EPPROM, its communication address is 0x400F.
When it is necessary to be written in EPPROM, its communication address is 0xA00F.
(2) Non function code
Definition Modbus address Function Note
Communication
1000H Communication frequency Write
setting
1: Forward running
2: Reverse operation
3: Forward jog
Control command 1100H 4: Reverse jog Write
5: Deceleration stop
6: Free stop
7: Fault reset
bit0: Y1 output control
bit1: Y2 output control
Digital output
1101H bit2: Reserved Write
terminal control
bit3: RELAY1 output control
bit4: RELAY2 output control
Y2 high speed pulse
1102H 0~7FFF represents 0%~100% Write
control
Analog output AO1 1103H 0~7FFF represents 0%~100% Write
Analog output AO2 1104H 0~7FFF represents 0%~100% Write
Torque setting
(3730 and above 1105H 0~1000 represents 0.0%~100.0% Write
versions)
 Definition Modbus address Function Note
1: Forward run
Operation status 1200H 2: Reverse run Read
3: Stop
0000H: None
0001H: Acceleration over current
0002H: Deceleration over current
0003H: Constant speed over current
0004H: Acceleration overvoltage
0005H: Deceleration overvoltage
0006H: Constant speed over voltage
0007H: Buffer resistance overload fault
0008H: Under voltage fault
0009H: Inverter overload
000AH: Motor overload
000BH: Input phase missing
000CH: Output phase missing
000DH: Radiator overheating
000EH: Contactor fault
000FH: Current detection fault
0010H: Motor tuning fault
0011H: Code disk failure
0012H: Motor short circuit to ground
fault
VFD fault 1210H Read
0014H: Wave by wave current limiting
fault
0015H: Pole position detection failed
0016H: UVW signal feedback error
0017H: Brake resistance short circuit
001AH: SVC stall fault
002BH: External fault
002CH:Communication (timeout)
failure
002DH: EEPORM read / write failure
002EH: Run time arrived
002FH: Power on time arrived
0030H: User defined fault 1
0031H: User defined fault 2
0032H:PID feedback lost during
operation
0033H: Switch motor during operation
0034H: Large speed deviation
0035H: Motor overspeed
0036H: Motor overtemperature
When the frequency is set by communication (P0-03=6), the corresponding communication frequency address
is fixed at 1000H,
 Data  P0 - 13 , Data can be a register or a direct numerical value. When users
Frequency （ Hz ） 
10000
communicate with a frequency using 485, they can calculate the given value Data according to this formula.
The given range of Data is 0~10000, corresponding to 0.00~100.00%, and the corresponding dimension is the
maximum output frequency (P0-13). Values beyond the given range cannot be written. When using 485
communication for frequency, users can calculate the given value Data based on this formula.
For example, setting the maximum output frequency of P0-13 to 50Hz and writing 10000 to the frequency
corresponding address H1000, the actual panel displays a frequency value of 100.00 * 50%=50Hz.
If there is a user password: after writing the correct password, read it within 30 seconds, otherwise it will need
to be rewritten.
WUXI XINJE ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
No.816, Jianzhu West Road, Binhu District, Wuxi City, Jiangsu Province, China
214072
Tel: 400-885-0136
Fax: (510) 85111290
www.xinje.com